Kelas 11 SMA

1 Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA – Aqila Course

STATISTIK

Penyajian data dapat dilakukan dalam bentuk diagram dan tabel distribusi frekuensi. Tabel distribusi frekuensi terdiri dari distribusi frekuensi tunggal, bergolong, dan kumulatif.

Contoh Tabel distribusi frekuensi bergolong

Istilah-istilah dalam distribusi frekuensi bergolong atau berkelompok adalah : a. Interval kelas

Tiap-tiap kelompok disebut interval kelas atau sering disebut interval atau kelas saja. 65 – 67 → Interval kelas pertama 68 – 70 → Interval kelas kedua, dst.

b. Batas kelas Berdasarkan tabel distribusi frekuensi di atas, angka 65, 68, 71, 74, 77, dan 80 merupakan batas bawah dari tiap-tiap kelas, sedangkan angka 67, 70, 73, 76, 79, dan 82 merupakan batas atas dari tiap-tiap kelas.

c. Tepi kelas (Batas Nyata Kelas) Tepi bawah = batas bawah – 0,5 Tepi atas = batas atas + 0,5

d. Lebar Kelas

Lebar kelas = tepi atas – tepi bawah

e. Titik Tengah Titik tengah = ½ (batas atas + batas bawah)

Daftar distribusi kumulatif ada dua macam, yaitu sebagai berikut. a. Daftar distribusi kumulatif kurang dari

(menggunakan tepi atas). b. Daftar distribusi kumulatif lebih dari (menggunakan

tepi bawah).

1. Ukuran Pemusatan Data a. Rataan Hitung (Mean)

Data Tunggal

Rataan = n

xxxx 1321 .... ++++

atau

Data distribusi frekuensi

atau

Data bergolong

Rata-rata untuk data bergolong pada hakikatnya sama dengan menghitung rata-rata data pada distribusi frekuensi tunggal dengan mengambil titik tengah kelas sebagai xi.

Cara lain yaitu menggunakan rataan sementara

Keterangan : sx = rata-rata sementara

å=

n

iii df

1= jumlah frekuensi × simpangan

b. Median

Data tunggal Untuk n ganjil: Me =

)(21

+nx

Untuk n genap:

Me = 2

122

++ nn xx

Keterangan:

2nx = data pada urutan ke-

2n

setelah diurutkan.

Bab 1 Statistik Matematika Kelas 11 SMA


Data bergolong

Me =

÷÷÷÷

ø

ö

çççç

è

æ -+

f

FNcb 2

1

2

Keterengan : b2 = tepi bawah kelas median c = lebar kelas N = banyaknya data F = frekuensi kumulatif kurang dari sebelum kelas

median f = frekuensi kelas median

c. Modus

Data tunggal Modus dari data tunggal adalah data yang sering muncul atau data dengan frekuensi tertinggi.

Data bergolong

Mo = ÷÷ø

öççè

æ+

+21

10 dd

dlb

Keterangan : b0 = tepi bawah kelas median l = lebar kelas (lebar kelas) d1 = selisih frekuensi kelas modus dengan kelas

sebelumnya d2 = selisih frekuensi kelas modus dengan kelas

sesudahnya

2. Ukuran Letak a. Kuartil (Q)

Keterangan: xmin = data terkecil xmaks = data terbesar Q1 = kuartil ke-1 Q2 = kuartil ke-2 Q3 = kuartil ke-3

Data tunggal

Letak Qi = ( )

4ini +

Misal: Data yang telah diurutkan: 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 7, 7, 7, 8, 8, 8, 9, 10, 12. Letak Q1 adalah :

( )433

415

41141

==+

sehingga: Q1 = x3 + ¾ (x4 – x3) = 4 + ¾ (4 – 4) = 4 Data bergolong Menentukan letak kuartil untuk data bergolong, caranya sama dengan data tunggal. Nilai kuartil dirumuskan sebagai berikut.

Qi =

÷÷÷÷

ø

ö

çççç

è

æ -+

f

FNi

lb i4

Keterangan: Qi = kuartil ke-i (1, 2, atau 3) bi = tepi bawah kelas kuartil ke-i N = banyaknya data F = frekuensi kumulatif kelas sebelum kelas

kuartil l = lebar kelas f = frekuensi kelas kuartil

Jangkauan interkuartil dan semi interkuartil

a) Jangkauan adalah selisih antara nilai terbesar dan nilai terkecil, dilambangkan dengan J.

J = xmaks – xmin b) Jangkauan interkuartil (H) adalah selisih antara

kuartil ketiga dan kuartil pertama: H = Q3 – Q1 c) Jangkauan semi interkuartil (Qd) atau

simpangan kuartil dirumuskan: Qd = ½ (Q3 – Q1) d) Langkah (L) adalah satu setengah dari nilai

jangkauan interkuartil: L = 3/2 (Q3 – Q1) atau L = 3/2 H

b. Desil Data tunggal

Letak Di di urutan data ke – 10

)1( +ni

Misal: Data diurutkan: 4, 5, 5, 6, 7, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 Letak desil ke-2 diurutan data ke-

( ) 2,21022

101102

==+

D2 terletak pada urutan ke-2,2 sehingga: D2 = x2 + 0,2 (x3 – x2). Jadi D2 = 5 + 0,2 (5 – 5) = 5 + 0 = 5,0

Data bergolong

Letak Di di urutan data ke – 10

)1( +ni, sedangkan

nilainya adalah


Di =

÷÷÷÷

ø

ö

çççç

è

æ -+

f

Fni

lb 10.

Keterangan : D = desil ke-i n = banyak data F = frekuensi kumulatif kelas sebelum kelas desil f = frekuensi kelas desil b = tepi bawah kelas l = lebar kelas

c. Persentil Data tunggal

Letak di urutan data ke - 100

)1( +ni

Data bergolong

Letak di urutan data ke - 100

)1( +ni, sedangkan

nilainya adalah

Pi =

÷÷÷÷

ø

ö

çççç

è

æ -+

f

Fni

lb 100.

Keterangan: Pi = persentil ke-i b = tepi bawah n = banyaknya data F = frekuensi kumulatif kelas sebelum kelas persentil f = frekuensi kelas persentil l = lebar kelas

3. Ukuran Penyebaran a. Jangkauan (Range) Data tunggal R = xmaks – xmin Data bergolong

Untuk data bergolong, nilai tertinggi diambil dari nilai tengah kelas tertinggi dan nilai terendah diambil dari nilai tengah kelas yang terendah.

b. Simpangan Rata-Rata (Deviasi Rata-Rata) Data tunggal

SR = å=

-n

ii xx

121

Keterangan: SR = simpangan rata-rata

n = ukuran data xi = data ke-i dari data x1, x2, x3, …, xn x = rataan hitung Data bergolong

SR = å

å=

=-

n

i i

n

i ii

f

xxf

1

1

c. Simpangan Baku (Deviasi Standar) Data tunggal

Data bergolong

d. Ragam atau Variansi Jika simpangan baku atau deviasi standar dilambangkan dengan s, maka ragam atau variansi dilambangkan dengan s2.



Soal Latihan Konsep 1. Dari data berikut, tentukan ukuran terkecil, ukuran

terbesar, median, kuartil bawah, kuartil atas, jangkauan data, dan jangkauan antarkuartil.

a. 75, 65, 50, 48, 72, 60, 75, 80, 48, 70, 55 b. 165, 158, 164, 173, 168, 160, 172, 156, 170,

164, 169, 155, 168 c. 212, 225, 220, 217, 224, 208, 222, 205, 220,

210, 205, 215 d. 315, 300, 306, 325, 320, 315, 330, 312, 325,

310, 320, 318, 305, 317 ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 2. Suatu keluarga mempunyai lima orang anak. Anak

termuda berumur t tahun dan yang tertua 2(2t – 1) tahun. Tiga anak yang lain masing-masing berumur (t + 2) tahun, (2t + 1) tahun, dan (3t – 1) tahun. Jika rataan hitung umur mereka 8,8 tahun, tentukan umur anak termuda dan tertua.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

3. Tabel berikut menunjukkan data tinggi badan Kelas XI SMA Megah.

Tentukanlah: a. modus b. median, kuartil bawah, dan kuartil atas c. rataan hitungnya. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 4. Tabel berikut menunjukkan data tabungan

domestik (dalam triliun rupiah) per triwulan dari tahun 1993–1998.

a. Buatlah diagram garisnya (tidak setiap tri

wulan). b. Pada triwulan dan tahun berapa tabungan

domestik terbesar? Jelaskan. c. Pada triwulan dan tahun berapa tabungan

domestik terkecil? Jelaskan. d. Berapa kali tabungan domestik mengalami

penurunan? Jelaskan. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



5. Dalam suatu ujian yang diikuti 42 orang diperoleh rataan nilai ujian 30, median 35, dan simpangan baku 8. Oleh karena rataannya terlalu rendah, semua nilai dikalikan 2, kemudian dikurangi 5.

a. Hitung rataan nilai yang baru. b. Hitung median yang baru. c. Hitung simpangan baku baru. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 6. Data banyak kendaraan yang parkir tiap dua jam

dari pukul 06.00 sampai 18.00 disajikan dalam tabel sebagai berikut.

a. Gambarlah data tersebut dalam diagram garis. b. Perkiraan banyak kendaraan yang parkir

antara pukul 11.00 – 13.00. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 7. Nilai ujian suatu mata pelajaran adalah sebagai

berikut.

Jika nilai siswa yang lebih rendah dari rata-rata

dinyatakan tidak lulus, tentukan banyaknya siswa yang tidak lulus.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

8. Diketahui diagram batang daun hasil tes Matematika di kelas XI IPA sebagai berikut.

a. Tentukan jumlah siswa yang ikut tes

Matematika. b. Tentukan nilai terendah dalam tes

Matematika. c. Tentukan nilai tertinggi yang dicapai dalam

tes. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 9. Dari data di samping, tentukan rataannya dengan

menggunakan rataan sementara.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



10. Dari data di samping, tentukan modusnya.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 11. Diketahui data seperti pada tabel di samping.

Tentukan nilai: a. D4, D9 b. P30, P70 ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 12. Tentukan median dari data yang disajikan pada

tabel distribusi frekuensi di samping ini.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................ 13. Dari diagram kotak garis di atas tentukan:

a. jangkauan, dan b. jangkauan semi interkuartil. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 14. Berat badan siswa kelas XI IPA disajikan pada

tabel berikut.

Tentukan: a. statistik lima serangkai, b. hamparan. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



15. Tentukan simpangan baku dari data yang disajikan dalam tabel di bawah ini.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



SOAL

1. Nilai rataan hitung sekelompok siswa yang berjumlah 40 orang adalah 51. Jika seorang siswa dari kelompok itu yang mendapat nilai 90 tidak dimasukkan dalam perhitungan rataan hitung tersebut maka nilai rataan hitung ujian akan menjadi ....

a. 50 d. 47 b. 49 e. 46 c. 48 2. Nilai Bahasa Indonesia dari 10 orang siswa yang

diambil secara acak adalah 3, 4, 4, 5, 6, 7, 7, 7, 8, 9. Pernyataan berikut yang benar adalah ....

(1) rataan hitungnya = 6 (2) mediannya = 6,5 (3) modus = 7 (4) jangkauan = 6 Pernyataan yang benar adalah .... a. (1), (2), dan (3) b. (1) dan (3) c. (2) dan (4) d. (4) e. Semua benar 3. Simpangan rataan hitung data 10, 10, 9, 8, 8, 7, 7,

6, 6, 5 adalah .... a. 7,6 d. 2,2 b. 6,6 e. 1,4 c. 2,8 4. Simpangan rataan hitung data x1, x2, ... , x10

adalah 2,29. Jika setiap data ditambah satu maka simpangan rataan hitungnya adalah ....

a. 0,29 d. 2,39 b. 1,29 e. 4,58 c. 2,29 5. Tes Matematika diberikan kepada tiga kelas siswa

berjumlah 100 orang. Nilai rataan hitung kelas pertama, kedua, dan ketiga adalah 7,8, dan 7,5. Jika banyaknya siswa kelas pertama 25 orang dan kelas ketiga 5 orang lebih banyak dari kelas kedua, nilai rataan hitung seluruh siswa adalah ....

a. 7,65 d. 7,68 b. 7,66 e. 7,69 c. 7,67 6. Nilai rataan hitung pada tes Matematika dari 10

siswa adalah 55 dan jika digabung lagi dengan 5 siswa, nilai rataan hitung menjadi 53. Nilai rataan hitung dari 5 siswa tersebut adalah ....

a. 49 d. 50,5 b. 49,5 e. 51 c. 50

7. Dari empat bilangan diketahui bilangan yang terkecil adalah 30 dan yang terbesar 58. Rataan hitung hitung keempat bilangan itu tidak mungkin ....

(1) < 37 (3) > 51 (2) < 40 (4) > 48 Pernyataan yang benar adalah .... a. (1), (2), dan (3) b. (1) dan (3) c. (2) dan (4) d. (4) e. Semua benar 8. Untuk kelompok bilangan 2, 3, 7, 7, 8, 8, 8, 9, 11 (1) modus lebih dari rataan hitung (2) median kurang dari rataan hitung (3) modus = median (4) modus = rataan hitung Pernyataan yang benar adalah .... a. (1), (2), dan (3) b. (1) dan (3) c. (2) dan (4) d. (4) e. Semua benar 9. Untuk memudahkan perhitungan, semua nilai data

pengamatan dikurangi 1300. Nilai-nilai baru menghasilkan jangkauan 28, rataan hitung 11,7, simpangan kuartil 7,4 dan modus 12. Data aslinya mempunyai ....

(1) rataan hitung = 1311,7 (2) jangkauan = 28 (3) modus = 1312 (4) simpangan kuartil = 657,4 Pernyataan yang benar adalah .... a. (1), (2), dan (3) b. (1) dan (3) c. (2) dan (4) d. (4) e. Semua benar 10. Tabel berikut memperlihatkan distribusi frekuensi

yang salah satu frekuensinya belum diketahui.

Rataan hitung yang mungkin dari data itu adalah

.... a. 0 d. 4 b. 2 e. 5 c. 3



11. Pernyataan yang benar berdasarkan tabel distribusi frekuensi berikut adalah ....

a. modus < median < mean b. mean = median c. modus < mean < median d. mean < median < modus e. median < modus < mean 12. Jika jangkauan data 1, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, x sama

dengan rataan hitungnya maka nilai x adalah .... a. 1 d. 4 b. 2 e. 5 c. 3 13. Diketahui data 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 1, x. Jika mean =

median = 2 maka nilai x adalah .... a. 0 d. 1,5 b. 0,5 e. 2 c. 1 14. Median dari data yang disajikan histogram berikut

adalah ....

a. 60,5 d. 67,5 b. 65 e. 70,5 c. 65,5 15. Empat kelompok siswa yang masing-masing

terdiri atas 5, 8, 10, dan 17 orang menyumbang korban bencana alam. Rataan hitung sumbangan masing-masing kelompok adalah Rp4.000,00; Rp2.500,00; Rp2.000,00; dan Rp1.000,00. Rataan hitung sumbangan setiap siswa seluruh kelompok itu adalah ....

a. Rp2.025,00 d. Rp1.625,00 b. Rp1.925,00 e. Rp1.550,00 c. Rp1.750,00 16. Diketahui data x1, x2, ..., x10. Jika setiap nilai

data ditambah 10 maka .... (1) rataan hitungnya ditambah 10 (2) simpangan rataan hitungnya tetap (3) mediannya ditambah 10 (4) modusnya tetap Pernyataan yang benar adalah .... a. (1), (2), dan (3) b. (1) dan (3)

c. (2) dan (4) d. (4) e. semua benar 17. Data tinggi badan 30 siswa sebagai berikut. 168 159 159 161 158 158 161 158 162 159 155

169 163 159 157 156 161 161 163 162 187 162 158 159 154 188 160 187 162 168

Rataan hitung dari data di atas adalah .... a. 163,13 d. 166,20 b. 164,13 e. 167,5 c. 165,03 18. Gaji rataan hitung pegawai suatu perusahaan

Rp250.000,00. Gaji rataan hitung pegawai prianya Rp260.000,00, sedangkan gaji rataan hitung pegawai wanitanya Rp210.000,00. Berapakah perbandingan jumlah pegawai pria dan pegawai wanita perusahaan itu?

a. 1 : 9 d. 3 : 2 b. 1 : 4 e. 4 : 1 c. 2: 3 19. Dalam tabel di atas, nilai rataan hitung ujian

matematika adalah 6. Oleh karena itu, a adalah ....

a. 0 d. 20 b. 5 e. 30 c. 10 20. Kuartil bawah dari data pada tabel distribusi

frekuensi berikut adalah ....

a. 66,9 d. 66,1 b. 66,6 e. 66,0 c. 66,2 21. Tabel berikut memperlihatkan suatu pengukuran.

Rataan hitungnya adalah ....

a. 1 d. 8 b. 3 e. 9 c. 4



22. Rataan hitung dari data berikut adalah ....

a. 4,5 d. 6 b. 5,0 e. 6,5 c. 5,5 23. Simpangan baku dari data 3, 6, 6, 2, 6, 2, 1, 1, 5, 3

adalah .... a. 1,6 d. 2,3 b. 1,9 e. 2,4 c. 2,1 24. Simpangan kuartil dari data tabel berikut adalah

....

a. 1,2 d. 4,8 b. 2,5 e. 5,9 c. 3,4 25. Dari jumlah lulusan suatu SMA yang diterima di

Perguruan Tinggi Negeri tahun 1996 – 2003 disajikan dalam diagram di bawah.

Menurut diagram garis di atas, prestasi yang

paling buruk terjadi pada tahun …. a. 1996 – 1997 b. 1998 – 1999 c. 1999 – 2000 d. 2000 – 2001 e. 2002 – 2003

26. Dari 400 siswa diperoleh data tentang pekerjaan orang tua/wali. Data tersebut jika disajikan dalam diagram lingkaran sebagai berikut. Berdasar data di bawah ini, pernyataan yang benar adalah ….

a. jumlah PNS 12 orang b. jumlah wiraswasta 90 orang c. jumlah pedagang 135 orang d. jumlah TNI/Polri 27 orang e. jumlah TNI 15 orang 27. Jika rata-rata nilai ujian pada tabel di bawah ini

sama dengan 6, maka a = ….

a. 9 1/6 d. 9 4/6 b. 9 1/3 e. 9 5/6 c. 9 ½ 28. Perhatikan diagram kotak garis di samping. Dari

diagram kotak garis tersebut nilai jangkauan dan jangkauan semi interkuartil berturut-turut adalah ….

a. 41 dan 10 d. 47 dan 10 b. 47 dan 11 e. 47 dan 10,5 c. 23,5 dan 10,5 29. Nilai rata-rata dari data yang ditunjukkan oleh

grafik di samping ini adalah ….

a. 5,6 b. 6 c. 6,6 d. 7

e. 7,6



30. Hasil tes Matematika terhadap 20 siswa digambarkan pada diagram batang daun di samping. Banyaknya siswa yang memperoleh nilai < 5 adalah ….

a. 2 b. 4 c. 7 d. 9 e. 13 31. Median dari data pada tabel di samping adalah ….

a. 11,83 b. 12,83 c. 13,83 d. 12,17 e. 14,35 32. Modus dari data yang disajikan pada tabel

distribusi frekuensi di samping adalah ….

a. 59,18 b. 60,12 c. 65,12 d. 68,12 e. 68,18 33. Kuartil bawah dari data yang disajikan pada tabel

frekuensi di samping adalah ….

a. 66,9 b. 66,6 c. 66,2 d. 66,1 e. 66,0

34. Rata-rata data pada tabel di samping jika dipilih rata-rata sementara 75,5 adalah ….

a. 67,5 b. 69,5 c. 7,15 d. 76 e. 77 35. Data penimbangan berat badan terhadap 10 siswa

dalam kg adalah : 50, 39, 36, 42, 34, 50, 47, 39, 44, 4. Nilai statistika lima serangkai dari data tersebut adalah ….

a. 34, 38, 41, 47, 50 d. 33, 38, 41, 47, 50 b. 34, 39, 41, 48, 50 e. 33, 38, 42, 48, 50 c. 34, 39, 42, 47, 50 36. Diketahui data : 23, 22, 29, 32, 21, 24, 24, 23, 25, 30, 31, 26, 27,

27, 28, 24, 25, 31, 26, 26, 27, 28, 30, 29, 28, 29, 28, 26, 27, 27. Jika dibuat interval kelas dengan tepi bawah 19,5 dan lebar kelas 3, maka banyak interval adalah ….

a. 4 d. 7 b. 5 e. 8 c. 6 37. Nilai dari D3 dan D9 (D = desil) dari data di

bawah ini berturut-turut adalah …. 40 42 46 53 58 60 62 63 63 66 68 68 68 70 72 73 74 76 77 78 78 79 80 82 84 85 88 90 92 96 a. 63,5 dan 88,9 d. 65,5 dan 89,5 b. 63,9 dan 89,8 e. 66,4 dan 89 c. 65,4 dan 88 38. Modus dari data pada histogram di samping

adalah ….

a. 25,0 b. 25,5 c. 26,0 d. 26,5 e. 27,0



39. Simpangan kuartil dari data di samping adalah ….

a. 21 b. 18 c. 14 d. 12 e. 9 40. Jangkauan dari data: 54, 59, 63, 71, 53, 63, 71, 75,

78, 80, 83 adalah …. a. 30 d. 15 b. 29 e. 10 c. 20 41. Persentil ke-75 dari data: 8, 6, 4, 3, 2, 9, 10, 15,

12, 14 adalah …. a. 11 d. 12,75 b. 11,5 e. 13 c. 12,5 42. Simpangan baku dari data: 7, 5, 6, 5, 7, 6, 8, 4, 8,

4, 6 adalah ….

a. 55112

d. 11552

b. 552

11 e. 1

c. 25511

43. Diketahui data x1 = 3,5; x2 = 5,0; x3 = 6,0; dan x4 =

7,5; x5 = 8,0 maka simpangan baku dari kelima data tersebut (deviasi standar) adalah ….

a. 0 d. 1,64 b. 0,94 e. 6 c. 1,0 44. Diketahui data di samping ini. Simpangan baku

dari tabel di samping adalah ….

a. 6 3 d. 91

b. 7 2 e. 86

c. 4 6 45. Dari data di atas, rata-rata berat siswa adalah . . . .

a. 46,3 d. 46,8 b. 46,5 e. 47 c. 46,6

46. Median dari susunan bilangan-bilangan 4, 3, 8, 7, 9, 5 adalah . . . .

a. 4 d. 6 b. 4,5 e. 6,5 c. 5,5 47. Jangkauan semi interkuartil dari data 9, 7, 12, 6,

14, 8, 10, 11 adalah . . . . a. 0,75 d. 1,75 b. 1,0 e. 2,0 c. 1,5 48. Nilai rata-rata ulangan matematika dari 39 siswa

adalah 45. Jika nilai matematika seorang siswa lain digabungkan maka nilai rata-ratanya menjadi 46. Nilai matematika siswa lain itu adalah . . . .

a. 58 d. 65 b. 85 e. 56 c. 90 49. Jika 9 adalah rata-rata dari 2, x, 10, 12 dan 15,

maka x sama dengan . . . . a. 30 d. 9 b. 12 e. 6 c. 10 50. Dari suatu penelitian diperoleh data sebagai

berikut.

Maka rata-rata dan nilainya berturut-turut adalah .

. . . a. 4,4 dan 5 d. 4,7 dan 4 b. 4,5 dan 5 e. 5 dan 4 c. 4,6 dan 4 51. Jika siswa x dalam rapornya memperoleh nilai: 8,

7, 6, 7, 5, 6, 8, 9, 8, 9, maka mediannya adalah . . . a. 5 d. 7,5 b. 6 e. 8 c. 7 52. Jangkauan semi interkuartil dari data: 12, 8, 10, 3,

6, 4, 5,12 adalah . . . . a. 2,75 d. 3,25 b. 2,5 e. 4,5 c. 3,5 53. Jika rata-rata dari data x, 3, x2, 9, dan 10 adalah

5,6 maka nilai x sama dengan . . . . a. 2 d. 3 b. 2,2 e. 4 c. 2,4



PELUANG

A. Kaidah Pencacahan 1. Aturan Perkalian Contoh: Tono mempunyai 3 buah baju berwarna

putih, cokelat, dan batik. Ia juga memiliki 2 buah celana warna hitam dan putih yang berbeda. Banyaknya pasangan baju dan celana dapat dipakai dengan pasangan yang berbeda adalah

Jadi banyaknya pasangan baju dan celana secara

bergantian sebanyak 3 × 2 = 6 cara. Jadi jika persoalan pertama dapat diselesaikan

dengan a cara yang berlainan dan persoalan kedua dapat diselesaikan dengan b cara yang berlainan, maka persoalan pertama dan kedua dapat diselesaikan dengan a × b cara.

Notasi Faktorial Faktorial adalah hasil kali bilangan asli berurutan

dari 1 sampai dengan n. Untuk setiap bilangan asli n, didefinisikan: n! = 1 × 2 × 3 × ... × (n – 2) × (n – 1) × n lambang atau notasi n! dibaca sebagai n faktorial

untuk n > 2. 2. Permutasi Permutasi adalah urutan yang mungkin dari

sejumlah unsur yang berbeda tanpa adanya pengulangan. Pada permutasi urutan diperhatikan.

Banyaknya permutasi dari n unsur diambil r unsur dinotasikan:

nPr = n (n – 1) (n – 2) (n – 3) … (n – r + 1) atau

nPr = ( )!!

rnn-

a. Permutasi Beberapa Unsur yang Sama Banyaknya permutasi n unsur yang memuat k, l, dan

m unsur yang sama dapat ditentukan dengan rumus:

P =!!!

!mlk

n

Misal: Banyak kata yang dapat disusun dari kata

AGUSTUS adalah Banyaknya huruf = 7, banyaknya S = 2, banyaknya

U = 2

P = 12601.2.1.2

1.2.3.4.5.6.7!2!2

!7==

b. Permutasi Siklis Permutasi siklis adalah permutasi yang cara

menyusunnya melingkar, sehingga banyaknya menyusun n unsur yang berlainan dalam lingkaran ditulis:

P(siklis) = ( )!1!-= n

nn

atau P(siklis) = (n – 1)!

3. Kombinasi Kombinasi r unsur dari n unsur ialah himpunan

bagian r unsur yang dapat diambil dari n unsur yang berlainan dengan urutan penyusunan unsur tidak diperhatikan.

Banyaknya kombinasi dari n unsur yang berbeda dengan setiap pengambilan dengan r unsur ditulis

nrC , nCr atau C(n – r) adalah:

nCr =!)!(

!! rrn

nr

P nr

-=

Binomial Newton

(x + y)n = kknn

k

nk yXC --

=å

0

B. Peluang Suatu Kejadian Kejadian adalah himpunan bagian dari ruang

sampel, sedangkan titik sampel adalah setiap hasil yang mungkin terjadi pada suatu percobaan. Jika A adalah suatu kejadian yang terjadi pada suatu percobaan dengan ruang sampel S, di mana setiap titik sampelnya mempunyai kemungkinan sama untuk muncul, maka peluang dari suatu kejadian A ditulis sebagai berikut.

P(A) = )()(

SnAn

Keterangan: P(A) = peluang kejadian A n(A) = banyaknya anggota A n(S) = banyaknya anggota ruang sampel S Jika kejadian A dalam ruang sampel S selalu terjadi

maka n(A) = n(S), sehingga peluang kejadian A adalah:

P(A) = 1)()(

==SS

SnAn

Frekuensi harapan dari sejumlah kejadian merupakan banyaknya kejadian dikalikan dengan peluang kejadian itu. Misalnya pada percobaan A

Bab 2 Peluang Matematika Kelas 11 SMA


dilakukan n kali, maka frekuensi harapannya ditulis sebagai berikut: Fh = n × P(A)

Peluang Komplemen Suatu Kejadian P(A) + P(AC) = ½ + ½ = 1 P(A) + P(AC) = 1 atau P(AC) = 1 – P(A) Peluang Dua Kejadian Saling Asing Peluang gabungan dua kejadian (kejadian A atau

kejadian B) dapat ditentukan dengan rumus sebagai berikut.

Misal A dan B adalah dua kejadian yang berbeda S, maka peluang kejadian AÈ B ditentukan dengan aturan:

P(AÈ B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A∩B)

Peluang gabungan dua kejadian saling asing (kejadian A atau B di mana A dan B saling asing)

Karena A dan B saling asing maka A∩B = 0 atau P(A∩B) = 0

Sehingga: P (AÈ B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A∩B) P(A) + P(B) – 0 P (AÈ B) = P(A) + P(B) Peluang Kejadian Saling Bebas Jika kejadian A tidak memengaruhi terjadinya

kejadian B dan sebaliknya atau terjadi atau tidaknya kejadian A tidak tergantung pada terjadi atau tidaknya kejadian B. Hal ini seperti digambarkan pada pelemparan dua buah dadu sekaligus. Maka peluang kejadian ini dapat dirumuskan:

P(A∩B) = P(A) × P(B) Peluang Kejadian Bersyarat Dua kejadian disebut kejadian bersyarat atau

kejadian yang saling bergantung apabila terjadi atau tidak terjadinya kejadian A akan memengaruhi terjadi atau tidak terjadinya kejadian B. Peluang terjadinya kejadian A dengan syarat kejadian B telah muncul adalah:

P(A/B) =)(

)(BP

BAP Ç , dengan syarat P(B) ≠ 0

Atau peluang terjadinya kejadian B dengan syarat kejadian A telah muncul adalah:

P(B/A) = )(

)(AP

BAP Ç, dengan syarat P(A) ≠ 0



Soal Latihan Konsep 1. Dalam satu keranjang terdapat 9 buah tomat. Jika

diambil tiga buah tomat secara acak dari empat buah tomat berwarna merah, tiga buah tomat berwarna hijau kemerahan, dan tiga buah tomat yang masih hijau. Tentukan banyaknya cara yang dapat dilakukan.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 2. Dari 36 orang siswa terdapat 22 orang gemar voli,

17 orang gemar tenis, dan 4 orang tidak gemar keduanya. Jika seorang siswa dipilih secara acak, berapa peluang:

a. seorang gemar olahraga voli; b. seorang siswa gemar olahraga tenis; c. seorang siswa hanya gemar olahraga voli; d. seorang siswa hanya gemar olahraga tenis; e. seorang siswa gemar olahraga voli dan tenis. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 3. Tiga orang perempuan harus duduk di antara

empat orang pria. Tidak ada perempuan yang duduk di pinggir dan tidak ada perempuan yang duduk berdampingan dengan perempuan. Dalam berapa cara kondisi tersebut dapat diatur?

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

4. Jabarkan dan sederhanakan bentuk-bentuk berikut. a. (3a + b2)4 d. (2x2 – 3y)6 b. (2p + q2)5 e. (3a2 – 2ab)6 c. (3p2 – q)5 f. (a + 2b – 3c)7

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................ 5. Satu stoples berisi 16 permen rasa cokelat dan 12

permen rasa jeruk. Jika diambil dua permen satu per satu tanpa pengembalian, tentukan peluang yang terambil itu adalah

a. keduanya rasa cokelat, b. keduanya rasa jeruk,

c. pengambilan pertama rasa cokelat dan pengambilan kedua rasa jeruk,

d. berturut-turut rasa jeruk, kemudian rasa cokelat.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 6. Dari lima buah angka 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 hendak disusun

bilangan genap yang terdiri atas tiga angka. Berapa banyaknya bilangan yang dapat disusun jika angka-angka itu:

a. boleh ada yang sama, b. tidak boleh ada yang sama ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



7. Sebuah kantong berisi 7 kelereng merah dan 5 kelereng kuning. Dari kantong itu diambil 3 kelereng sekaligus secara acak. Ada berapa cara pengambilan, jika kelereng yang diambil adalah:

a. ketiganya berwarna merah, b. ketiganya berwarna kuning, c. 2 kelereng berwarna merah dan 1 kelereng

berwarna kuning? ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 8. Terdapat 10 bola yang diberi nomor 1 sampai 10.

Jika diambil 2 bola secara acak dari kartu itu, berapa peluang terambil 2 bola dengan nomor bilangan prima?

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 9. Pada percobaan melempar dua buah dadu

sekaligus, tentukan peluang kejadian mata dadu yang muncul berjumlah lebih dari 4.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 10. Dalam pelemparan dua buah dadu sekaligus,

tentukan peluang keluarnya jumlah kedua mata dadu sama dengan 5 atau jumlah kedua mata dadu sama dengan 10.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................ 11. Tentukan banyaknya susunan yang berbeda dapat

dibuat dari kata: a. BUKU b. RATARATA c. LIMIT d. KALKULUS ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 12. Tentukan n jika: a. (n + 3)P2 = 56, b. 4 nP3 = 24 nC4. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 13. Diketahui kejadian A dan B adalah kejadian yang

saling bebas tetapi tidak saling lepas. Jika P(A) = 1/3 dan P(A∪B) = 3/5 , hitunglah P(B).

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



14. Tentukan koefisien suku ke-5 dari (–2x – y)7. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 15. Dalam sebuah kotak terdapat 12 bola merah dan 8

buah bola putih. Jika sebuah bola diambil dari dalam kotak berturut-turut sebanyak dua kali tanpa pengembalian, tentukan peluang yang terambil kedua-duanya bola merah.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



SOAL 1. 2. Dari angka 3, 5, 6, 7, dan 9 dibuat bilangan yang

terdiri atas tiga angka yang berbeda. Di antara bilangan-bilangan tersebut yang kurang dari 400 banyaknya adalah ....

a. 16 d. 8 b. 12 e. 6 c. 10 3. Dua buah dadu ditos sekali. Peluang kedua mata

dadu berjumlah bilangan prima adalah .... a.7/18 d.4/11 b.5/11 e.1/2 c.5/12 4. Sebuah dadu dan sekeping logam ditos bersama-

sama. Peluang dadu menunjukkan angka genap dan uang menunjukkan angka adalah ....

a.1/2 d.1/6 b.1/3 e.1/12 c. ¼ 5. Pada pengetosan dua buah dadu, peluang

munculnya mata dadu berjumlah kurang dari delapan adalah .... a. 5/36 d. 5/12

b. 7/12 e. 8/12 c. 5/6 6. Jika Cr

n menyatakan banyaknya kombinasi r elemen dari n elemen dan Cn

3 = 2n maka C 2n7 =

.... a. 16 d. 9 b. 12 e. 8 c. 11 7. Tiga keping uang logam ditos sebanyak 208 kali.

Frekuensi harapan munculnya minimal dua sisi gambar adalah ....

a. 156 d. 72 b. 130 e. 52 c. 104 8. Tiga orang siswa masuk ruangan rapat. Tempat

yang masih kosong 5 kursi. Banyaknya cara mereka dapat mengambil tempat duduk adalah ....

a. 72 d. 24 b. 60 e. 18 c. 48 9. Peluang pada pengetosan 7 mata uang sekaligus

yang muncul 3 gambar adalah .... a. 17/128 d. 31/128 b. 19/128 e. 35/128 c. 27/128

10. Jika P(n + 4,11) : P(n + 3,11) = 14 : 3 maka n = ....

a. 12 d. 9 b. 11 e. 8 c. 10 11. Koefisien x17 dari x5(1 – x2)17 adalah .... a. 12.376 d. –6188 b. –924 e. 924 c. –12.376 12. Dua buah dadu dilempar undi bersamasama.

Peluang munculnya jumlah mata dadu 9 atau 10 adalah ....

a. 5/36 d. 9/36 b. 7/36 e. 11/36 c. 8/36 13. Tono beserta 9 orang temannya bermaksud

membentuk suatu tim bola volley terdiri atas 6 orang. Apabila Tono harus menjadi anggota tim tersebut maka banyak tim yang mungkin dibentuk adalah ....

a. 126 d. 216 b. 162 e. 252 c. 210 14. Tiga buah kelereng merah dan empat buah

kelereng putih yang identik dimasukkan ke dalam sebuah kotak. Peluang terambilnya sebuah kelereng merah dan dua buah kelereng putih dalam sekali pengambilan adalah ....

a. 5/35 d. 24/35 b. 12/35 e. 30/35 c. 18/35 15. Dua buah dadu ditos bersama. Peluang munculnya

jumlah mata dadu tiga atau enam adalah .... a. 12/36 d. 1/36 b. 8/36 e. 5/36 c. 7/36 16. Peluang seorang pemain basket memasukkan bola

ke dalam keranjang dengan tepat adalah 0,2. Tentukan peluang pemain basket tersebut memasukkan paling sedikit sekali dari dua kali percobaan ....

a. 4/100 d. 96/100 b. 2/10 e. 2/100 c. 4/10



17. Diketahui bahwa 20% siswa sebuah sekolah dasar bercita-cita ingin menjadi dokter, 50% siswa bercita-cita menjadi pilot, dan 10% siswa bercita-cita menjadi dokter dan pilot. Jumlah siswa yang bercita-cita menjadi dokter atau pilot adalah ....

a. 20% d. 50% b. 30% e. 60% c. 40% 18. Pelat nomor mobil angkutan umum di suatu kota

terdiri atas tiga huruf dan dua angka. Banyaknya cara menyusun pelat nomor tersebut jika tidak boleh ada huruf atau pun angka yang berulang adalah ....

a. 26 × 26 × 26 × 9 × 9 cara b. 26 × 25 × 24 × 9 × 8 cara c. 26 × 25 × 9 × 8 × 7 cara d. 26 × 25 × 24 × 10 × 9 cara e. 26 × 25 × 10 × 9 × 8 cara 19. Peluang seorang siswa mendapat nilai baik dalam

mata pelajaran Matematika dan Fisika berturut-turut adalah 0,2 dan 0,4. Peluang siswa tersebut mendapat nilai baik untuk salah satu mata pelajaran tersebut adalah ....

a. 0,92 d. 0,8 b. 0,08 e. 0,6 c. 0,85 20. Peluang seorang anak menebak dengan tepat

huruf pertama nama temannya adalah .... a. 1/13 d. 2/52 b. 1/26 e. 2/26 c. 1/25 21. Peluang untuk memperoleh bilangan ganjil pada

sebuah dadu dan gambar pada sekeping mata uang yang dilempar bersama sebanyak satu kali adalah ....

a. 1/12 d. 1/3 b. 1/6 e. 1/2 c. ¼ 22. Dari 5 pria dan 4 wanita akan dipilih 3 pria dan 3

wanita. Banyak cara memilih ada .... a. 60 d. 20 b. 40 e. 18 c. 24 23. Banyak sepeda motor yang memakai nomor polisi

dengan susunan angka-angka 1, 2, 3, 4 dan 5 dan terdiri atas lima angka tanpa berulang adalah ….

a. 40 d. 240 b. 60 e. 400 c. 120

24. Nilai n yang memenuhi )!1(

!-nn

= 6 adalah ….

a. 2 d. 5 b. 3 e. 6 c. 4 25. Suatu rapat diikuti 7 orang yang duduk

mengelilingi meja bundar. Banyak cara duduk adalah ….

a. 270 d. 4.050 b. 460 e. 5.040 c. 720 26. Koefisien suku yang memuat x5 dari (x + y)8

adalah …. a. 20 d. 64 b. 28 e. 128 c. 56 27. Sebuah kantong berisi 7 kelereng merah dan 5

kelereng kuning. Dari kantong itu diambil 3 kelereng sekaligus secara acak. Banyak cara terambil 2 kelereng merah dan 1 kelereng kuning adalah ….

a. 103 d. 106 b. 104 e. 108 c. 105 28. Jika peluang kejadian hujan dalam kurun waktu

30 hari adalah 17/30 maka peluang kejadian tidak hujan dalam kurung waktu 30 hari adalah ….

a. 12/30 d. 15/30 b. 13/30 e. 16/30 c. 14/30 29. Pada pelemparan dua buah dadu satu kali, peluang

munculnya mata dadu berjumlah 8 atau 5 adalah ….

a. 5/19 d. 1/9 b. 1/4 e. 2/9 c. 5/26 30. Tiga uang logam dilempar bersama-sama. Jika A

adalah kejadian muncul tepat dua angka, maka P(A) adalah ….

a. ¾ d. 3/8 b. 1/8 e. 5/8 c. 2/8 31. Dua dadu dilempar bersama-sama. Peluang

muncul mata dadu pertama 3 dan mata dadu kedua 5 adalah ….

a. 6/36 d. 3/36 b. 5/36 e. 1/36 c. 4/36



32. Dua buah dadu dilempar bersama-sama. Peluang munculnya jumlah mata dadu 9 atau 10 adalah ….

a. 5/36 d. 9/36 b. 7/36 e. 11/36 c. 8/36 33. Kotak pertama berisi 5 bola merah dan 3 bola

kuning. Kotak kedua berisi 2 bola merah dan 6 bola kuning. Dari masing-masing kotak diambil sebuah bola secara acak. Peluang terambilnya kedua bola berwarna sama adalah ….

a. 1/8 d. 9/16 b. 5/16 e. 7/8 c. 7/16 34. Dari seperangkat kartu bridge diambil secara acak

satu lembar kartu. Peluang terambilnya kartu yang bukan As adalah ….

a. 1/52 d. 3/13 b. 1/13 e. 48/52 c. 5/52 35. Pada percobaan melempar sebuah dadu sebanyak

600 kali, frekuensi harapan munculnya bilangan prima adalah ….

a. 250 d. 450 b. 300 e. 500 c. 325 36. Jika berlaku nC4 = nP3 maka nilai n adalah …. a. 9 d. 27 b. 12 e. 35 c. 15 37. Pada suatu tiang diikatkan bendera 4 buah

berwarna merah, 2 biru, dan 2 hijau. Setiap susunan mempunyai arti yang berbeda. Banyaknya susunan yang mungkin adalah ….

a. 70 d. 280 b. 90 e. 420 c. 240 38. Dari 10 peserta olimpiade matematika yang

masuk nominasi akan dipilih 3 nominasi terbaik secara acak. Banyak pilihan yang dapat dilakukan adalah ….

a. 10 d. 120 b. 20 e. 720 c. 40 39. Dalam suatu pertemuan ada 30 orang dan saling

berjabat tangan. Banyak cara jabat tangan yang terjadi adalah ….

a. 435 d. 875 b. 455 e. 885 c. 870

40. Sebuah kantong berisi 6 bola merah, 4 bola putih, dan 8 bola biru. Apabila 3 bola diambil sekaligus secara acak, peluang terambil 2 bola putih dan 1 bola merah adalah ….

a. 55/204 d. 3/68 b. 5/204 e. 6/17 c. 7/102 41. Sebuah kartu diambil dari seperangkat kartu

bridge. Peluang terambil kartu As atau kartu warna merah adalah ….

a. 4/54 d. 28/52 b. 10/52 e. 30/52 c. 26/52

42. Hasil dari !14!16

adalah . . . .

a. 140 d. 250 b. 200 e. 3.360 c. 240 43. Banyaknya bilangan ganjil yang terdiri atas 3

angka yang disusun dari angka 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, dan 8 tanpa pengulangan adalah . . . .

a. 24 d. 48 b. 28 e. 60 c. 40 44. Doni, Dedi, Dodi, dan Doli akan bekerja secara

bergiliran. Banyaknya urutan bekerja yang dapat disusun dengan Dodi selalu pada giliran terakhir adalah . . . .

a. 3 d. 18 b. 6 e. 24 c. 12 45. Suatu tim bola voli terdiri atas 6 pemain yang

dipilih dari 9 orang. Banyaknya macam susunan yang dapat dibentuk adalah . . . .

a. 18 d. 54 b. 21 e. 84 c. 48 46. Ada 10 titik dan tidak ada 3 titik yang terletak

segaris. Banyaknya segitiga yang dapat dibuat adalah . . . .

a. 15 d. 120 b. 30 e. 240 c. 60 47. Suatu gedung mempunyai lima pintu masuk. Tiga

orang hendak memasuki gedung tersebut. Banyak cara agar mereka dapat memasuki gedung tersebut adalah . . . .

a. 10 d. 50 b. 20 e. 60 c. 30



48. Dua orang pergi menonton pertandingan sepak bola. Jika stadion itu mempunyai 4 pintu dan mereka masuk melalui sebuah pintu dan keluar dengan pintu yang berbeda, maka banyaknya cara yang terjadi adalah . . . .

a. 18 d. 60 b. 20 e. 75 c. 24 49. Pihak pengelola suatu perusahaan memerlukan 4

staf pengurus. Jika tersedia 7 calon, maka kemungkinan banyaknya susunan staf pengurus adalah . . . .

a. 210 d. 35 b. 105 e. 30 c. 42 50. Dalam suatu ruangan terdapat 30 orang. Setiap

orang saling bersalaman. Banyaknya salaman yang dilakukan adalah . . . .

a. 435 d. 875 b. 455 e. 885 c. 870 51. Akan dibuat plat nomor yang terdiri atas 3 angka

dari 8 angka yang disediakan. Banyak plat nomor yang harus dibuat adalah . . . .

a. 336 d. 24 b. 60 e. 10

c. 56

52. Dari 5 orang calon pengurus akan dipilih seorang ketua, wakil ketua, dan seorang bendahara. Banyaknya susunan pengurus yang mungkin terjadi adalah . . . .

a. 10 d. 60 b. 15 e. 125 c. 20 53. Kata “ADAP” dapat disusun secara berlainan

dengan . . . cara. a. 4 d. 18 b. 6 e. 24 c. 12 54. Banyaknya cara 5 orang untuk menempati dua

kursi yang tersedia adalah . . . . a. 5 d. 20 b. 6 e. 120 c. 10 55. Dari delapan orang pemain bulutangkis akan

dibentuk pasangan ganda. Banyaknya kemungkinan pasangan ganda yang dapat dibentuk adalah . . . .

a. 72 d. 16 b. 56 e. 10 c. 28

56. Dari 7 orang pengurus organisasi akan dipilih seorang ketua, wakil ketua, sekretaris, dan bendahara. Banyaknya susunan pengurus yang mungkin adalah . . .

a. 210 d. 260 b. 250 e. 840 c. 252 57. Dari 7 orang musisi akan dibentuk grup musik

yang terdiri atas 4 orang. Banyaknya cara membentuk grup tersebut adalah . . . .

a. 35 d. 560 b. 70 e. 840 c. 210 58. Banyaknya permutasi semua huruf pada kata

“MAHATMA” adalah . . . . a. 420 d. 2.520 b. 1.008 e. 5.040 c. 1.680 59. Dua buah dadu dilempar bersama-sama satu kali,

peluang munculnya mata dadu berjumlah 7 atau 10 adalah . . . .

a.7/36 d. 17/36 b. 9/36 e. 18/36 c. 10/36 60. Sebuah mata uang dan sebuah dadu dilempar

sekali. Peluang munculnya angka pada mata uang dan bilangan ganjil pada dadu adalah . . . . a. 5/6 d.1/4

b. 1/3 e.1/6 c. 2/3 61. Badu mengikuti ujian Matematika dan Kimia.

Peluang Badu lulus ujian Matematika adalah ½ dan peluang lulus Kimia adalah 2/3. Peluang Badu untuk lulus keduanya adalah . . . . a. ½ d. 5/6

b. 1/3 e. 1/6 c. ¼ 62. Di dalam sebuah kantong terdapat 3 bola merah

dan 5 bola putih. Dari dalam kantong tersebut diambil 3 bola sekaligus. Kemungkinan bahwa ketiga bola tersebut terdiri atas 1 bola merah dan 2 bola putih adalah . . . . a. 30/56 d. 3/8

b. 2/10 e. 11/15 c. 13/30 63. Dari 15 butir telur yang dijual terdapat 5 butir

yang cacat. Seorang ibu membeli 3 butir telur tanpa memilih. Nilai kemungkinan ia mendapat 3 butir telur yang baik adalah . . . . a. 28/81 d. 3/10

b. 1/5 e. 1/3 c. 24/91


64. Suatu kantong berisi 40 kelereng merah dan 10 kelereng putih. Bila dari kantong itu diambil 2 kelereng merah, maka peluang mengambil lagi satu biji tanpa dikembalikan berwarna putih dari kantong tersebut adalah . . . . a. 9/50 d. 7/54

b. 1/16 e. 5/24 c. 1/3 65. Dalam satu kotak terdapat 3 bola merah dan 6

bola putih. Diambil dua bola berturut-turut tanpa pengembalian. Peluang kedua bola itu merah adalah . . . a. 1/12 d. 7/12

b. 2/9 e. 1/3 c. ¼ 66. Pada percobaan melempar uang logam tiga kali,

besarnya peluang munculnya dua angka berturut-turut adalah . . . . a. ¼ d. 3/8

b. 1/3 e. 3/4 c. ½ 67. Jika 2 buah dadu dilempar sekali bersamaan,

maka peluang diperoleh jumlah mata kedua dadu paling sedikit sepuluh adalah . . . . a. ½ d. 1/12

b. 1/6 e. 1/4 c. 1/3 68. Pada percobaan melempar tiga keping uang logam

240 kali, frekuensi harapan kejadian muncul 2 gambar adalah . . . .

a. 30 d. 60 b. 40 e. 90 c. 45 69. Dua dadu dilambungkan bersamaan. Peluang

munculnya mata dadu yang jumlahnya kurang dari lima atau lebih dari delapan adalah . . . . a. 1/9 d. 5/12

b. 5/18 e. 1/6 c. 4/9 70. Pada pelemparan dua dadu sebanyak satu kali,

peluang munculnya mata dadu berjumlah 8 atau 5 adalah . . . . a. 2/9 d. 5/9

b. ¼ e. 5/26 c. 1/9 71. Sebuah kotak berisi 3 bola putih dan 5 bola hitam.

Diambil dua bola sekaligus dari kotak itu. Peluang terambil 2 bola hitam adalah . . . . a. 4/5 d. 5/14

b. ¼ e. 2/5 c. 5/8



TRIGONOMETRI

MATERI A. Rumus Trigonometri untuk Jumlah dan Selisih Dua Sudut

cos (α + β) = cos α cos β – sin α sin β cos (α – β) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β sin (α + β) = sin α cos β + cos α sin β sin (α – β) = sin α cos β – cos α sin β

tan (α + β) = ba

batan.tan1

tantan-

+

tan (α – β) = ba

batan.tan1

tantan+

-

B. Rumus Trigonometri untuk Sudut Ganda

sin 2α = 2 sin α cos α cos 2α = cos2α – sin2α atau cos 2α = 1 – 2 sin2α

tan 2α = a

a2tan1

tan2-

sin 21α =

2cos1 a-

cos 21

α = 2

1cos +a

tan 21

α = a

acos1

sin+

, cos α ≠ −1

tan 21

α =a

asin

cos1- , sin α ≠ 0

C. Perkalian, Penjumlahan, serta Pengurangan Sinus dan Kosinus

cos α cos β =2

)cos()cos( baba -++

sin α sin β = 2

)cos()cos(-

--+ baba

sin α cos β = 2

)sin()sin( baba -++

cos α sin β =2

)sin()cos( baba --+

cos α + cos β = 2 cos ½ (α + β) cos ½ (α – β) cos α – cos β = –2 sin ½ (α + β) sin ½ (α – β) sin α + sin β = 2 sin ½ (α + β) cos ½ (α – β) dan sin α – sin β = 2 cos ½ (α + β) sin ½ (α – β)

tan α + tan β = )cos()cos(

)sin(2baba

ba-++

+

tan α – tan β = )cos()cos(

)sin(2baba

ba-++

-

Bab 3 Trigonometri Matematika Kelas 11 SMA


Soal Pemahaman Konsep 1. Buktikan bahwa

a. sin (π/4 + 0) – sin (π/4 – 0) = 2 sin θ b. sin (π/6 + 0) + cos (π/6 + 0) = cos θ

c. ba

bababa

22

22

tantan1tantan

)tan()tan(

--

=-+

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 2. a. Diketahui α, β, dan γ menyatakan besar sudut-

sudut segitiga ABC, tan α = –3, dan tan β = 1. Tentukan tan γ.

b. Jika A + B + C = 180°, tunjukkan bahwa tan A + tan B + tan C = tan A tan B tan C

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 3. Jika 3 cos (x + π/6) = cos (x – π/6), tentukan: a. nilai tan 2x b. nilai cos 2x c. nilai sin 4x ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

4. Buktikan:

a. A

AAcos1

sin2

tan+

=

b. cosec 2A = A

Acot2cot1 2+

c. 2

tan1sec1sec 2 A

AA

=+-

d. A

AAA

cos2cos1

sin2sin +

=

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 5. Buktikan kebenaran identitas berikut.

a. AAAAA 3tan

2cos4cos2sin4sin

=++

b. )(

21tan

)(21tan

sinsinsinsin

BA

BA

BABA

+

-=

+-

c. AAAAA 1tan

3coscos3sinsin

=++

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 6. Diketahui sin A = 3/5 dan tan B = 5/12. Hitunglah: a. sin (A + B) b. cos (A – B) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



7. Tentukan nilai dari: a. cos 123° cos 57° – sin 123° sin 57° b. cos 100° sin 10° – sin 100° cos 10° ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 8. Nyatakan dalam bentuk paling sederhana. a. sin 75° + sin 15° b. cos 100° + cos 20° c. cos 35° – cos 25° ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 9. Jika cos 2A = 0,75, dengan 0° < A < 90°,

hitunglah: a. cos A b. sin A ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 10. Diketahui A, B, C adalah sudut-sudut dalam

sebuah segitiga. Jika A – B = 30° dan C = 5/6, hitunglah nilai dari cos A sin B.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................


SOAL

1. ...15tan

15cos15sin=

-o

oo

a. ( )1342-

d. – ÷øö

çèæ + 6

212

b. ( )1342+

e. – ÷øö

çèæ + 6

313

c. 2 - 3 2. sin (45° + α) – sin (45° – α) = ....

a. 2 sin α d. 2 cos α b. 2sin α e. Sin 2α c. 2 cos α 3. sin (30o + β) + cos (60o + β)= .... a. sin β d. 2 cos β

b. cos β e. Cos2b

c. 2 sin β

4. ba

batantan

)sin(-

- = ....

a. cos a cos b d. –sin a sin b b. sin a sin b e. cos (a–b) c. –cos a cos b 5. Jika sin A = 2/3 dan cos A < 0 maka tan 2A = ....

a. 5

54 d.

954

b. - 4 5 e. 4 5

c. 9

54-

6. Jika sin 38° = p maka sin 76° = ....

a. 2 p 21 p- d. 2p2 – 1

b. 2p2 + 1 e. 21 p

p-

c. 2p 7. Jika sin α = 4/5, cos β = 5/13, α dan β di kuadran I

maka sin(α – β) = .... a. 56/65 d. 63/65 b. - 33/65 e. 64/65 c. – 16/65

8. Jika cos α =35

dan sin β =47

- , α di

kuadran II, dan β di kuadran IV maka cos (α + β) = ....

a. 12

7253 +-

b. 12

3526 -

c. 12

7253 --

d. 12

358 -

e. 12

356 +

9. Jika x

xsec1

tan2

+ = 1; 0O ≤ x ≤ 90 O maka sudut x

adalah .... a. 0° d. 60° b. 30° e. 75° c. 45°

10. Bentuk xx

xx22 sincos

cossin-

ekuivalen dengan ....

a. x

xtantan1 2+

d. x

xtantan1 2+

b. x

x2tan1

tan-

e. x

x2tan1

tan+

c. 1+ tan x 11. sin (x + 30) + cos (x + 60)=… a. sin x d. cotan x b. cos x e. sec x c. sin x 12. –2 sin2 sin 15° sin 75° = .... a. – ¼ d. ½

b. – ½ 2 e. ¼ c. – ½



13. Jika sin θ = 7102

- , θ di kuadran IV maka

q21tan = ......

a. 52

e. - 53

b. 25

d. -25

c. -52

14. cos 110° sin 55° = ....

a. ½ (sin165o + sin 55o) b. ½ (sin165o - sin 55o) c. ½ (sin 55o - sin165o) d. ½ (cos165o + cos 55o) e. ½ (cos165o + cos 55o) 15. cos 35° – cos 75° = ... a. –2 sin 55° sin 20° b. 2 sin 55° cos 20° c. –2 sin 55° cos 20° d. 2 cos 55° sin 20° e. –2 cos 55°cos 20° 16. Periode grafik fungsi y = 1/3 cos Px adalah 2π/3

maka nilai P adalah .... a. 1/3 d. 6

b. 2 e. 2/3 c. 3 17. Identitas yang benar adalah .... (1) cos 2x = cos4x – sin4x (2) cos 2x = (cos x + sin x) (cos x – sin x)

(3) cos 2x = sin2p

cos 2x – cos 2p

sin 2x

(4) cos 2x = 2 cos2x + 1 a. (1), (2), dan (3) b. (1), dan (3) c. (2) dan (4) d. (4) e. semua benar 18. Fungsi y = 4 sin x sin (x + 60°) mencapai nilai

minimum pada .... a. x = 60° + k 360° b. x = 60° + k 180° c. x = 30° + k 360° d. x = 30° + k 180° e. x = k 360°

19. sin 29221 o = ....

a. 3221

- d. - 3221

-

b. - 22221

- e. - 2221

-

c. 2221

-

20. Jika cos θ = ¾ maka tan 2θ = ....

a. 24/7 d. – 24/5 b. – 24/7 e. ± 24/7 c. 24/5 21. Diketahui sin A = 13/12 , sin B = 5/3 , dengan A

dan B dikuadran I. Maka nilai cos (A + B) adalah ….

a. – 16/65 d. 65/16 b. – 7/25 e. 65/15 c. 7/25 22. Sin 30° = ….. a. – ¼ d. ½ b. – ½ e. 1 c. ¼ 23. 2 sin 15° cos 15° = ….

a. 231

d. 321

b. 21

e. 1

c. – 221

24. Jika tan A = 1/2dan tan B = 1/3, maka tan (A + B)

adalah ….

a. 221

d. 331

b. 321

e. 1

c. 231

25. Sin 17° cos 13° + cos 17° sin 13° = …. a. ½ d. 1

b. 221

e. 0

c. 321



26. 2 cos2 30° – 1 = …. a. ½ d. 1

b. 221

e. 0

c. 321

27. Diketahui sin x = 7/25 dan sin y = 3/5, dengan x

dan y sudut tumpul. Sin (x + y) = …. a. 117/125 d. – 3/5 b. 3/5 e. – 4/125 c. – 4/5

28. Jika sin (90 – A)° = 2 3 , maka tan A = ….

a. 361

d. 3

b. 331

e. 2 3

c. 321

29. Sin 75° cos 15° + cos 75° sin 15° = …..

a. 0 d. 321

b. 6 e. 1

c. 621

30. Jika tan 5° = p, maka tan 40° = ….

a. pp

-+

11

d. 1

1-

+p

p

b. pp

+-

11

e. 211

pp

+-

c. p-1

1

31. xx

2cos12cos1

-+

senilai dengan …

a. tan x d. cot2 x b. cot x e. cos2 x c. tan2 x 32. Cos 2A – 2 cos2A = …. a. –1 d. –2 cos A b. 1 e. 2 cos A sin A c. –2 sin A

33. Cos 41° cos 11° + sin 41° sin 11° = ….

a. 321

d. 0

b. 221

e. –1

c. ½

34. Sin (x – 3p

) + sin (x – 3

4p ) = ….

a. 2 sin x d. –1 b. sin x e. –sin x c. 0 35. Jika cos 2A = 8/10, dengan A sudut lancip, maka

tan A adalah …. a. 1/3 d. 1/10

b. 1/5 e. 1/9 c. 1/20



LINGKARAN

MATERI A. Persamaan Lingkaran

· Pusat O (0, 0) dan jari-jari r: x2 + y2 = r2 · Pusat T (a, b) dan jari-Jari r: (x – a)2 + (y – b)2 = r2

Jika –2a = 2A, –2b = 2B dan a2 + b2 – r2 = C, maka diperoleh bentuk umum persamaan lingkaran: x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0, di mana pusatnya (–A, –B) dan jari-jari

lingkaran (r) = 222 cba -+ atau r = 222 CBA -+

B. Posisi Titik P(x1, y1) terhadap Lingkaran 1) Titik P(x1, y1) terletak di dalam lingkaran, jika berlaku

x12 + y1

2 <r2 atau (x1 – a)2 + (y1 – b)2 < r2 2) Titik P(x1, y1) terletak pada lingkaran, jika berlaku

x12 + y1

2 = r2 atau (x1 – a)2 + (y1 – b)2 = r2 3) Titik P(x1, y1) terletak di luar lingkaran, jika berlaku

x12 + y1

2 > r2 atau (x1 – a)2 + (y1 – b)2 > r2

C. Posisi Garis y = mx + n terhadap Suatu Lingkaran

Jika persamaan kuadrat ax2 + bx + c = 0, D = diskriminan = b2 – 4ac Jarak pusat lingkaran P(x1, y1) ke garis ax + by + c = 0 adalah

k = 22

21

bacbyax

+

++

Maka ada tiga kemungkinan posisi garis terhadap suatu lingkaran yaitu: 1) Jika D < 0, maka persamaan garis y = mx + n terletak di luar lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0, dan tidak

memotong lingkaran atau jarak pusat lingkaran ke garis lebih dari jari-jari lingkaran (k > r). 2) Jika D = 0, maka persamaan garis y = mx + n terletak pada lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0 dan

memotong lingkaran di satu titik atau jarak pusat lingkaran ke garis sama dengan jari-jari lingkaran (k = r). 3) Jika D > 0, maka persamaan garis garis y = mx + n terletak di dalam lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0, dan

memotong lingkaran di dua titik atau jarak pusat lingkaran ke garis lebih kecil dari jari-jari lingkaran (k < r).

D. Persamaan Garis Singgung Lingkaran · Melalui titik P (x1, y1) pada lingkaran x2 + y2 = r2 adalah x1x + y1y = r2 · Melalui titik P (x1, y1) pada lingkaran (x – a)2 + (y – b)2 = r2, adalah (x1 – a) (x – a) + (y1 – b) (y – b) = r2 · Melalui Titik Q(x1, y1) pada Lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0 adalah x1x + y1y + A(x1 + x) + B(y1 + y) + C

= 0 · Melalui suatu titik di luar lingkaran Diketahui titik P(x1, y1) berada di luar lingkaran L: x2 + y2 = r2 … (1) Misalkan, persamaan garis singgung yang melalui P(x1, y1) adalah g: y = y1 + m(x – x1) …(2). Jika g menyinggung L di titik Q, substitusikan persamaan (2) ke persamaan (1) sehingga diperoleh persamaan kuadrat dalam x. Selanjutnya, cari diskriminan (D) persamaan kuadrat tersebut. Oleh karena g menyinggung L maka D = 0 sehingga nilai-nilai m dapat diperoleh. Apabila nilai m diketahui, dapat ditentukan persamaan garis singgung g dengan cara menyubstitusikan m ke persamaan garis g tersebut. · Dengan gradien m terhadap lingkaran x2 + y2 = r2 adalah

y = mx ± r 21 m+ · Dengan gradien m terhadap lingkaran (x – a)2 + (y – b)2 = r2 adalah

y – b = m(x – a) ± r 21 m+

· Dengan gradien m terhadap lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0 adalah: y – b = m(x – a) ± r 21 m+

Bab 4 Lingkaran Matematika Kelas 11 SMA


Soal Pemahaman Konsep

1. Carilah persamaan lingkaran yang melalui titik (7, –8) dan (0, 9) dan pusatnya terletak pada garis x – 2y = 1.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 2. Gedung Parthenon dibangun 440 SM. Gedung

tersebut dirancang oleh arsitek Yunani menggunakan perbandingan nisbah emas. Perhatikan gambar berikut.

Pada titik tengah sisi persegi ABCD dibuat busur

lingkaran dengan pusat G dan jari-jari GD. Lingkaran tersebut memotong perpanjangan BC di F. Nisbah BF : AB disebut perbandingan nisbah emas. Jika diketahui busur DF memenuhi persamaan x2+ y2 – 138y – 44 = 0, berapa perbandingan nisbah emas gedung Parthenon?

(Petunjuk: perhitungan dibulatkan sampai satu desimal)

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 3. Carilah persamaan garis singgung pada lingkaran

x2 + y2 = 25 yang dapat ditarik dari titik (7, –1). ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

4. Carilah persamaan lingkaran yang melalui (0, 0), jari-jari 5 dan pusatnya terletak pada garis x – y = 1.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 5. Berapakah jarak terdekat dari titik (–7, 2) ke

lingkaran dengan persamaan x2 + y2 + 10x + 14y – 151 = 0?

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 6. Tentukan pusat dan jari-jari lingkaran dari: a. x2 + y2 – 4x + 2y + 1 = 0 b. x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 7. Tentukan persamaan lingkaran yang melalui: a. (3, 4), (–1, –4), dan (5, –2) b. (5, 0), (0, 5), dan (–1, 0) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



8. Tentukan persamaan lingkaran dengan jari-jari 6 dan pusat di titik berikut.

a. O(0, 0) b. A(–2, 5) c. B(3, –4) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 9. Diketahui persamaan lingkaran x2 + y2 = a2.

Tentukan batas-batas nilai a supaya: a. titik (5, 3) pada lingkaran,

b. titik (2, 4) di luar lingkaran, c. titik (2, 5) di dalam lingkaran. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 10. Sisi suatu persegi mempunyai persamaan x = 5, x

= –5, y = 5, dan y = –5. Tentukan persamaan lingkaran jika:

a. menyinggung semua sisi persegi, b. melalui semua titik persegi. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 11. Tentukan persamaan garis singgung pada

lingkaran: a. (x – 3)2 + (y + 1)2 = 25 di titik (7, 2), b. x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 27 = 0 di titik (4, 1). ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

12. Tentukan persamaan garis singgung lingkaran x2 + y2 = 41 yang:

a. melalui titik berabsis 5 pada lingkaran, b. sejajar garis L: 3x + 3y = 10, c. tegak lurus garis L: 3x – 6y = 8. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 13. Jika garis y = –3x + n menyinggung lingkaran x2 +

y2 – 2x – 19 = 0, tentukan nilai n dan titik singgungnya.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 14. Tentukan persamaan garis singgung yang tegak

lurus garis 3x + y + 3 = 0 pada lingkaran x2 + y2 – 8x – 4y – 20 = 0.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 15. Jika garis g adalah garis singgung melalui titik (3,

4) pada lingkaran x2 + y2 = 25, tentukan persamaan garis singgung lingkaran x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 4 = 0 yang sejajar garis g.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



SOAL 1. Persamaan lingkaran dengan pusat (3,4) dan

menyinggung 2x – y + 5 = 0 adalah .... a. (x – 4)2 + (y – 3)2 = 42 b. (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 49 c. (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 49/5 d. (x + 3)2 – (y + 4)2 = 49 e. (x – 3)2 – (y – 4)2 = 42 2. Diketahui lingkaran L dengan persamaan x2 + y2 =

25 dan P(5, 5) maka letak titik P adalah .... a. di dalam lingkaran L b. di luar lingkaran L c. pada lingkaran L d. sejauh 5 satuan dari pusat lingkaran L e. sejauh 5 satuan dari pusat lingkaran L 3. Diketahui lingkaran x2 + y2 + 6x – 8y + 21 = 0.

Jika M adalah pusat lingkaran dan R adalah jari-jari lingkaran tersebut, koordinat titik M dan panjang R berturut-turut adalah ....

a. (–3, –4) dan 2 d. (–3, –4) dan 3 b. (3, 4) dan 2 e. (3, 4) dan 3 c. (–3, 4) dan 2 4. Persamaan garis singgung pada lingkaran x2 + y2 =

100 di titik (8, –6) menyinggung lingkaran dengan pusat (4, –8) dan jari-jari R. Nilai R adalah ....

a. 2 d. 5 b. 3 e. 6 c. 4 5. Lingkaran x2 + y2 + 4x + 4y = p akan

menyinggung sumbu-x dan sumbu-y jika p sama dengan ....

a. 8 d. –4 b. 4 e. –8 c. 0 6. Lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2px = 0 dengan p bilangan

real konstan, selalu menyinggung .... a. sumbu-x saja b. sumbu-y saja c. sumbu-x dan sumbu-y d. garis x = a dan garis x = –a e. garis y = 2a dan garis y = –2a 7. Persamaan lingkaran dengan pusat (2, 1) dan

melalui (4, –1) adalah .... a. x2 + y2 – 6x – 3y = 0 b. x2 + 2y2 –3x –2y –3 = 0 c. x2 + y2 – 4x – 2y – 3 = 0 d. 2x2 + y2 – 2x – 3y –1 = 0 e. 2x2 + y2 – 3x – 2y + 1= 0

8. Jika titik P(0, 3) terletak pada lingkaran x2 + y2 = 9, persamaan garis singgung pada lingkaran di titik P adalah ....

a. y = –2x – 3 d. x = 0 b. y = –x e. x = –3 c. y = 3 9. Diketahui lingkaran L dengan persamaan x2 + y2 –

2x – 4y – 4 = 0 dan garis g dengan persamaan y – x – 1 = 0 maka ....

a. g tidak memotong L b. g memotong L di satu titik c. g memotong L di dua titik d. g melalui titik pusat L e. g memotong L dan melalui titik pusat 10. Persamaan garis singgung lingkaran x2 + y2 – 2x –

4y – 4 = 0 di titik (0, 5) adalah .... a. y = 5x +1 d. y = x + 5 b. y = 3x – 5 e. y = 5 c. y = 4x – 3 11. Persamaan lingkaran x2 + y2 – mx + 7y + 4 = 0

menyinggung sumbu-x maka nilai m adalah .... a. –16 d. 11 atau 3 b. –4 e. 16 c. 4 atau –4 12. Diketahui lingkaran x2 + y 2 = p dan garis x + y – z

= 0. Supaya garis dan lingkaran ini berpotongan di dua titik yang berbeda maka p harus sama dengan ....

a. ½ d. 3 b. 1 e. 4 c. 2 13. Diketahui lingkaran L dengan persamaan x2 + y2–

2x – 6y + 1 = 0. Pernyataan berikut yang benar adalah ....

a. jari-jari r = 2 2 b. titik pusat lingkaran P(–1,3) c. lingkaran menyinggung sumbu-y d. lingkaran menyinggung sumbu-x e. lingkaran melalui titik (0,0) 14. Supaya persamaan x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y – c = 0

menyatakan suatu persamaan lingkaran maka c harus memenuhi ....

a. c > 15 d. c > 13 b. c < 15 e. c < 13 c. c > 14 15. Persamaan garis singgung lingkaran x2 + y2 – 2x –

10y + 17 = 0 di titik (1, 2) adalah .... a. x = 1 d. y = 2 b. x = 2 e. y = x c. y = 1



16. Jika garis g: x – 2y = 5 memotong lingkaran x2 + y2 – 4x + 8y + 10 = 0 di titik A dan B, luas segitiga yang dibentuk oleh A, B, dan pusat lingkaran adalah.....

a. 10 d. 5

b. 2 5 e. 221

c. 10 17. Persamaan lingkaran pada gambar berikut adalah

....

a. x2 + y2 + 8x + 6y + 21 = 0 b. x2 + y2 + 8x + 6y – 21 = 0 c. x2 + y2 + 8x – 6y + 21 = 0 d. x2 + y2 – 8x + 6y + 21 = 0 e. x2 + y2 – 8x – 6y + 21 = 0 18. Diketahui lingkaran dengan persamaan x2 + y2+

Ax + By + C = 0. Lingkaran ini akan menyinggung sumbu-x di titik (0,0) jika dipenuhi ....

a. A = 0 dan B = 1 b. A = 0 dan B = 0 c. A = 0 dan C = 0 d. A = 0 dan C = 1 e. A = 0 dan C = –1 19. Persamaan lingkaran yang melalui titik-titik sudut

persegi ABCD berikut adalah ....

a. x2 + y2 – 2x – y + 1 = 0 b. x2 + y2 – 2x + y + 1 = 0 c. x2 + y2 + 2x – y – 1 = 0 d. x2 + y2 – 2x + y + 1 = 0 e. x2 + y2 + 2x + y + 1 = 0 20. Supaya titik (1, 1) terletak pada lingkaran x2 + y2 –

px + 2y + 1 = 0, nilai p harus sama dengan .... a. 1 d. 4 b. 2 e. 3 c. 3

21. Persamaan lingkaran dengan pusat (0, 0) dan jari-jari 3 adalah ….

a. x2 + y2 = 2 d. x2 + y2 = 16 b. x2 + y2 = 4 e. x2 – y2 = 16 c. x2 + y2 = 9 22. Persamaan lingkaran yang berpusat di (2, –3)

dengan jari-jari 7 adalah ….. a. x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y – 49 = 0 b. x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y – 36 = 0 c. x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y – 49 = 0 d. x2 + y2 – 2x + 3y – 49 = 0 e. x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y – 36 = 0 23. Jika lingkaran x2 + y2 – 4x – 10y = 0 mempunyai

pusat (2, a), maka nilai a adalah …. a. –3 d. 5 b. –5 e. 10 c. 2 24. Pusat dan jari-jari lingkaran dengan persamaan

9x2 +9y2 – 6x + 12y – 4 = 0 berturut-turut adalah ….

a. (1, 2) dan 3 d. ( 1/3 , 1) dan 5 b. (1, 3) dan 2 e. ( 1/3 , –2/3 ) dan 1 c. ( 1/2 , 1/3 ) dan 3 25. Persamaan lingkaran luar segitiga OAB dengan

O(0, 0), B(–2, 4), dan C(–1, 7) adalah …. a. x2 + y2 + 6x + 8y = 0 b. x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y = 0 c. x2 + y2 + 6x – 8y = 0 d. x2 + y2 – 3x – 4y = 0 e. x2 + y2 – 6x + 8y = 0 26. Jika titik P(p, 3) terletak pada lingkaran L: x2 + y2

– 13x + 5y + 6 = 0, maka nilai p adalah …. a. 3 d. –3 atau 10 b. –1 e. –3 atau –10 c. 3 atau 10 27. Titik berikut yang terletak di luar lingkaran L: x2 +

y2 + 4x – 8y – 5 = 0 adalah …. a. (3, 0) d. (1, 1) b. (0, 7) e. (4, 3) c. (2, 1) 28. Kedudukan garis x + 3y – 5 = 0 terhadap lingkaran

L: x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 5 = 0 adalah …. a. memotong lingkaran di dua titik b. memotong lingkaran di satu titik c. tidak memotong lingkaran d. memotong lingkaran di tiga titik

e. tidak menyinggung lingkaran



29. Diketahui persamaan lingkaran x2 + y2 = 36. Jika garis kutub titik P terhadap lingkaran ini mempunyai persamaan 2x – y – 9 = 0 maka koordinat titik P adalah ….

a. (2, 1) d. (8, –4) b. (8, 4) e. (–8, 2) c. (2, –1) 30. Persamaan garis singgung berabsis 4 pada

lingkaran x2 + y2 = 25 adalah …. a. 4x + 3y = 9 d. 4x – 3y = 25 b. 4x + 3y = 16 e. 3x – 4y = 25 c. 4x + 3y = 25 31. Jika titik A(–2, –1) di dalam lingkaran (x + 4)2 +

(y – p)2 = 13 maka nilai p adalah …. a. p > –4 d. –2 < p < 4 b. p < –2 atau p > 4 e. –4 < p < 2 c. p < –4 atau p > 2 32. Persamaan garis singgung dengan gradien –3 pada

lingkaran x2 + y2 = 18 adalah ….

a. y= –3x ± 6 5 d. y = –3x ± 2 2

b. y = –3x ± 6 2 e. y = –3x ± 2 5

c. y = 3x ± 6 5 33. Persamaan garis singgung pada lingkaran L : x2 +

y2 + 6x – 2y = 0 yang sejajar dengan garis 4x – 3y + 7 = 0 adalah ….

a. 4x – 3y + 15 ± 10 = 0 b. 3x – 4y + 15 ± 10 = 0 c. 4x + 3y + 15 ± 10 = 0 d. 3x + 4y – 15 ± 10 = 0 e. 3x + 4y + 15 ± 10 = 0 34. Persamaan lingkaran yang berpusat di (1, 4) dan

menyinggung garis 3x – 4y – 2 = 0 adalah …. a. x2 + y2 + 4x – 3y – 47 = 0 b. x2 + y2 – 2x – 8y = 0 c. x2 + y2 – 2x – 8y + 8 = 0 d. x2 + y2 + 2x + 8y + 8 = 0 e. x2 + y2 + 3x – 8y + 2 = 0 35. Persamaan garis singgung lingkaran L: x2 – 6x +

y2 + 8y = 0 yang tegak lurus pada garis x + y = 1 adalah …..

a. y = x – 1 ± 5 2

b. y = x + 7 ± 5 2

c. y = x + 7 ± 5 2

d. y = x – 7 ± 5 2

e. y = –x + 1 ± 5 2



SUKU BANYAK

Suku banyak adalah suatu bentuk yang memuat variabel berpangkat. Suku banyak dalam x berderajat n dinyatakan dengan : anxn + an – 1xn – 1 + an – 2xn – 2 + … + a1x + a0 Dengan syarat: n Îbilangan cacah dan an, an – 1, … , a0 disebut koefisien-koefisien suku banyak, a0 disebut suku tetap dan an ≠ 0. Suku banyak dengan derajat n dapat dinyatakan sebagai suatu fungsi f(x), yang nilainya dapat dilakukan dengan dua cara yaitu : Cara subtitusi Misalkan suku banyak f(x) = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d. Jika nilai x diganti k, maka nilai suku banyak f(x) untuk x = k adalah f(k) = ak3 + bk2 + ck + d. Cara Horner/bangun/skema/sintetik Misalkan suku banyak f(x) = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d. Jika akan ditentukan nilai suku banyak x = k, maka: f(x) = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d f(x) = (ax2 + bx + c)x + d f(x) = ((ax + b)x + c)x + d Sehingga f(k) = ((ak + b)k + c)k + d. Bentuk tersebut dapat disajikan dalam bentuk skema berikut ini.

Hasil Bagi dan Sisa Pembagian Suku Banyak Jika suku banyak f(x) berderajat n dibagi oleh fungsi berderajat satu akan menghasilkan hasil bagi berderajat (n – 1) dan sisa pembagian berbentuk konstanta. Suku banyak f(x) dibagi (x – k) menghasilkan h(x) sebagai hasil bagi dan f(k) sebagai sisa pembagian, sedemikian sehingga f(x) = (x – k) h(x) + f(k).

Suku banyak f(x) dibagi (ax + b) menghasilkan a

xh )( sebagai hasil bagi dan f (ab

- ) sebagai sisa

pembagian, sehingga f(x) = (ax + b) a

xh )( + f (ab

- )

Pembagian suku banyak dengan ax2 + bx + c, di mana a ≠ 0 dapat dilakukan dengan cara biasa apabila ax2 + bx + c tidak dapat difaktorkan, sedangkan jika ax2 + bx + c dapat difaktorkan dapat dilakukan dengan cara Horner.

Bab 5 Suku Banyak Matematika Kelas 11 SMA


Teorema Sisa Teorema Sisa 1 Jika suku banyak f(x) dibagi (x – k), maka sisa pembagiannya adalah f(k). Teorema Sisa 2 Jika suku banyak f(x) dibagi (ax + b), maka sisa pembagiannya adalah f ( b ) Teorema Sisa 3 Jika suatu suku banyak f(x) dibagi (x – a)(x – b), maka sisanya adalah px + q di mana f(a) = pa + q dan f(b) = pb + q. Teorema Faktor Jika f(x) suatu suku banyak, maka (x – k) merupakan faktor dari f(x) jika dan hanya jika f(x) = 0. Akar Rasional Jika diketahui suatu suku banyak f(x) dan (x – a) adalah faktor dari f(x), maka a adalah akar dari persamaan f(x) atau f(a) = 0. Sifat-Sifat Akar Persamaan Suku Banyak a. Untuk Suku Banyak Berderajat Dua: ax2 + bx + c = 0 Jika x1 dan x2 adalah akar-akar persamaan kuadrat ax2 + bx + c = 0, maka:

1) x1 + x2 = –ab

2) x1. x2 = ac

b. Untuk Suku Banyak Berderajat Tiga: ax3 + bx2 + cx + d = 0 Jika x1, x2, dan x3 adalah akar-akar persamaan ax3 + bx2 + cx + d = 0, maka:

1) x1 + x2 + x3 = – ab

2) x1. x2 + x2 . x3 + x1 . x3 = ac

3) x1 . x2 . x3 = –ad

c. Untuk Suku Banyak Berderajat Empat: ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e = 0 Jika x1, x2, x3, dan x4 adalah akar-akar persamaan suku banyak ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e = 0,

maka:

1) x1 + x2 + x3 + x4 = –ab

2) x1 . x2 . x3 + x2 . x3 . x4 + x3 . x4 . x1 + x4 . x1 . x2 =ac

3) x1 . x2 + x1 . x3 + x1 . x4 + x2 . x3 + x2 . x4 + x3. x4 = –ad

4) x1 . x2 . x3 . x4 =ae



Latihan Konsep

1. Tentukan f(x) + g(x), f(x) – g(x) dan f(x) × g(x) untuk soal-soal berikut.

a. f(x) = 5x3 + 2x – 4 dan g(x) = 3x4 – 4x – 7 b. f(x) = 6x4 – 2x3 + x + 5 dan g(x) = 3x4 + 5x3 +

2x2 – 8 c. f(x) = (2x – 1)3 dan g(x) = (5x + 2)2 d. f(x) = (3x + 2)3 dan g(x) = (x – 2) (x + 2)2 e. f(x) = (5 – 3x)3 dan g(x) = (x2 – 2x) (x2 + 2x) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 2. Hitunglah nilai suku banyak P(x) menggunakan

substitusi untuk soal-soal berikut ini. a. P(x) = 5x5 – 3x3– x + 15 untuk x = 2 b. P(x) = 2x5 – x4 + 3x2 – 2x + 10 untuk x = –2 c. P(x) = 3x7 – 5x4– 2x3 + 3x – 5 untuk x = –1 d. P(x) = 2x5 – 3x4 + 2x3 – 3x + 5 = untuk x = - ½ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 3. Carilah bilangan p dan q agar (px3 – 5x2 – 22x + q)

habis dibagi oleh x2 – 4x – 5 dengan menggunakan cara Horner dan cara pembagian biasa.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

4. Buktikan bahwa a. p2n – q2n habis dibagi oleh p + q b. p2n + 1+ q2n + 1 habis dibagi oleh p + q. Dalam hal ini n bilangan bulat positif. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 5. Sebuah kotak terbuka akan dibuat dari selembar

karton. Karton tersebut berbentuk persegipanjang dan berukuran 6 × 5 inci (inci = 2,54 cm). Cara membuat kotak ini adalah dengan memotong sebuah persegi dari setiap sudutnya. Jika volume kotak 14 inci3, berapa inci2 persegi yang harus dipotong?

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 6. Diketahui f(x) = (x + 1)(x – 2)(x + 3).

Tentukanlah: a. derajat sukunya, b. koefisien-koefisien variabel, c. suku tetapnya. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



7. Tentukan nilai suku banyak x4 – 2x3 + x2 – 1 untuk x = –1.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 8. Tentukan hasil bagi dan sisa hasil bagi, jika suku

banyak x3 – 3x2 + x – 3 dibagi (x + 1) dengan cara Horner.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 9. Tentukanlah hasil bagi dari (2x3 – x2 + 3x – 9)

dibagi (2x + 1). ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 10. Tentukanlah nilai p jika f(x) = 2x3 + 5x2 – 4x + p

habis dibagi (x + 1). ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 11. Carilah sisanya, jika 2x4 – 3x2 – x + 2 dibagi x2 – x

– 2. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................ 12. Jika f(x) dibagi (x – 1) sisanya 3 dan dibagi (x – 2)

sisanya 4, maka tentukan sisanya jika f(x) dibagi x2 – 3x + 2.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 13. Tentukanlah nilai p supaya (x + 1) faktor dari x4 –

5x3 + 2px2 + x + 1. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 14. Salah satu akar persamaan: 2x3 + 7x2 + bx – 10 = 0

adalah 2. Tentukanlah: a. nilai b, b. akar-akar yang lain. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 15. Suku banyak f(x) = 2x5 + ax4 + 2x3 + x2 – x – 1

habis dibagi (x – 1). Jika f(x) dibagi x2 – x – 2, tentukan sisanya.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



SOAL 1. Jika x3 – 12x + ka habis dibagi dengan (x – 2)

maka ia juga habis dibagi dengan .... a. (x – 1) b. (x + 1) c. (x + 2) d. (x – 3) e. (x + 4)

2. Hasil bagi dan sisa pembagian dari suku banyak 4x3 – 2x2+ x– 1 dibagi oleh 2x2+ x+ 1 berturut-turut adalah .... a. (2x – 2) dan (x + 1) b. (2x + 2) dan (x – 1) c. (2x + 2) dan (x + 1) d. (x + 2) dan (2x – 1) e. (x – 2) dan (2x + 1)

3. Suku banyak f(x) dibagi oleh (x – 3) bersisa 5 dan

dibagi oleh (x + 4) bersisa –23. Sisa dari pembagian f(x) oleh (x – 3) (x + 4) adalah .... a. 3x – 4 b. –4x + 17 c. –3x + 14 d. 5x – 10 e. 4x – 7

4. Jika f(x) = x3 – x + 2 dan g(x) = 2x2 + x – 1 maka f(x) × g(x) adalah .... a. 2x5 + x4 + 3x3 – 3x2 + 3x – 2 b. 2x5 + x4 – 3x3 + 3x2 + 3x – 2 c. 2x5 + x4 – 3x3 – 3x2 + 3x + 2 d. 2x5 – x4 – 3x3 + 3x2 – 3x + 2 e. 2x5 – x4 + 3x3 – 3x2 + 3x – 2

5. Diketahui suku banyak 4x4 – 12x3 + 13x2 – 8x + a dan 6x2 – 11x + 4. Jika suku banyak itu mempunyai satu faktor yang sama maka bilangan bulat a adalah... a. –2 d. 1 b. –1 e. 2 c. 0

6. Persamaan 2x3 + 3x2 + px + 8 = 0 mempunyai sepasang akar yang berkebalikan. Nilai p = .... a. 18 d. –6 b. 6 e. –18 c. 3

7. Diketahui persamaan

Nilai A dan B berturut-turut adalah .... a. –2 dan 3 b. 2 dan –3 c. 3 dan –2 d. –3 dan 2 e. –3 dan –2

8. Suku banyak f(x) habis dibagi oleh (x – 1). Sisa pembagian f(x) oleh (x – 1)(x + 1) adalah .... a. – ½ f(1)(1 – x) b. – ½ f(1)(1 + x) c. ½ f(–1)(1 – x) d. ½ f(–1)(1 + x) e. – ½ f(–1)(1 + x)

9. Diketahui f(x) = px3 + (2p – 1) x2 – 2px + 3 dan g(x) = 2px3 – 3px2 –(p + 4)x – p. Jika sisa pembagian f(x) oleh (x + 1) sama dengan sisa pembagian g(x) oleh (2x – 1) maka nilai p adalah .... a. 2/5 d. – 4/5 b. – 2/5 e. 3/5 c. 4/5

10. Jika f(x) = 4x4 – x3 – x2 + ½ x dibagi dengan (2x + 2 ) sisanya adalah ....

a. – 2 d. ½

b. –1 e. ½ 2 c. – ½

11. Suku banyak f(x) = x3 – 2x2 + px + 6 habis dibagi (x – 1). Jika dibagi dengan (x + 3)(x + 1) sisanya adalah .... a. 16x + 24 b. 16x – 24 c. 24x + 16 d. 24x – 16 e. –24x + 16

12. Suatu suku banyak P(x) dibagi oleh (x2 – 1) sisanya (12x – 23) dan jika dibagi oleh (x –2) sisanya 1. Sisa pembagian suku banyak P(x) oleh (x2 – 3x + 2) adalah .... a. 12x + 23 b. 12x – 23 c. 23x + 12 d. 23x – 12 e. –23x + 12

13. Sisa bagi dari (4x4 + 3x3 – x + 4) : (x2 + x –2) adalah .... a. 12x + 22 b. 12x – 22 c. –12x + 22 d. –12x – 22 e. 22x – 12



14. Diketahui suku banyak f (x) = x3+ax2 + bx– 6. Jika suku banyak ini habis dibagi oleh (x – 3) dan (x – 2), maka sisa pembagian f (x) oleh x2 + 5x + 6 adalah .... a. 60(x + 1) b. –60(x + 1) c. 60(x – 1) d. –60(x – 1) e. 60(1 – x)

15. Diketahui P(x) = x3 + 3x2 + px + q. Jika P(x) dibagi (x2 + 2x – 3) sisanya 7x + 3, maka nilai p dan q berturut-turut adalah .... a. 3 dan 2 d. –6 dan 0 b. –3 dan 2 e. 6 dan 0 c. –2 dan 3

16. Jika suku banyak x4 – 3x2 + ax + b dibagi oleh x2 – 3x – 4, akan memberikan sisa 2x + 5. Nilai a dan b adalah .... a. a = 35 dan b = 40 b. a = –35 dan b = 40 c. a = –35 dan b = –40 d. a = 40 dan b = –35 e. a = 40 dan b = –35

17. Banyak akar real dari persamaan x4 – x – 3x2 + 4x – 4 = 0 adalah .... a. 4 d. 1 b. 3 e. 0 c. 2

18. Jika f(x) dibagi dengan x + 2, sisanya adalah 3. Jika f(x) dengan x2 – 4, sisanya adalah .... a. x + 5 d. x + 2 b. x + 4 e. x + 1 c. x + 3

19. Jika f(x) dibagi oleh x – 1 dan x + 1, sisanya berturut-turut adalah 2 dan 3. Jika g(x) dibagi oleh x – 1 dan x + 1, sisanya berturut-turut adalah 1 dan –2. Jika f(x) = h(x) . g(x) dibagi oleh x2 – 1 maka sisanya adalah .... a. 4x + 2 d. 2x – 4 b. 4x – 2 e. –2x – 4 c. 2x + 4

20. Jika f(x) dibagi dengan x – 2, sisanya 24. Jika f(x) dibagi dengan x + 5, sisanya 10. Jika f(x) dibagi dengan x2 + 3x – 10, sisanya adalah .... a. x + 34 d. 2x – 20 b. x – 34 e. x + 14 c. 2x + 20

21. Nilai suku banyak 6x5 + 2x3 + 4x2 + 6 untuk x = –1 adalah ….. a. 10 d. –4 b. 2 e. –10 c. –2

22. Jika nilai suku banyak 2x4 + mx3 – 8x + 3 untuk x = 3 adalah 6, maka m adalah …. a. –5 d. 3 b. –3 e. 5 c. 2

23. Suku banyak f(x) = x3 + 5x2 – 3x + 9 dibagi (x – 2), maka hasil baginya adalah …. a. x2 – 7x + 11 b. x2 + 7x – 11 c. 2x2 + 11x + 7 d. x2 + 7x + 11 e. 2x2 – 11x + 7

24. Jika suku banyak f(x) = 5x4 – 3x3 – 7x2 + x – 2 dibagi oleh (x2 – 2x + 3), maka sisanya adalah…. a. 22x – 36 b. –22x + 36 c. –36x + 22 d. 22x + 36 e. 36x – 22

25. Jika f(x) = 2x3 – 7x2 + 11x – 4 dibagi (2x – 1), maka sisanya adalah …. a. 3 d. 0 b. 2 e. –4 c. 1

26. Jika x3 – 12x + k habis dibagi dengan (x – 2), maka bilangan tersebut juga habis dibagi dengan …. a. x + 1 d. x + 2 b. x + 1 e. x + 4 c. x – 3

27. Jika suku banyak f(x) = 2x4 + ax3 – 3x2 + 5x + b dibagi (x2 – 1) menghasilkan sisa (6x + 5) maka nilai a. b = …. a. 8 d. –3 b. 6 e. –6 c. 1

28. Jika (x + 1) merupakan salah satu faktor dari suku banyak f(x) = 2x4 – 2x3 + px2 – x – 2, maka nilai p adalah …. a. – 3 d. 1 b. –2 e. 3 c. –1

29. Suku banyak f(x) = 3x3 – 75x + 4 dibagi oleh (x + k) dengan k > 0. Jika sisanya 4, maka nilai k adalah ….. a. –5 d. 4 b. 0 e. 5 c. 3



30. Jika suku banyak 2x2 – x + 16 dibagi oleh (x – a) sisanya 12, maka nilai a adalah …. a. 2 atau 3 b. 3 atau –2 c. 2 atau –3/2 d. 2 atau 3/2 e. 2 atau –3

31. Jika f(x) = 3x4 – 5x2 + kx + 12 habis dibagi dengan (x + 2), maka nilai k adalah …. a. 10 d. 40 b. 20 e. 50 c. 30

32. Jika f(x) dibagi dengan (x – 2) sisanya 24, sedangkan jika dibagi dengan (x + 5) sisanya 10. Jika f(x) dibagi dengan x3 + 3x – 10 sisanya adalah ….. a. x + 34 b. x – 34 c. 2x – 20 d. 2x + 20 e. x + 14

33. Jika suku banyak f(x) dibagi (x – 1) sisa 5 dan jika dibagi dengan (x + 3) sisanya 7. Jika suku banyak tersebut dibagi dengan (x2 + 2x – 3), maka sisanya ….. a. – ½ x – 5 ½ b. ½ x + 5 ½ c. ½ x + 4 ½ d. – ½ x + 4 ½ e. – ½ x + 5 ½

34. Suku banyak f(x) dibagi (x + 4) sisanya –11, sedangkan jika dibagi (x – 2) sisanya 1. Jika f(x) dibagi (x – 2)(x + 4) sisanya adalah …. a. –2x – 3 d. 2x – 3 b. –2x + 3 e. 3x + 2 c. 2x + 3

35. Sebuah akar persamaan x3 + ax2 + ax + 1 = 0 adalah 2. Jumlah akar-akar persamaan itu adalah….. a. 3 d. 2/3 b. 2 e. –3/2 c. 3/2



FUNGSI KOMPOSISI DAN FUNGSI INVERS

MATERI Relasi adalah suatu aturan yang memasangkan anggota himpunan satu ke himpunan lain. Suatu relasi dari himpunan A ke himpunan B adalah pemasangan atau perkawanan atau korespondensi dari anggota-anggota himpunan A ke anggota-anggota himpunan B. Suatu relasi dari himpunan A ke himpunan B disebut fungsi dari A ke B jika setiap anggota A dipasangkan dengan tepat satu anggota B. Macam-Macam Fungsi 1) Fungsi konstan (fungsi tetap) Suatu fungsi f : A → B ditentukan dengan rumus f(x) disebut fungsi konstan apabila untuk setiap anggota domain

fungsi selalu berlaku f(x) = C, di mana C bilangan konstan. 2) Fungsi Linear Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi linear apabila fungsi itu ditentukan oleh f(x) = ax + b, di mana a ≠ 0, a dan b bilangan

konstan dan grafiknya berupa garis lurus. 3) Fungsi kuadrat Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi kuadrat apabila fungsi itu ditentukan oleh f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, di mana a ≠ 0 dan a, b,

dan c bilangan konstan dan grafiknya berupa parabola. 4) Fungsi identitas Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi identitas apabila setiap anggota domain fungsi berlaku f(x) = x atau setiap anggota

domain fungsi dipetakan pada dirinya sendiri. 5) Fungsi tangga (bertingkat) Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi tangga apabila grafik fungsi f(x) berbentuk interval-interval yang sejajar. 6) Fungsi modulus Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi modulus (mutlak) apabila fungsi ini memetakan setiap bilangan real pada domain

fungsi ke unsur harga mutlaknya. 7) Fungsi ganjil dan fungsi genap Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi ganjil apabila berlaku f(–x) = –f(x) dan disebut fungsi genap apabila berlaku f(–x) =

f(x). Jika f(–x) ≠ –f(x) maka fungsi ini tidak genap dan tidak ganjil. Sifat Fungsi 1) Fungsi injektif (satu-satu)

Jika fungsi f : A → B, setiap b ÎB hanya mempunyai satu kawan saja di A, maka fungsi itu disebut fungsi satu-satu atau injektif.

2) Fungsi surjektif (onto) Pada fungsi f : A → B, setiap b ÎB mempunyai kawan di A, maka f disebut fungsi surjektif atau onto.

Bab 6 Fungsi Komposisi Matematika Kelas 11 SMA


3) Fungsi bijektif (korespondensi satu-satu) Suatu fungsi yang bersifat injektif sekaligus surjektif disebut fungsi bijektif atau korespondensi satu-satu.

Aljabar Fungsi · (f + g)(x) = f(x) + g(x) · (f – g)(x) = f(x) – g(x) · (f .g)(x) = f(x).g(x)

· )()()(

xgxfx

gf

=÷÷ø

öççè

æ

Fungsi Komposisi (g ° f)(x) = g(f(x)) (f ° g)(x) = f(g(x)) Bila f, g, dan h suatu fungsi, maka: a. tidak berlaku sifat komutatif, yaitu f ° g ≠ g ° f; b. jika I fungsi identitas berlaku : I ° f = f ° I = f; c. berlaku sifat asosiatif, yaitu : f ° (g ° h) = (f ° g) ° h. Fungsi Invers Jika fungsi f = A→B dinyatakan dengan pasangan terurut f = {(a, b) | a ÎA dan b ÎB} maka invers fungsi f adalah f-1 = b→A ditentukan oleh f-1 = {(b, a) | bÎB, dan a ÎA}. Untuk menentukan fungsi invers dari suatu fungsi dapat dilakukan dengan cara berikut ini. a. Buatlah permisalan f(x) = y pada persamaan. b. Persamaan tersebut disesuaikan dengan f(x) = y, sehingga ditemukan fungsi dalam y dan nyatakanlah x = f(y). c. Gantilah y dengan x, sehingga f(y) = f –1(x). Sifat Fungsi Invers (g ° f)–1(x) = (f –1 ° g –1)(x) (f ° g)–1(x) = (g –1 ° f –1)(x)



Soal Pemahaman Konsep 1. Dari fungsi-fungsi berikut, tentukan f(–2), f(–1),

f(0), f(1), dan f(2). Kemudian, gambarkan grafiknya. Jika daerah asalnya Df ={x|–2 < x< 2, xє R}, tentukan daerah hasilnya.

a. f (x) = 3x– 1 b. f (x) = 3 – 2x c. f (x) = x – 2 d. f (x) = 4 – 2x 2 e. f (x) = x2 – 3x+2 f. f (x) = x3– 1 ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

2. Diketahui fungsi f (x) = 213

2 +-

xx

dan g (x) =

x414 - . Tentukanlah: a. (f + g) (2)

b.gf

(-3)

c. (f – g) ( –2) d. (f × g) (–10) e. f 2(4)g(–1) f. g 2(–7) : f (2) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 3. Tentukan f ° g ° h(x) dan h ° g ° f(x) dari fungsi-

fungsi berikut ini. a. f (x) = x – 3, g(x) = 2x + 1, dan h(x) = x2 – 2 b. f (x) = 3x – 1, g(x) = x2 + 1, dan h(x) = x2 + 2x + 5 c. f (x) = x2 – 1, g(x) = x + 2, dan h(x) = x2 – 2

d. f (x) = 84 -x , g(x) = x2, dan

h(x) = 1+x ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................ 4. Jumlah mobil yang diproduksi suatu pabrik

selama 1 hari setelah t jam operasi adalah n(t) = 200t – 10t2, 0 ≤ t < 10. Jika biaya produksi n mobil (dalam dolar) adalah C(n) = 30.000 + 8.000 n, tentukan biaya C sebagai fungsi dari waktu. Berapakah biaya memproduksi mobil selama 1 bulan?

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 5. Dengan menggunakan sifat f –1 ° f (x) = x, tentukan

f –1 (x) untuk fungsi-fungsi berikut. a. f (x) = 3x + 7 b. f (x) = (x + 2)2 c. f (x) = (x +2) (x – 2)

d. f (x) = 2

52

2

-xx

e. f (x) =68

2

2

+-

xx

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



6. Perhatikan relasi-relasi yang ditunjukkan dengan

diagram panah di bawah ini.

a. Manakah yang merupakan fungsi? b. Jika relasi merupakan fungsi, tentukanlah

domain, kodomain, dan rangenya. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 7. Diketahui f(x) = x2 – 3x + 2 dan g(x) = x – 1.

Tentukan: a. (f + g)(x) c. (f . g)(x)

b. (f – g)(x) d. ÷÷ø

öççè

ægf

(x)

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................ 8. Diketahui f : R → R; g : R → R dengan f(x) = 2x2

+ 1 dan g(x) = x + 2. Tentukan: a. (g ° f)(x) c. (g ° f)(1) b. (f ° g)(x) d. (f ° g)(–2) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

9. Tentukan fungsi invers dari fungsi di bawah ini. a. f(x) = 3x + 10 b. f(x) = (x – 3)2 c. f(x) = x2 – 4x + 4

d. f(x) = 165

+-

xx

, x ≠ 1/6

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 10. Diketahui f(x) = 2x – 1 dan g(x) = 3x + 5.

Tentukan: a. (f ° g)–1 (x) c. (f ° g)–1 (1) b. (g ° f)–1 (x) d. (g ° f)–1 (–2) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................



SOAL 1. Jika f(x) = x + 2 maka f(x2) + 3f(x) – (f(x))2 sama

dengan .... a. –x + 4 d. –x + 5 b. x + 4 e. x + 5 c. –x + 2

2. Jika f (x)= 12 +x dan

f ° g (x) = 542

1 2 +--

xxx

maka g(x – 3)

adalah ....

a. 5

1-x

d. 21

x

b. 1

1+x

e. 3

1+x

c. 1

1-x

3. Jika h(x + 2) = x2 + 2x maka h(x) = .... a. 2x + x2 d. –x2 – 2x b. 2x – x2 e. x2 – 2x c. –x2 + 2x 4. Jika f(x) = 3x2 – 2x maka f(x – 2) – 4f(2x –1) + f(2)

= .... a. 45 x2 – 50x + 4 b. 45x2 + 50x – 4 c. 45x2 + 50x + 4 d. –45x2– 50x + 4 e. –45x2 + 50x + 4 5. Fungsi berikut ini yang dapat digolongkan ke

dalam fungsi satu-satu adalah .... a. f(x) = k, k konstanta sebarang b. f(x) = x + 9 c. f(x) = x2 – 9x d. f(x) = x2 – 2x + 1 e. f(x) = x2 + 2x + 1

6. Jika f(x) = 2ax + 21

x, g(x) = bx –

x3

, dan C = 2a

+ b maka jumlah kedua fungsi tersebut adalah .... a. ax d. abx = 3/x b. bx e. ax = C c. Cx 7. Jika f(x + y) = f(x) + f(y), untuk semua bilangan

rasional x dan y serta f(1) = 10, maka f(2) adalah ....

a. 0 b. 5 c. 10 d. 20 e. tidak dapat ditentukan

8. Diketahui f(g(x)) = 53

3-

-x

xdan g(x) =

531

--

xx

maka nilai f(0) adalah ....

a. –4 d. 2 b. –2 e. 4 c. 0 9. Fungsi f: R → R dengan f(x) = 4x + n g: R → R dengan g(x) = 3x – 10 Jika f ° g (x) = g ° f(x) maka nilai n yang

memenuhi persamaan itu adalah .... a. –15 d. 10 b. –10 e. 15 c. 5 10. Jika f(x) = 5 – 2x, g(x) = x2 – 25, dan h(x) = ¼

g(f(x)) maka h–1 (x) = ....

a. 425

25

+± x

b. ÷÷ø

öççè

æ+±

4251

25 x

c. 425

425

+± x

d. ÷÷ø

öççè

æ+±

451

425 x

e. 425

425

-± x

11. Jika f = {(2, 4), (3, 5), (4, –1), (5, 2) g = {(2, –3), (3, 3), (4, 2), (5, 4), (–1, 1)} maka f ° g = .... a. {(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 1), (4, 3), (5, 4)} b. {(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 1), (4, 3), (5, 5)} c. {(1, 2), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 3), (5, 2)} d. {(1, 2), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 5), (5, 4)} e. {(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 5), (5, 5)} 12. Jika suatu fungsi ditentukan sebagai himpunan

pasangan berurut f = {(1, 3), (2, 5), (4, 2), (5, 0)} maka f –1 = ....

a. {(3, 1), (5, 2), (2, 4), (5, 0)} b. {(1, 3), (5, 2), (2, 4), (5, 0)} c. {(1, 3), (2, 5), (2, 4), (5, 0)} d. {(3, 1), (5, 2), (2, 4), (0, 5)} e. {(3, 1), (5, 2), (4, 2), (5, 0)}



13. Jika f = {(1, 3), (4, 5), (7, –2), (9, –4)}, g = {(1, 4),

(6, 0), (7, 3), (9,12), (10, –6)}, dan h =gf

maka h

sama dengan ....

a. {(1,43

), (7, 32

), (9, 31

)}

b. {(1, 43

), (7, 32

- ), (9,31

)}

c. {(1, 43

), (7, 32

- ), (9, 31

- )}

d. {(1, 43

- ), (7, 32

- ), (9, 31

- )}

e. {(1, 43

- ), (7, 32

), (9, 31

)}

14. Apabila g(x) = 3x + 1 dan g(f(x)) = 5x2 + x – 3

maka f(x) = . . . . a. 1/3 (x2 – x – 4) b. 1/3 (x2 – x + 4) c. 1/3 (x2 – x – 2) d. 1/3 (5x2 + x + 4) e. 1/3 (5x2 + x – 4) 15. Jika f(x) = 2x – 3 dan g ° f(x) = 2x + 1 maka g(x) =

.... a. x – 4 d. x – 6 b. x + 4 e. 2x –1 c. 2x – 3 16. Pernyataan-pernyataan berikut benar, kecuali .... a. (f ° f –1)(x) = (f –1 ° f )(x) b. (f –1 ° g–1)(x) = (f ° g)–1 (x) c. jika f (x) = x + 1 maka f –1(x) = x –1 d. jika f (x) = 2x – 1 maka f –1 (x) = ½ (x + 1)

e. jika f (x) = x3 maka f –1 (x) = 3 x

17. Jika f (x) = srxqpx

++

, maka f –1 (x) = ....

a. prxqsx

++

d. prxqsx

+-

b. prxqsx

--

e. rxpqsx

--

c. prxqsx

-+

18. Diketahui f(x) = log x, g(x) = 2x – π, dan h(x) = sin x, f ° g ° h(x) = 0, nilai x yang memenuhi adalah ....

a.4p

d. 8p

b. 4

2 p e.

83 p

c. 4

3 p

19. Fungsi berikut ini yang memiliki invers fungsi

adalah .... a. y = x2 + 2x + 1 d. y = 5 b. y = x2 + 5x e. y = 2x2 + 4x + 3 c. y = 2x + 3

20. Jika f(x) = x + 1 dan g(x) = x1

, x ≠ 0 maka

(1) f ° f (x) = x + 2

(2) f ° g(x) =1

1+x

(3) f ° f –1(x) = x (4) g ° f –1(x) = x

Pernyataan yang benar adalah .... a. 1, 2, dan 3 d. 2, 3, dan 4 b. 1 dan 3 e. 1, 2, 3 dan 4 c. 2 dan 4 21. Jika f(x) = x dan g(x) = x2 + 1 maka (g ° f ° f)(x) =

....

a. 1-x d. 1+x

b. 1+x e. 1+x

c. 1+x

22. Diketahui f (x) = 2x + 5 dan g(x) = 41

+-

xx

Jika f ° g(a) = 5 maka a = .... a. –2 d. 1

b. –1 e. 2 c. 0 23. Fungsi berikut ini yang tidak memiliki fungsi

invers adalah .... a. y = 5x2 + 7 d. y = 5log x b. y = x3 + 4 e. y = 2x + 10 c. y = 10 – 150x 24. Jika f ( x ) = 2x – 3, dengan x є R dan f –1 adalah

fungsi invers dari f (x) maka kedua kurva f (x) dan f –1(x) akan berpotongan pada titik ....

a. (1, –3) d. (3, –3) b. (–1, 3) e. (3, 3) c. (–3, 3)



25. Jika f : x → 52x maka f –1 adalah .... a. 5log 2x d. y = xm b. 5log x e. 2log 5x c. 2x log 5

26. Invers dari y = mx

dengan m konstanta sebarang

adalah ....

a. y = xm

d. y = x2

b. y = mx

e. y = x + m

c. y = mx 27. Diketahui f = {(3, 1), (4, 2), (5, 3), (6, 8)} maka f –

1(3) adalah .... a. 1 d. 6 b. 5 e. 8 c. 4 28. Jika f(x) = 8x dan g(x) = 3x2 + 4 maka f –1(g(x)) =

.... a. 8log (3x2 + 4) d. 8log 3x2 + 4 b. 8log (3x2 – 4) e. log (3x2 + 4) c. 8log 3x2 – 4 29. Diketahui f(x) = 15x dan h(x) = x3 + 4 untuk setiap

x bilangan real, x ≠ 0 maka f –1(h(x2) – 4) = .... a. 15log (x5 + 2) d. 15log x6 b. 15log (x5 – 4) e. 15log x5 c. 15log (x3 + 4)

30. Jika y = f (x) = ½ x + 3, z = f (y) = 31

y+ 2, w = f

(z) = ¼ z + 1 maka fungsi komposisi dari x ke w adalah ....

a. 241

(x + 42) d. 241

(4x + 16)

b. 241

(2x + 7) e. 121

(6x + 18)

c. 241

(3x + 21)

31. Bila f(x) = 2x3 – 6x, maka f(x + 1) = …. a. x3 – 6x2 – 3 d. x3 + x – 3 b. 2x3 – 6x2 – 4 e. x2 – x – 3 c. 2x3 – 6x2 – 4 32. Diketahui f(x) = 3x – 6 dan g(x) = 2x + a. Bila (f

°g)(x) = (g ° f)(x) maka a = …. a. 5 b. 1 c. –1 d. –5 e. –6

33. Bila f(x) = 3x2 – 2 dan g(x) = 3

2-xx

,

maka (f ° g)(2) = …. a. 32 b. 38 c. 41 d. 43 e. 46 34. Jika diketahui f(x) = x2 – 2x + 1, maka f–1(4)

adalah …… a. 3 b. 1 c. 0 d. –1 e. –3 35. Jika diketahui g(x) = x – 1 dan (f °g)(x) = 2x2 – 4x

+ 3, maka fungsi f(x) = …. a. x – 2 d. x2 – 2x b. x + 2 e. x2 + 2x c. x2 + 2 36. Jika f : R → R dan g : R → R dengan f(x) = x2 dan

g(x) = 3x + 1, maka f(g(2)) = …. a. 13 b. 25 c. 37 d. 49 e. 81 37. Jika f(x) = x2 dan (f °g)(x) = x2 – 2x + 1, maka g(3)

adalah …. a. 2 b. 4 c. 6 d. 7 e. 9

38. Jika f(x) =1-x

x maka f–1(x) adalah ….

a. x

x 1-

b. x

x 1+

c. 1-x

x

d. 1+x

x

e. x1



39. Misalkan f(x) = x + 2 untuk x > 0 dan g(x) = 15/x untuk x > 0. Dengan demikian (f–1°g–1)(x) = 1 untuk x = ….

a. 1 b. 3 c. 5 d. 8 e. 10

40. Jika f–1(x) = 5

1-x dan g–1(x) =

23 x-

,

maka (f °g)–1(6) = …. a. 1 b. 2 c. 6 d. 1/6 e. 1/10



LIMIT

Limit dapat didefinisikan sebagai berikut:

)(lim xfax ®

= L

artinya jika x mendekati a (tetapi x ≠a ) maka f(x) mendekati nilai L. Sifat-Sifat Limit Fungsi Apabila k suatu konstanta, f dan g merupakan fungsi-fungsi yang mempunyai limit untuk x → a, a R maka berlaku: a. k

ax ®lim = k

b. )(lim xfax ®

= f (a)

c. =®

)(.lim xfkax

)(lim. xfkax ®

d. )}()({lim xgxfax

±®

= )(lim)(lim xgxfaxax ®®

±

e. )}().({lim xgxfax ®

= )(lim).(lim xgxfaxax ®®

f. ( ) ( )( ) n

ax

n

axxfxf )(lim)(lim

®®=

Limit fungsi yang berbentuk )()(lim

xgxf

ax ® dapat

diselesaikan dengan cara membagi bagian pembilang f(x) dan bagian penyebut g(x) dengan xn, n adalah pangkat tertinggi dari f(x) atau g(x) untuk setiap n bilangan positip dan a bilangan real, maka :

0lim =¥® nx x

a

Nilai dari )()(lim

xgxf

x ¥®adalah sebagai berikut.

1. Jika derajat dari pembilang f(x) lebih besar daripada

derajat penyebut g(x), maka nilai ¥=®¥ )(

)(limxgxf

x

2. Jika derajat dari pembilang f(x) sama dengan derajat

penyebut g(x), maka nilai =®¥ )(

)(limxgxf

xreal.

3. Jika derajat dari pembilang f(x) lebih kecil daripada

derajat penyebut g(x), maka nilai =®¥ )(

)(limxgxf

x 0.

Untuk menyelesaikan )(lim xfax ®

, maka dapat dilakukan

dengan cara yang lebih cepat dengan menggunakan rumus sebagai berikut. 1. Jika f(a) = C, maka nilai )(lim xf

ax ® = f(a) = C

2. Jika f(a) = 0C

, maka nilai )(lim xfax ®

= 0C

= ∞

3. Jika f(a) = C0


=C0

= 0

4. Jika f(a) = 00


, maka

sederhanakan atau ubahlah lebih dahulu bentuk f(x) hingga menjadi bentuk (1), (2), atau (3).

Limit Fungsi Trigonometri

1sin

lim0

=® x

xx

à 1sin

lim0

=® ax

axx

1sinlim0

=® x

xx

à 1sinlim0

=® ax

axx

1tan

lim0

=® x

xx

à 1tan

lim0

=® ax

axx

1tanlim0

=® x

xx

à 1tanlim0

=® ax

axx

Bab 7 Limit Matematika Kelas 11 SMA


Soal Pemahaman Konsep 1. Hitunglah nilai limit berikut ini.

a. 5

3lim 2

2

-++

¥® xxx

x

b. 325lim

-+

¥® x

x

x

x

c. xxxx

-+¥®

3lim 2

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 2. Hitunglah nilai limit berikut ini.

a. 93lim 22 +

-® x

xx

b. 45lim 2

2

1 +--+

® xxxx

x

c. 223lim

2 ++

-® xx

x

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

3. Hitunglah limit h

xfhxfh

)()(lim0

-+®

untuk f(x)

berikut ini. a. f(x) = 3x b. f(x) = x2 c. f(x) = 2x2 – 3

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

4. Hitunglah nilai limit berikut ini.

a. y

yy 2sin

3tan2lim0®

b. 20

cos1limy

yy

-®

c. xx

xx sincos

2coslim45 -®

d. x

xx cos

2cos1lim21

+® p

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................ 5. Sebuah benda ditembakkan vertikal ke atas. Jika

persamaan gerak dari benda itu dinyatakan S = f(t) = – 5t2 + 40t maka kecepatan sesaat dari benda itu dalam waktu tepat t1 detik dinyatakan oleh

V(t1) =t

tfttft D

-D+®D

)()(lim 110

Hitunglah a. kecepatan sesaat dari benda itu dalam waktu

tepat 2 detik, dan b. kecepatan sesaat dari benda itu dalam waktu.

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................



SOAL

1. 22lim

2

2 -+

-® xxx

x = ....

a. 0 d. 4 b. ½ e. ∞ c. 2

2. 11lim

10

1 --

® xx

xadalah ....

a. 1 d. –1 b. ∞ e. tidak ada c. 0

3. ( )xabbaxxx

-+++¥®

4)22(lim 2 adalah ....

a. 0 d. a + b

b. ∞ e. 2

ba +

c. a – b

4. Jika f(x) = 2x – x2, h

fhfx

)2()2(lim0

-+®

adalah

.... a. 1 d. 3 b. –2 e. –4 c. 2

5. 39lim

2

3 --

® xx

x= ....

a. 3 d. 12 b. 6 e. ∞ c. 9

6. ( ) 731634lim 2 +---¥®

xxxx

adalah ....

a. 12/11 b. – 11/12 c. 0 d. 11 e. – 22/8

7. 116

)5(lim25 +-

-® x

xx

adalah ....

a. 12/11 d. 0 b. -11/12 e. 11 c. – 22/8

8. 3

)3)(5(lim3 -

+-® x

xxx

adalah ....

a. 0 d. 12 b. 3 e. ∞ c. 6

9. x

xxx -

+-® 3

158lim2

2= ....

a. 6 d. 3 b. 4 e. 2 c. 5

10. 52

15lim 2

2

3 +--

® xxx

x= ....

a. 2/5 d. 5/2 b. 3/5 e. 7/2 c. 1

11. 42

56lim2 ++

-¥® xx

xx

= ....

a. 3 d. 7 b. 4 e. 8 c. 6

12. 34

2lim 2

2

1 ++--

-® xxxx

x = ....

a. – 3/2 d. ½ b. – 2/3 e. 3/2 c. – ½

13. xx

x 4tan3sinlim

0® = ....

a. – ¾ d. ¾ b. – 4/3 e. 4/3 c. ¼

14. 20

3cos1limx

xx

-®

= ....

a. –2 d. 1 b. –1 e. 2 c. 0 15. Jika )(lim

2xf

x ®= -3 dan )(lim

2xg

x ® = 4 maka

)(212)(3lim

3 xgxxf

x

--®

= ....

a. 1 d. – ¾ b. ¾ e. –5/6 c. –1/2 16. Diketahui f (x) =

2x+1 jika x < 3 3x jika ≥ 3 maka )(lim

1xf

x ®= ....

a. –2 d. 2 b. –1 e. 3 c. 1



17. x

xx

8sinlim0®

= ....

a. 8 d. –2 b. 4 e. –4 c. 2

18. 20

sinlimx

xx ®

= ....

a. –2 d. ½ b. –1 e. 2 c. 0

19. x

xx

cos1lim0

-®

= ....

a. –2 d. 1 b. –1 e. 2 c. 0

20. Nilai 9lim 2

5-

®x

xadalah ….

a. 2 d. 5 b. 3 e. 6 c. 4

21. Nilai x

xx -

-® 3

4lim2

adalah .…

a. 3 d. 1/3 b. 1 e. – 1/3 c. 0

22. Nilai 122lim

2

1 --

® xx

x= ….

a. 0 d. 4 b. 1 e. 6 c. 2

23. Nilai 112lim

--

¥® xx

x adalah ….

a. –2 d. 3/2 b. –1 e. 2 c. 0

24. Nilai 4

4

246lim

xx

x +-

¥®adalah ….

a. –6 d. 4 b. –4 e. 6 c. 3

25. Nilai xxxxx

+-+¥®

22 2lim adalah ….

a. –3/2 d. 1 b. – 1/2 e. 3/2 c. ½

26. Nilai 39lim

2

3 +-

® xx

xadalah ….

a. 6 d. –2 b. 4 e. –6 c. –4

27. Nilai 2

6lim2

2 +--

® xxx

xadalah ….

a. –5 d. 5 b. –2 e. 2 c. –1

28. Nilai 1232lim

-+

¥® x

x

x adalah ….

a. 2 d. 0 b. 1 e. –3 c. –1

29. Nilai 2

8lim38 -

-® x

xx

adalah ….

a. 12 d. 8 b. 10 e. 4 c. 6 30. Jika )(lim

0xf

x ®= 3 dan )(lim

0xg

x ® = -5, dan

21)(lim

0=

®xh

x maka

( ))(2

)()(2lim2

0 xgxgxf

x

+®

adalah …. a. ½ d. 4 b. 2 e. 16 c. 8

31. Nilai ÷÷ø

öççè

æ-

-+

--

® 422

28lim

22

2 xxx

xx

x= ….

a. 3 d. 8 b. 5 e. ∞ c. 9

32. Nilai 53

4lim2

2

2 +-

-® x

xx

= ….

a. 3 d. 6 b. 4 e. 7 c. 5

33. Nilai xx

xx 2121

4lim0 --+®

= ….

a. 2 d. –1 b. 1 e. –2 c. 0



34. Nilai 1

12lim1 -

--® x

xxx

= ….

a. 1 d. –1 b. ½ e. 0 c. – ½

35. Nilai xx

x 3sin5sin3lim

0®= ….

a. 5/3 d. 3 b. 5/2 e. 5 c. 4

36. Nilai xx

xx sin

cos1lim0

-®

= ….

a. 2/3 d. 1/3 b. 1/2 e. –1 c. 0

37. Nilai 20

2cos1limx

xx

-®

= ….

a. 1/4 d. 1 b. 1/2 e. 2 c. 3/2

38. Nilai 30

sintanlimx

xxx

-®

= ….

a. ½ d. 2 b. 1 e. 6 c. 4

39. Nilai pp

21

sin1lim21

-

-® x

xx

= .....

a. –2 d. 0 b. –1 e. 2 c. 1



TURUNAN FUNGSI DAN APLIKASINYA

Turunan fungsi f di x yang ditulis dengan notasi f ′(x)

f ′(x) = h

xfhxfh

)()(lim0

-+®

jika f(x) = axn, maka f ′(x) = anxn – 1 Untuk u dan v masing-masing fungsi x, u' turunan dari u dan v' turunan dari v dan k bilangan konstan maka berlaku sebagai berikut. y = u ± v, maka y' = u' ± v' y = k u, maka y' = k u' y = u v, maka y' = u'v + uv'

y = vu

, maka y' = 2''

vuvvu -

Turunan Fungsi Trigonometri 1. Jika y = sin x, maka y' = cos x 2. Jika y = cos x, maka y' = –sin x 3. Jika y = tan x, maka y' = sec2 x 4. Jika y = cot x, maka y' = –cosec2 x 5. Jika y = sin U, maka y' = U' cos U 6. Jika y = sinn U, maka y' = n sinn – 1 U cos U' 7. Jika y = sec x, maka y' = sec x tan x 8. Jika y = cosec x, maka y' = cosec x cot x Persamaan Garis Singgung pada Kurva

Persamaan garis singgung pada kurva di titik (x1, y1) dengan gradien m di mana m = f ′(x) adalah :

y – y1 = m(x – x1)

Fungsi f(x) dikatakan naik jika f ′(x) > 0, dan fungsi f(x) dikatakan turun jika f ′(x) < 0. Fungsi f(x) dikatakan stasioner jika f ′(x) = 0 Jenis titik stasioner ada 3 yaitu: a. titik balik maksimum, b. titik balik minimum, dan c. titik belok horizontal.

Untuk menggambar grafik y = f(x) dapat dilakukan dengan cara sebagai berikut. a. Menentukan titik-titik potong grafik fungsi dengan

sumbu-sumbu koordinat. b. Menentukan titik-titik stasioner dan jenisnya. c. Menentukan titik-titik bantu (menentukan nilai y

untuk x besar positif dan untuk x besar negatif). Turunan kedua dari suatu fungsi y = f(x) adalah turunan dari turunan pertama dan diberi lambang:

y'' = f ′′(x) = 2

2

2

2

dxfd

dxyd

=

Dari suatu lintasan s = f(t), maka berlaku:

kecepatan = v = dtds

percepatan = a =dtdv

dtsd

=2

2

Teorema L'Hopital Penggunaan turunan untuk menghitung bentuk-bentuk tak tentu limit fungsi dikenal sebagai Teorema L'Hopital. Misal f(x) dan g(x) adalah fungsi-fungsi yang diferensiabel.

Jika g′ ≠ 0 untuk setiap x ≠ a dan jika)()(lim

xgxf

ax ®

mempunyai bentuk 00

atau ¥¥

pada x = a maka:

)(')('lim

)()(lim

xgxf

xgxf

axax ®®= , dengan catatan

)(')('lim

xgxf

ax ®

ada

Apabila)(')('lim

xgxf

ax ® masih mempunyai bentuk tak tentu.

Diteruskan dengan menggunakan turunan kedua

)('')(''lim

)(')('lim

xgxf

xgxf

axax ®®= = ... dan seterusnya.

Sehingga diperoleh nilai limitnya.

Bab 8 Turunan Matematika Kelas 11 SMA


1. Gunakan konsep limit untuk menentukan turunan

fungsi-fungsi berikut. a. f(x) = sin 2x b. f(x) = cos (1–3x) c. f(x) = tan x d. f(x) = 2x4 – 7 e. f(x) = 5x3 – 5x f. f(x) = 2 x – 2x

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 2. Sebuah peluru ditembakkan vertikal ke atas

dengan kecepatan awal 10 m/detik. Kedudukan peluru setelah t detik memenuhi persamaan h(t) = 60t – 7t² dengan h(t) adalah tinggi peluru yang diukur dalam meter.

a. Tentukan kecepatan peluru pada saat 3,5 detik. b. Kapan peluru berhenti?

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................

3. Diketahui f(x) = ÷øö

çèæ -÷øö

çèæ +

xx

xxx 11

. Buktikan

bahwa f ‘(x) =5

4

235

xx +

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 4. Tentukan interval yang membuat fungsi-fungsi

berikut merupakan fungsi naik atau fungsi turun.

a. f(x) = 5 + 8x – 2x2 b. f(x) = 2x2 – 8x + 9 c. f(x) = 9 + 3x – 4x2 d. f(x) = x3 – 18x2 + 10x – 11 e. f(x) = 10 – 12x + 6x2 – x3 f. f(x) = x4 – 24x2 + 10x – 5

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 5. Sebuah kotak tanpa tutup, alasnya berbentuk

persegi dengan sisi x cm, volumenya 32 cm3. Jika kotak tersebut terbuat dari karton,

a. tunjukkan bahwa luas karton yang diperlukan

untuk membuat kotak itu L(x) = x2 +x

128

b. tentukan ukuran kotak agar karton yang digunakan sesedikit mungkin.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 6. Tentukan turunan pertama dari fungsi berikut. a. y = (4x2 + 5x) (2x2 – 6x + 1)

b. y = ÷øö

çèæ - 42

41xx

(3x3 + 27)

c. f(x) = (x2 + 8)12

d. f(x) = 3 2 32 +- xx

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................



7. Tentukan turunan pertama dari fungsi-fungsi trigonometri berikut.

a. f(x) = cos (x2 + 1) b. f(x) = 6 cosec x

c. f(x) = x

xsin1

cos+

d. f(x) = x2 sec x

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................ 8. Carilah persamaan garis singgung pada kurva y =

x2 – 5x + 7 yang tegak lurus garis x + 3y = 9.

................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ 9. Tentukan bilangan cacah yang jumlahnya 16 agar

hasil kali salah satu dengan kuadrat bilangan lainnya menjadi maksimum.

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

10. Suatu persegi panjang diketahui keliling = (2x + 24) cm dan lebar = (8 – x) cm. Agar luasnya maksimum, hitunglah panjang, lebar, dan luas persegi panjang.

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................

................................................................................



SOAL

1. Jika f(x) = x

x+15

maka f '(2) = ....

a. ¼ d. 7/9 b. 5/6 e. 5/9 c. ½

2. Diketahuif(x)= xx

xcossin

sin+

. Nilai f( p121

)

adalah .... a. 1/3 d. 3/2

b. 2/3 e. 3 d. 1

3. ÷øö

çèæ

--

122

xxx

dxd

= ....

a. 3x2 + ( )22

2

11

-

+

xx

b. 3x2 – ( )22

2

11

-

-

xx

c. x2 + ( )22 113

-

+

xx

d. x2 – ( )22 113

-

-

xx

e. 3x2 – ( )22 113

+

+

xx

4. Titik balik maksimum kurva y =

xxx 3231 22 +- adalah ....

a. (–3 , –36) d. (3 , –18)

b. (–1 , –531

) e. (3 , 0)

c. (1 , 131

)

5. Ditentukan f(x) = x-1

2dan f "(x) adalah turunan

kedua dari f(x). Nilai dari f "(–2) adalah ....

a. 253

d. 274

b. 255

e. 276

c. 296

6. Turunan pertama f(x) = (2x – 1) cos (3x + 1) adalah ....

a. (2x – 1) sin (3x + 1) + 2cos (3x + 1) b. (2x – 1) cos (3x + 1) – 2 sin (3x + 1) c. 2 sin(3x + 1) + 2(6x – 3) cos (3x + 1) d. 2 cos (3x + 1) + (2x – 1) sin (3x + 1) e. 2 cos(3x + 1) – (6x – 3) sin (3x + 1) 7. Turunan pertama fungsi f(x) = cos5 (4x – 2) adalah

.... a. 5 cos4 (4x – 2) sin (4x – 2) b. –5 cos4 (4x – 2) sin (4x – 2) c. – 20 cos4 (4x – 2) sin (4x – 2) d. 10 cos3 (4x – 2) sin (8x – 2) e. –10 cos3 (4x – 2) sin (8x – 2) 8. Pada daerah asal 0 < x < 2, grafik fungsi y = x3 –

2x2 + 1 bersifat .... a. selalu naik b. selalu turun c. naik, lalu turun d. turun, lalu naik e. turun naik berulang-ulang 9. Luas semua sisi balok 96 cm2. Jika alasnya

berbentuk persegi, paling besar balok itu dapat dibuat dengan volume ... cm3.

a. 0 b. 54 c. 64 d. 64 2 e. 80 10. Diketahui luas lingkaran merupakan fungsi dari

kelilingnya. Jika keliling sebuah lingkaran adalah x, laju perubahan luas lingkaran terhadap kelilingnya adalah ....

a. πx d. px

b. 2πx e. p

x2

c. p2x

11. Turunan pertama fungsi f(x) = cos3 (5 – 4x) adalah

.... a. –12 cos2 (5 – 4x) sin (5 – 4x) b. 12 cos (5 – 4x) sin (5 – 4x) c. 12 sin2 (5 – 4x) sin (5 – 4x) d. –6 sin (5 – 4x) sin (10 – 8x) e. 6 cos (5 – 4x) sin (10 – 8x)



12. Nilai maksimum dari f(x) = x3 – 6x2 + 9x pada interval –1 ≤ x ≤ 3 adalah ....

a. 16 d. 1 b. 4 e. 0 c. 3 13. f(x) = x3 – 4x2 + 4x + 6 naik pada interval .... a. –2 < x < – 2/3 b. 2/3 < x < 2 c. x < –2 atau x > 2/3 d. x < 2/3 atau x > 2 e. x < – 2/3 atau x > 2 14. Nilai maksimum dari f(x) = 2x3 – 6x2 – 48x dalam

interval –3 < x < 4 adalah .... a. –160 d. –99 b. –155 e. –11 c. –131

15. Turunan pertama dari f(x) =( )( )2

2

312x

x-+

untuk x =

–3 adalah .... a. 0,000024 d. 0,024 b. 0,00024 e. 0,24 c. 0,0024 16. Turunan dari y = (1 – x)2 (2x + 3) adalah .... a. (1 – x) (3x + 2) b. (x – 1) (3x + 2) c. 2(1 + x) (3x + 2) d. 2(x – 1) (3x + 2) e. 2(1 – x) (3x + 2)

17. f(x) = 105331 23 -+- xxx turun dalam

interval .... a. –5 < x < – 1 b. x < – 1 c. x < 1 d. 1 < x < 5 e. x < 1 atau x > 5 18. Kurva y = x3 – 6x2 + 9x + 1 turun pada interval .... a. x ≤ 1 atau x ≤ 3 b. –2 ≤ x ≤ 1 atau 3 ≤ x ≤ 6 c. 1 < x < 3 d. 1 ≤ x ≤ 3 e. –1 ≤ x ≤ 1

19. Nilai minimum relatif f(x) = 4331 22 +-- xxx

adalah .... a. –5

b. –2 32

c. –1/3 d. 1/3 e. 4

20. Jika f(x) = x

xxsin

cossin + dan sin x ≠ 0 maka f

'(2p

) = ....

a. –2 b. –1 c. 0 d. 1 e. 2 21. Jika diketahui f(x) = 3x3 – 2x2 – 5x + 8, nilai dari f

′(2) adalah …. a. 13 d. 33 b. 21 e. 49 c. 23

22. Turunan dari f(x) = x2

3 adalah f ′(x) = ….

a. xx3-

d. xx

3

b. xx2

3- e.

xx6

c. xx4

3-

23. Diketahui fungsi h(x) = x2 + 3x, maka h(i + t) –

h(t) adalah …. a. 2i + 3 d. t2 + 3t b. 2t + 4 e. t2 + 5t c. 5t2

24. Rumus untuk f ′(x) jika f(x) = x – x2 adalah …. a. 1 – x d. x2 – x3 b. 1 – 2x e. x – 2x2 c. 1 – 2x3

25. Fungsi f(x) = x3 – 6x2 + 9x + 2 turun untuk …. a. 2 < x < 6 d. 0 < x < 2 b. 1 < x < 4 e. 1 < x < 2 e. 1 < x < 3 26. Grafik dari f(x) = x3 – x2 – 12x + 10 naik untuk

interval …. a. 3 < x < –2 b. x < 2 atau x > –3 c. –2 < x < 3 d. x < –3 atau x > –2 e. x < –2 atau x > 3 27. Grafik fungsi f(x) = x (6 – x)2 akan naik dalam

interval …. a. x < 0 atau x > 6 d. x > 6 b. 0 < x < 6 e. x < 6 c. x < 2 atau x > 6



28. Fungsi f yang dirumuskan dengan f(x) = x3 – 6x2 + 9x + 2 turun pada interval ….

a. –1 < x < 2 d. 1 < x < 0 b. –2 < x < 1 e. 1 < x < 4 c. 1 < x < 3 29. Titik-titik stasioner dari kurva y = x3 – 3x2 – 9x +

10 adalah …. a. (–1, 15) dan (3, –17) b. (1, –1) dan (3, –17) c. (–1, 15) dan (–3, –17) d. (3, –17) dan (–2, 8) e. (1, –1) dan (–3, –17) 30. Persamaan garis singgung kurva y = x2 – 4x di

titik yang absisnya 1 adalah …. a. x – y – 2 = 0 d. x + 2y + 1 = 0 b. x + y + 2 = 0 e. 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 c. 2x + y + 1 = 0 31. Persamaan garis singgung kurva y = x2 – 4 yang

tegak lurus garis x – 2y + 4 = 0 adalah …. a. 2x + y + 5 = 0 d. x + y + 2 = 0 b. x + 2y + 5 = 0 e. 2x – y – 5 = 0 c. x – 2y – 5 = 0 32. Turunan dari f(x) = 2 sin 5x adalah f ′(x) = …. a. 2 cos 5x d. 5 cos 5x b. 10 cos 5x e. –2 cos 5x c. –10 cos 5x 33. Jika f(x) = sin2 x, maka nilai x yang memenuhi f

′(x) = ½ adalah …. a. π d. π/6 b. π/3 e. π/12 c. π/4 34. Jika f(x) = 2 sin x + cos x, maka f ′(π/2 ) = …. a. –1 d. –2 b. 2 e. 0 c. 1 35. Jika y = cos 3/x, maka dy/dx = ….

a. –3 sin x3

d. – 23

xsin

x3

b. –32

sin x3

e.32

sin x3

c. 23

x sin

x3

36. Fungsi f(x) yang ditentukan oleh f(x) = (x3 – 1)2 dalam interval –1 < x < 1 mempunyai nilai minimum dan maksimum berturut-turut adalah ….

a. –4 dan 0 d. 0 dan 2 b. –1 dan 2 e. 0 dan 4 c. 2 dan 4 37. Fungsi f(x) yang ditentukan oleh f(x) = x3 + ax2 +

9x – 8 mempunyai nilai stasioner untuk x = 1. Nilai a adalah ….

a. –6 d. 2 b. –4 e. 4 c. –2 38. Nilai maksimum dari y = x3 – 3x + 2, pada interval

–2 < x < 2 adalah …. a. 6 d. 3 b. 5 e. 2 c. 4 39. Jumlah dua bilangan x dan y adalah 96. Jika x3y

maksimum maka nilai x adalah .… a. 30 d. 20 b. 25 e. 15 c. 24 40. Diketahui keliling suatu persegi panjang (2x + 20)

cm dan lebarnya (8 – x) cm. Agar luas persegi panjang maksimum maka panjangnya adalah ….

a. 3 cm c. 4 ½ cm b. 3 ½ cm d. 9 cm c. 10 cm



UNIT 1

SPEAKING In your everyday life you often find people requesting many things from you. You might agree or refuse other people’s requests. Therefore, you should know how to grant requests. Do you know how to do it very well? Granting Request In the dialogue between Ayu and Palupi you find the following expressions: Ayu : Will you tell me about it? Palupi : Sure, I will. Ayu : Let’s try to make lepat sometimes. Palupi : OK.

Sure, I will and OK are expressions to grant a request.

Here are other expressions that you can use: • Alright. • Certainly. • Right away. • Of course. Asking for opinion • What do you think of …? • What are your views? • What is your opinion? • Is it right what I’ve done? • What about …? • How about … Giving opinion • I’m convinced that …. • I reckon …. • I consider that .... • According to the expert, I …. • In my opinion, .… • I think …. Expressing satisfaction • I’m satisfied with …. • I’m satisfied at …. • I’m glad with what you’ve done. • It’s really satisfying. • Everything was satisfying. Expression dissatisfaction • I’m not satisfied with …. • It isn’t very nice. • It’s really not good enough. • I’m dissatisfied by …. • It’s dissatisfying. • Less Formal • Oh no.

Task With a partner make dialogues based on the following situations. Use the expressions you have learnt. 1. You are embarrassed to tell your problem to your

parents. On the other hand, your friend has got a good experience with the same problem.

2. Your friend achieved or gained what he/she had done well before, but you didn't although you had done as well as he/she did.

Task Complete the following dialogues with appropriate expressions and act them out. Dialogue 1 Mrs Naning and her husband are talking about their son, Budi in the living room. Mrs Naning : Budi's teacher told me that Budi had

been absent for 3 days without information 1 ? Frankly, I am embarrassed and confused.

Husband : 2 we should ask him then. Mrs Naning : Yeah. I am with you. But don't be

angry with him. Just ask him and why he didn't go to school for 3 days and where he went.

Husband : Okay then. Dialogue 2 Mrs Vira Kolopaking, an English teacher is happy when her students passed the national examination. The principal invited her to his office congratulate on her. Principal : Good morning, Mrs Vira. Please have

a seat. Mrs Vira : Good morning, Sir. Thank you. Principal : I actually want to say

"Congratulations" for your serious effort. Our students got satisfying marks in English.

Mrs Vira : Thank you. Err … I am really 3 with what they have done. They answered 40 questions well. So that none failed in their English exams. What about another subject?

Principal : Mm.... Five students failed on their mathematics test. I am worried. Their parents will express 4 because of their children's failure. Probably they will not trust our school anymore. But according to the mathematics teacher, the students never followed the enrichment programmed at school seriously. They were often absent.

. B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA


Mrs Vira : I think that is the risk. They 5 with what they have done.UNIT 2 Reading

A report usually talks about something concrete or which can be observed such as animals, plants, planets, and natural disasters. Report The social purpose of information reports is presenting information about something. They generally describe an entire class of things, whether natural or made: mammals, the planets, rocks, plants, computers, countries of origin, transportation, and so on. Schematic structure : General classification (general information) Description (how they look, where they live, what they eat, how they move, reproduce) The common grammatical patterns of an information report include: • use of general nouns, eg hunting dogs, rather than

particular nouns, eg our dog; • use of relating verbs to describe features, eg

Molecules are tiny particles; • some use of action verbs when describing behavior,

eg Emus cannot fly; • use of timeless present tense to indicate usualness,

eg Tropical cyclones always begin over the sea; • use of technical terms, eg Isobars are lines drawn on

a weather map; • use of paragraphs with topic sentences to organize

bundles of information; repeated naming of the topic as the beginning focus of the clause.

Text

Mangrove

A mangrove is a tropical marine tree. Mangroves have special aerial roots and salt-filtering tap roots which enable them to thrive in brackish water. Brackish water is salty but not as salty as sea water. Mangrove trees are commonly planted and found in coastal areas. Mangroves can serve as walls of protection for natural disaster in coastal area like tsunami. According to BBC News, healthy mangrove forests had helped save lives in the Asia disaster tsunami and people tended to respect these natural barriers even more, especially after the tsunami.

There are several species of mangrove tree found all over the world. Some prefer more salinity, while others like to be very-close to a large fresh water source such as river. Some prefer areas that are sheltered from waves. Some species have their roots covered with sea water every day during high tide. Other species grow on dry land but are still part of the ecosystem. The Times of India reported that rare species of mangrove had been

found and was also known as the looking-glass tree, probably because the leaves are silver-coated.

Mangroves need to keep their trunk and leave above the surface of the water. Yet they also need to be firmly attached to the ground so they are not moved by waves.

Any part of root that appears above the water flows oxygen to the plant under water surface. as the soil begin to build up, these roots procedure additional roots that become embedded in the soil. Questions! 1. what is the text above! 2. what is the main idea in 1 paragraph! 3. where did we get mangrove tree? 4. how was the condition to plant the mangrove tree? 5. write the Indonesian word : a. coastal area b. sheltered c. probably d. appear e. embedded

An Elephant

An elephant is the largest and strongest of all animals. It is a strange looking animal which it has thick legs, huge sides and backs, large hanging ears, a small tail, little eyes, long white tusks and above all, elephant has a long nose, the trunk. An elephant is commonly seen in a zoo, it has hard found in it natural habitat.

The trunk is the elephant's peculiar feature. This trunk has various usages. The elephant draws up water by its trunk and can squirt the water all over its body like a shower bath. The elephant's trunk also lifts leaves and put them into its mouth. In fact, the trunk serves the elephant as long arm and hand. An elephant looks very clumsy and heavy and yet an elephant can move very quickly.

The elephant is very intelligent animal. Its intelligence combined with its great strength makes an elephant a very useful servant to man. Elephant can be trained to serve in various ways such as carry heavy loads, hunt for tigers and even fight. An elephant is really a smart animal. Questions 1. What is the text above? 2. What is elephant have? 3. Mention the great strength of elephant when helps

the man 4. What tenses use in the text above 5. What is the purpose of the text above?



Human body energy

Human body is actually a living machine and is

like all other machines. This living machine needs fuel to supply it with energy. The fuel is provided by the food which we eat. However do we know how much we need to stay healthy?

The energy value of food is usually measured in calories. A calorie is the amount of heat which is required to raise the temperature of 1 kg of water by 1 degree C. The number of calories which people need per day varies. It depends on the activity which the people are involved in. For example; people will need more calories for standing than for sitting, people need more for running than for walking, etc. The energy which is provided by food is in the form of three kinds of chemical substances. They are carbohydrate, protein and fat. Carbohydrate provides 8.8 calories per gram (cal/gm) of energy, protein 4.0 cal/gm and fat 8.0 cal/gm. Each food contains different proportion of these substances. These three chemical substances are all important for body staying healthy. Questions 1. What is the text above? 2. What is the purpose of the text above? 3. What is a calorie? 4. How much calories which people need in a day? 5. Mention the kinds of energy that provided by food?

Types of Volcanic Eruptions

Volcanic eruptions have caused some of the worst disasters in the world. They can wipe out entire cities and kill thousands of people. The name of volcano comes from Roman term. It derives from VULCAN which is the name of Roman fire god. Romans believed that Vulcan lived on a volcanic Italian coast. Romans called the island VULCANO.

According to scientists, volcanic eruptions are divided in to four basic groups. They are commonly known as Hawaiian, Strombolian, Vulcanian and Peleean. The term of Hawaiian eruptions are named after the volcanoes in Hawaii. These volcanic eruptions are the least violent type. They produce highly fluid lava which flows quietly. This gradually builds up a shield volcano.

Strombolian eruptions are named after Stromboli. These result from the constant release of gas from the magma. As the gas escapes, it produces tephra that piles up, turning into a cinder cone. Strombolian eruptions happen when sticky magma plugs the central vent. This makes the magma tic gas build up pressure until it blasts. The magma is turned into volcanic dust and bombs.

Vulcanian eruption which comes from the ancient Roman belief, are more violent than the strombolian eruption. Vulcanian eruption happens and

brings magma which is more viscous. Vulcanian explosions are usually larger and noisier than the Strombolian eruptions.

Paleean eruptions are famous as the most violent kind of volcanic eruptions. The name of paleean comes from the eruption of Mount Pelee, Martinique in 1902. It killed almost 38 thousands people. A Peleean eruption occurs when the magmatic gas build up tremendous pressure. This causes violent explosions with glowing clouds of hot ash and dust. Questions 1. What is the text above? 2. What is the purpose of the text above! 3. What is the caused of volcanic eruptions! 4. Mention the volcanic eruption according to scientist! 5. When did the strombolian eruption happen?

Komodo dragon

Do you know what the largest lizard is? This lizard is called komodo. It lives in the scrub and woodland of a few Indonesian islands. Komodo dragon is the world's heaviest lizard, weighing 150 pounds or more. The largest Komodo ever measured was more than 10 feet (3 meters) long and weighed 366 pounds (166 kg) but the average size of komodo in the wild is about 8 feet (2.5 meters) long and 200 pounds (91 kg)

Komodo has gray scaly skin, a pointed snout, powerful limbs and a muscular tail. They use their keen sense of smell to locate decaying animal remains from several miles away. They also hunt other lizards as well as large mammals and are sometimes cannibalistic.

The Komodo dragon's teeth are almost completely covered by its gums. When it feeds, the gums bleed, creating an ideal culture for virulent bacteria. The bacteria that live in the Komodo dragon's saliva causes septicemia, or blood poisoning, in its victims. A dragon will bite its prey, then follow it until the animal is too weak to carry on. 1. What is the text above? 2. What is the purpose of the text above? 3. What is the largest lizard? 4. What is the main idea of third paragraph? 5. Write the Indonesia word: a. woodland b. measured c. scaly skin d. decaying e. victims



Heart

The heart is the most important part of the body.

It is the center of life. However, the heart is only as big as a closed hand. The heart is a muscle and it beats about seventy times per minute through trout a person’s life.

The heart pumps blood from your heart to all parts of your body. The heart is made up of four chambers or small “rooms”. The top chamber are called the right and left auricles and the bottoms chambers are the right and left ventricles.

When blood enters the heart. It is in dark reddish color because it contains carbon dioxide. The blood enters the right auricle and then the right ventricle. When the heart contracts, it forces the blood to the lungs where the blood receives oxygen. It then goes to the left auricle. The heart contracts again, and the blood goes to the left ventricle and is then forced out into the body. The blood gathers carbon dioxide and returns to the heart, and the process begins again Questions 1. What is the text above? 2. Why the heart is important part of the body? 3. Why did the blood dark when enters the heart? 4. What is the purpose of the text above? 5. Write the Indonesian word: a. auricle b. ventricle c. chamber d. muscle e. lungs Task

Thanksgiving Day

Thanksgiving or Thanksgiving Day is a celebration of harvest, thankfulness for peace, and the attempt of Native Americans. It is celebrated in late autumn. In the past, Thanksgiving was celebrated for their rich harvest in New England. In North America, however, it was originally held to thank God for their survival in the new land which was not easy for them. However, in Canada, it had been celebrated as in New England. Thanksgiving now is celebrated in United States of America and in Canada.

Thanksgiving festivals are held every fourth Thursday of November in the U.S and on the second Monday of October in Canada. It is usually celebrated in four to five days in the North America and for three days in Canada. It is celebrated through families and friends gathering to eat and give good luck. Turkey is the main dish in the thanksgiving dinner.

Thanksgiving parades are also usually held. In Thanksgiving homes are decorated with wreaths, fresh and dried flowers. Lamps are lighted to brighten the environment. Tables are decorated with best china and antique silver dishes to mark the occasion

Questions 1. What is the Thanksgiving Day? 2. Where is it celebrated? 3. When is it celebrated in Canada? 4. How long does the celebration last in the USA? 5. How is it celebrated? Task Read the following report on Sydney. Then, complete the chart with the information from the report. Find the meanings of the following words based on the context. You may use your dictionary. bay(kb) : …. coast (kb) : …. colony(kb) : …. harbor (kb) : …. metropolitan (kb) : …. settlement(kb) : …. site(kb) : …. skyscraper(kb) : …. state capital (kb) : ….

Sydney the Metropolitan City

Sydney is the most populous city in Australia, with a metropolitan area population around 4.12 million. It is the state capital of New South Wales and is the site of the first European colony in Australia. The city is Australia’s largest financial centre. Sydney is located on Australia’s south-east coast. The city is built around Port Jackson, which includes Sydney Harbor, leading to the city’s nickname, “the Harbor City”.

This city is a major international tourist destination famous for its beaches and twin landmarks: the Sydney Opera House and the Harbor Bridge. The metropolitan area is surrounded by national parks, and contains many bays, rivers and inlets.

Sydney also has many shopping centre and retail outlets throughout the city. The Queen Victoria Building on George Street also contains many shops. Many of the large regional centers around the metropolitan area also contain large shopping complexes. Sydney has several museums. The biggest are the Australian Museum (natural history and anthropology), The Power house Museum (science, technology and design), the Art Gallery of New South Wales, the Museum of Contemporary Art and the Australian National Maritime Museum.

Sydney’s Central Business District (CBD) extends southwards for about 3 kilometers (1.25 mi) from Sydney Cove. It is the point of the first European settlement in the area at the southern end of the bridge known as “The Rocks”. It is densely concentrated with skyscrapers and other buildings including historic sandstone buildings such as the Sydney Town Hall and Queen Victoria Building are combined by several parks such as Wynyard and Hyde Park.



Task

Washington DC

Washington is home to numerous national landmarks and is one of the most popular tourist destinations in the United States. The National Mall is a large, open park area in the center of the city featuring many monuments to American leaders; it also serves to connect the White House and the United States Capitol buildings. Located prominently in the center of the Mall is the Washington Monument. Other notable points of interest near the Mall include the Jefferson Memorial, Lincoln Memorial, Franklin Delano Roosevelt Memorial, National World War II Memorial, Korean War Veterans. Other points of interest in the District include Arena Stage, Chinatown, Basilica of the National Shrine of the Immaculate Conception, the Ukrainian Catholic National Shrine of the Holy Family (across the street from the Basilica Shrine), and more. Washington, D.C. is the capital of the United States.

The city and the district are located on the banks of the Potomac River and bordered by the states of Virginia (to the west) and Maryland (to the north, east and south). The city was planned and developed in the late 18th century to serve as the permanent national capital. It is a center of American history and culture, Washington is a popular destination for tourists, the site of numerous national landmarks and monuments, the world’s largest museum complex (the Smithsonian Institution), galleries, universities, cathedrals, performing arts centers and institutions, and native music scenes.

The Library of Congress and the National Archives house thousands of documents covering every period in American history. Some of the more notable documents in the National Archives include the Declaration of Independence, Constitution and Bill of Rights. Questions 1. Where is Washington D.C. located? 2. When was it built? 3. What is the city well known for? 4. What is the National Mall? 5. Where is the White House located? 6. Where is the largest museum complex located? Task Retell the following report about camel in your own words. Use the pictures if necessary.

The camel is a large, strong desert animal. Camels can travel great distances across hot, dry deserts with little food or water. They walk easily on soft sand and carry people and heavy hump. The hump is a large lump of fat providing energy if food is hard to find. There are two chief kinds of camels: (1) the Arabian camel also loads to places that have no roads. Camels also serve the people of the desert in many other ways.

The camel carries its own built-in food supply on its back in the form of a called dromedary, which has one hump, and (2) Bactrian camel, which has two humps. Task Read and understand the following text.

A kangaroo is an animal found only in Australia, although it has a smaller relative, called a wallaby, which lives on the Australian island of Tasmania and also in New Guinea. Kangaroos eat grass and plants. They have short front legs, but very long, and very strong back legs and a tail. These are used for sitting up and for jumping. Kangaroos have been known to make forward jumps of over eight meters, and leap across fences more than three meters high. They can also run at speeds of over 45 kilometers per hour. The largest kangaroos are the Great Grey Kangaroo and the Red Kangaroo. Adult grow to a length of 1.60 meters and weigh over 90 kilos. Kangaroos are marsupials. This means that the female kangaroo has an external pouch on the front of her body. A baby kangaroo is very tiny when it is born, and it crawls at once into this pouch where it spends its first five months of life. Answer the questions based on the text 1. Are kangaroos and wallabies indigenous animals

of Australia? 2. What does the word "these" in paragraph 2 refer

to? 3. What do people call the largest kangaroos? 4. Where do you find the pouch of the female

kangaroo? 5. What does the word "it" in sentence ... it crawls at

once refer to? 6. Can you find the sentence considered the

definition of a kangaroo? State it. 7. Which sentences tell you about the description of

the kangaroo's appearance?



Task Read the text and answer the questions.

What Is Thunder and Lightning?

Lightning is a sudden, violent flash of

electricity between a cloud and the ground, or from cloud to cloud. A lightning fl ash, or bolt, can be several miles long. It is so hot, with an average temperature of 34,000° Centigrade that the air around it suddenly expands with a loud blast. This is the thunder we hear.

Lightning occurs in hot, wet storms. Moist air is driven up to a great height. It forms a type of cloud called cumulonimbus. When the cloud rises high enough, the moisture freezes and ice crystals and snow flakes are formed. These begin to fall, turning to rain on the way down.

This rain meets more moist air rising, and it is the friction between them which produces static electricity. When a cloud is fully charged with this electricity, it discharges it as a lightning flash. Answer the questions based on the text 1. What is meant by lightning? 2. When do lightning usually happen? 3. What does the word "this" in the last sentence of

paragraph 1 refers to? 4. What does the word "it" in paragraph 2 refers to?



UNIT 3 Giving Advice • I suggest that you.... • She advises me to do the best. • You should be patient. • Everyone should not.... • Why don’t you...? Giving warning • You must not break the rules. • Please, don’t.... • I warn you not to.... • Don’t do that. • Don’t.... Task Read the following dialogues. Underline the expressions used. Dialogue 1 Danu is in Mrs Dewi's room. She is giving advice to Danu. Mrs. Hutabarat : Danu, Mrs. Etty told me that you

didn't attend her lesson six times. Is that right?

Danu : Yes, Mam. Mrs. Hutabarat : Why didn't you study with her

properly? She is a qualified teacher here. Many students like her very much because she is also a patient teacher.

Danu : Actually I like her lessons. But the way she explains is so fast that I cannot follow the lesson.

Mrs. Hutabarat : You should ask her to explain the lesson more slowly.

Danu : But I'm ashamed to tell her. Mrs Hutabarat : Alright, I'll accompany you to talk to

her. Danu : Thank you, Ma'am. Mrs Hutabarat : It's alright. Danu : Ma'am, I promise to study hard

especially in her subject. Mrs Hutabarat : That's my student. Dialogue 2 A man is stopped by a policewoman because he violated a traffic regulation. Policewoman : Good morning, Sir. May I see your

driving licence? A man : Good morning. Here you are. Policewoman : You just broke a traffic regulation on

Siliwangi Street. A man : Did I ride my motorbike too fast? Policewoman : No. But you didn't read the traffic sign

when turning right. You must not enter this street before 10 a.m.

A man : Oh, I'm so sorry. I didn't see it, because I am in a hurry.

Policewoman : Okay. Go ahead with your motorbike. But you should sign the traffic ticket. Then your driving license must be left here.

A man : Alright Ma'am. I'm sorry for my fault. It won't happen again.

Answer the questions based on the two dialogues above. 1. Why should Danu meet Mrs. Hutabarat in her room? 2. What did Mrs. Hutabarat say when giving a

suggestion to Danu? 3. What did Mrs. Hutabarat mean by saying you should

not do that? 4. Why did the policewoman stop the man? 5. What did the policewoman say to warn the man? 6. Why must the man sign the traffic ticket? Complete the following dialogues by choosing the right expressions given in the box. Practice them with your partner. a. Don't do too much training. b. Why don't you go with your father? c. She advised me to study hard. d. Don't meet Mr. Rudi now. e. Don't forget to give him my regards. f. He is in the admonition of God. g. You should study hard. 1. Ajeng : I'm very sorry, Sir. I came late. Mr. Siregar : Okay. But ………. He has been

here since 7. 2. Meylan : …………… He cannot be

disturbed. He is very busy. Robert : Alright. I'll meet him at noon. 3. Doctor : No problem. Just take enough rest.

……………… Patient : I will. Thank you, Doc. 4. Aisyah : Mom, tomorrow I'll have a test.

Please pray for me always. Mother : Okay. But …………. 5. Lidya : What should I do when meeting

Mr. Cahyo at his office? Father : Yeah. 6. Arum : What did mother say to you? Roni : ………………..because she didn't

want me to fail. 7. Lia : Excuse me, why does the rich man

often get problems? Budi : I think that……………..



Unit 4 Reading

An analytical exposition that proposes or suggests something. It consists of: • Opinion / proposal of something; and • Reasons behind the proposal or argument. • Sometimes what has been discussed is also

expressed again in the end of the text. This type of text has the purpose of persuading the reader with its argument. It also explains how and why the argument is proposed. The common grammatical patterns in exposition include: • General nouns, eg ears, zoos; • Abstract nouns, eg policy, government; • Technical words, eg species of animals; • Relating verbs, eg it is important …; • Action verbs, eg we must save …; • Thinking verbs, eg many people believe …; • Modal verbs, eg we must preserve …; • Modal adverbs, eg certainly we must try …; • Connectives, eg firstly, secondly …; • Evaluative language, eg important, significant,

valuable. Task Read the text below and find the meaning of the following words. Then, find three points listed below in the test. Avoid (kkt) : .... Backlog (kb) : .... Boost (kkt) : .... Complexion (kb) : .... Encourage (kkt) : .... Feasible (ks) : .... Fumbling (kki) : .... Gathering (kb) : .... Subsidize (kkt) : .... Traffic jam (kb) : .... Things that you need to identify from the text: 1. The proposal or the argument that is proposed in the

text. 2. The reasons behind the argument. 3. The summary of what is being proposed

Public Transportation should be Free

If we can agree that government has some role to play in our lives, then let’s at least make it a positive one. Consider the benefits of free, fully-subsidized public transportation. First, it will motivate more people to leave their cars at home. Think of the reduction in pollution and traffic jam and insurance costs due to accidents. Greener cities, safer cities, more livable cities. More room for parks and trees. Think of the money we’ll all save by consuming less gas, spending less frequently

on car repairs, and so on. That money will stay in our wallets and we could then turn around and give the economy a boost by spending it on other consumer goods or services. More jobs. Secondly, we must consider the health benefits. We’ll all walk a little more. This will reduce visits to doctors’ offices and hospitals because we’ll be healthier. We’ll have improved blood pressure, lower stress and possibly a better complexion. In addition, free transportation will encourage us to enjoy the company of our friends and family. It will become much more feasible to safely drink another glass of wine at the restaurant or have that extra beer at the family gathering. We’ll avoid the worry of getting behind the wheel with a blood-alcohol level that’s above the legal limit.

Fewer accidents, fewer tragedies, lower costs of policing and reduced court backlogs. The increased public expense in transportation should pay off in the form of reduced health care costs and a safer society. Then, think about some of the other social benefits: imagine how much we’ll learn from each other when we share rides instead of sitting in isolation in our cars. Talking to the neighbors might come back into fashion. More people will meet and talk and maybe even help each other. Having someone else drive us will also give us more time for reading books and newspapers. So, park your car and use it for your dream vacation. No more fumbling for change, just hop on and off the streetcar or bus wherever and whenever you like. What a great idea, especially for those who live in crowded, polluted cities. It will renew life on our streets. So I can’t agree more with this proposition. Let’s go for it! Task Read aloud the following text.

The Importance of Rainforests

Rainforests are one of the most complicated environments on Earth. They are recognized worldwide as containing the richest source of plants and animals and are believed to contain nearly three-quarters of all the varieties of life on Earth. This is remarkable because rainforests cover only about six per cent of the Earth's land surface. Rainforest are the oldest major ecosystem, having survived climate changes for more than one million years. They provide habitats for more species of plants, animals, insects and birds than any other environment found on our planet. Scientists estimate that between 60 and 90 per cent of all species of life are to be found in rain forests. Unfortunately, the widespread gradually releasing the water over time into streams and rivers. This helps to control soil erosion and flooding. Rainforests are vital to the Earth in helping to recycle carbon and oxygen. Carbon dioxide (CO2) is the gas put



into the air globally by humans, mainly by the burning of fossil fuels (for example in cars and factories).

Rainforests are able to remove carbon dioxide from the air and return oxygen in its place. This is why our global rainforests are often called the Earth's ‘lungs'. Rainforests are major producers of the Earth's oxygen. In fact, scientists believe that nearly 50 per cent of the Earth's oxygen is produced by destruction of many of the world's rainforests has caused a significant decline in the number of plant and animal species on Earth.

Rainforests influence both our local and global climates. For example, between 50 and 80 per cent of the moisture in the air above rainforests comes from the rainforest's trees. If large areas of these lush rainforests are cleared, the average rainfall in the area will drop. Eventually, the area's climate will get hotter and drier. This process could convert rainforests into a sparse grassland or desert. Rainforests are also able to absorb over 90 per cent of the rainfall in their leaves and mosses. By doing this, they are able to slow down water run-off by rainforest in the Amazon region alone. Nearly 40 per cent of the world's carbon is contained in the trees of the rainforests. As rainforests are cut down and burned, carbon dioxide is released into the Earth's atmosphere. Eventually, as this gas builds up the atmosphere, leading to what scientists call the enhanced greenhouse effect. To sum up, the role of the rainforest is essential for human life. It creates equilibrium in our environment and its resources are significant for human beings survival. Decide in which paragraph you can find the following information. 1. The economic purposes rainforests are used for 2. The percentage of the world's food supplies which

originate in rainforests areas 3. Fruits originating from rainforests 4. Activities that people do in rainforests 5. Sickness and diseases which are treated with

medicines from the rainforests 6. Industrial products that originate from the

rainforests 7. Daily products which are produced from plants

growing in rain forest areas 8. The area of rainforests which are being destroyed

each year for economic purposes Task The following text consists of five paragraphs, but they are not in correct order. Arrange them into a good text. 1. The global average air temperature near the

Earth's surface rose 0.74 ± 0.18 °C (1.33 ± 0.32 °F) during the last century. The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) concludes "most of the observed increase in globally averaged temperatures since the mid-twentieth century is very likely due to the observed increase in anthropogenic greenhouse gas concentrations via the greenhouse effect. Natural phenomena such as solar variation combined with volcanoes probably

had a small warming effect from pre-industrial times to 1950 and a small cooling effect from 1950 onward. These basic conclusions have been endorsed by at least thirty scientific societies and academies of science, including all of the national academies of science of the major industrialized countries. While individual scientists have voiced disagreement with some findings of the IPCC, the overwhelming majority of scientists working on climate change agree with the IPCC's main conclusions.

2. Increasing global temperature will cause sea levels to rise, and is expected to increase the intensity of extreme weather events and to change the amount and pattern of precipitation. Other effects of global warming include changes in agricultural yields, trade routes, glacier retreat, species extinction and increases in the ranges of disease vectors.

3. Global warming is the increase in the average temperature of the Earth's near-surface air and oceans in recent decades and its projected continuation.

4. Remaining scientific uncertainties include the amount of warming expected in the future, and how warming and related changes will vary from region to region around the globe. Most national governments have signed and ratified the Kyoto Protocol aimed at reducing greenhouse gas emissions, but there is ongoing political and public debate worldwide regarding what, if any, action should be taken to reduce or reverse future warming or to adapt to its expected consequences.

5. Climate model projections summarized by the IPCC indicate that average global surface temperature will likely rise a further 1.1 to 6.4 °C (2.0 to 11.5 °F) during the twenty-first century. The range of values results from the use of differing scenarios of future greenhouse gas emissions as well as models with differing climate sensitivity. Although most studies focus on the period up to 2100, warming and sea level rise are expected to continue for more than a thousand years even if greenhouse gas levels are stabilized. The delay in reaching equilibrium is a result of the large heat capacity of the oceans.

Task Answer the following questions based on the paragraphs you have just arranged. 1. What is a suitable title for the text? 2. What is the topic of the text? 3. What is the main idea of each paragraph? 4. What is the conclusion of the text?



Task Study the text and the explanation. Access to Clean Water:

A Problem for Indonesia

Access to clean water is one of Indonesia's biggest problem. According to the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) Report 2007, published by the National Development Planning Board, piped water is accessible to 30.8 per cent of households in the country's cities and 9 per cent in its villages. Such figures show the limitations of the municipality' water service provider, PDAM. Lack of investment in clean water is one reason

PDAM gives for its limited outreach. Based on a government statement, to meet the MDGs target by 2015, Indonesia needs Rp 43 trillion (US$4.6 billion) in clean water funding. The government currently provides Rp500 billion. In order to close the funding gap, the government expects private investment in drinking water infrastructure. The need for clean water funding is something that cannot be covered by private investment. In Indonesia, most PDAM utilities have small scales of economy and are therefore unattractive to investors.

There is no evidence to suggest private investors will improve the efficiency and effectiveness of water services, whereas the government has a duty to do so. Increasing public funding for clean water infrastructure is the most rational approach for Indonesia. This effort should begin with an analysis of the needs of locals. This should be done through a democratic and participatory process.

There are resources and mechanisms the government could employ to increase clean water funding, such as state and local budgets, grants, government bonds and community-public partnership. In order to use a grant system, the government should improve its proposal management and clearly focus on real needs in order to widen clean water services.

PDAM could use existing funds more efficiently. if it could reduce leakages from 40 per cent to 20 percent, it would have more disposable funds to invest in infrastructure. PDAM should use cost recovery principles, as long as costs are not passed on to consumers. Cost recovery principles should also be supported by a proper subsidy mechanism. Bond investing is a traditional lending instrument for public services. The mechanism needs conditions, such as strong capital structure at local level.

A few of mechanisms in place now do help the poor access clean water at affordable prices. The most important thing is to make sure the mechanisms run properly and that the needs of people at the local level are met through appropriate funding.

Elaborate on the following main ideas as an analytical exposition text. Work with a partner. 1. Types of Pollution 2. Air Pollution 3. Water Pollution 4. Soil Pollution



UNIT 5 Speaking

You are invited to be an MC. This is the script that you will read. Study the following script. Perform in front of the class.

Good afternoon! My name is Andi Soraya and I'm a sophomore here at SMU Tunas Bangsa. I want to welcome you to the first of a three-day English for You programmed sponsored by First English Course. Our speaker for this day is Helvy Nadia. Helvy earned a scholar degree in English Literature from Padjadjaran University. A syndicated columnist, she is a member of an outstanding writing society in Indonesia and is the award-winning author of some best selling books. She has spoken to thousands of students in Indonesia. She has appeared on television talk shows across Indonesia. Today Helvy will be speaking on "How to Write a Good Book". Let's give Helvy a warm welcome to SMU Tunas Bangsa. Task Study what an MC should and should not do. Then, perform in front of the class as an MC. 1. You are the stage setter. 2. Create an inviting environment. 3. Be really interested in the speaker and subject. 4. Unless the speaker is a celebrity, use his or her

name several times. 5. When you make an introduction, speak to the

audience, not to the person being introduced. 6. Do not upstage or over praise. 7. Welcome the speaker with a handshake, nod,

smile, or slight touch on the shoulder. 8. Lead the applause. Task As your friend performs as an MC in front of the class, make an assessment of his/her performance. Use the following check list. 1. He/she is a good stage setter. 2. He/she is able to create an inviting environment. 3. He/she seems to be interested in the speaker and

the subject. 4. He/she mentions the name of the speaker several

times. 5. When he/she makes an introduction, he/she speaks

to the audience, not to the speaker. 6. He/she welcomes the speaker with a handshake,

nod, smile, or slight touch on the shoulder. 7. He/she leads the applause.

Task Practice the following MC script in front of the class. Good afternoon, Ladies and Gentlemen. Our session now will deal with the topic "The Importance of Home Education for Children" to be presented by Dr. Nina Bisono, M.Psi from Tunas Ceria NGO. Now I'd like to call upon Dr. Nina Bisono, M.Psi to proceed to the stage to present her paper. Ladies and Gentlemen, Mrs. Bisono is the director of Tunas Ceria. It is a non-governmental organization concerned about children education. She has written several books in the same field. She has also involved in a number of seminars dealing with education for children. I'd now like to invite Mrs. Bisono to present her main points in her paper within 30 minutes. Afterwards, we'll spend the rest of the time for questions and answers. Mrs. Bisono, please. Now we still have twenty minutes for our session and I like to invite questions and comments on what has been presented by Mrs. Bisono. Please mention your name and institution first. Ladies and Gentlemen. We are running out of time. I'd like to extend my appreciation and thanks to Mrs. Bisono for her lucid presentation. She deserves a big applause, then. Thank you.



Task Read aloud the following script of an MC. Good evening. Ladies and Gentlemen, a warm welcome to you all to this reception organized by Cross Cultural Organization (CCO). A quick word about tonight's program: we shall begin with a talk by our honorable speaker, Professor Wahid Hidayat, from Jakarta. This will be followed by a short question–and–answer session, where you will be free to exchange ideas with the professor. At about 8 o'clock tonight when the talk concludes, the reception will resume, and we have arranged refreshments outside for you. Since the professor is catching his flight home tonight, much as we would like to have him here longer with us, we have to make sure that he can be allowed to leave the venue by 8:30. As you may be well aware, this reception has been organized to mark the closing of an in–house seminar organized by CCO on cross cultural study. This seminar actually started last week and today is the last day. We are much honored to have invited Professor Wahid Hidayat of International University, to say a few words to us. Mr. Hidayat please. Answer the following questions based on the script 1. When was the reception held? 2. Who organized the reception? 3. Who was the speaker at the reception? 4. Where was the speaker from? 5. Mention two main programmed at the reception. 6. When will the talk end? 7. How long was the seminar? 8. What was the speaker going to do when the MC

invited him? Task Re-arrange the following parts of an MC script. 1. On behalf of the committee members, we'd like to

appreciate and thank dr. Luqman Dault for his informative presentation. He deserves a big applause, then. Thank you.

2. There's still 15 minutes left. Then, I'd like to invite questions and comments from the floor.

3. Our session now is going to discuss the topic "Young Generation, Healthy Generation" to be presented by dr. Luqman Dault.

4. Dr. Luqman Dault is a young doctor that gives big attention on teenage health. He has a number of research and surveys in the related fi eld.

5. Now, I'd like to invite Mr. Dault to present his main points in his paper within 45 minutes and afterwards we'll spend 15 minutes for questions and answers session. Mr Dault, please.

6. I'd now like to call upon your Excellency, dr. Luqman Dault to proceed to the stage, please.

Study the following expressions for opening, introducing the event and speaker, and closing a ceremony. Opening • Good afternoon. My name is.... • Good evening, Ladies and Gentlemen. • Good evening, the distinguished guest, Ladies and

Gentlemen. Introducing the event • Welcome to this event. • I want to welcome you to.... • It is greatest pleasure to welcome you.... Introducing the speaker • Our speaker for this day is.... • It's our pleasure to have ... here with us. • Mr. / Mrs. ... will talk about.... Closing • We have had a fascinating talk.... • Thank you for your participation. • Ladies and gentlemen, it's the end of this reception. • Thank you.... Task Read the following text and then discuss the meanings of the following words according to the context. Then, answer the questions. Attendant Conjunction Punitive (ks) Refractory Undergo (kkt) Withdrawal (kb)

The ‘Report’ of the New York Academy of Medicine agrees with the objective of stopping drug addiction and with the efforts at rehabilitation. It disapproves of the punitive approach and the fantastically brutal punishment. It proposes a more humane program as follows: 1. there should be a changed attitude toward the addict. He is a sick person, not a criminal. 2. the most effective way to get rid of drug addiction is to take the profit out of illegal drug traffic. The addict should be able to get his drugs at low cost under Federal control in conjunction with efforts to have him undergo withdrawal. 3. There should be medical supervision of existing addicts with strong efforts toward their rehabilitation. This would involve persuasion of the addict to go through treatment and rehabilitation, evaluation of the methods of treatment, and supervision of addicts who were unwilling or stubborn to treatment. 4. There should be no reduction in the efforts toward the elimination of the supply of illegal drugs. Every effort should be made to arrest drug peddlers, wholesalers, and importers. While the addict should be considered as a sick person and treated appropriately, the nonaddicting trafficker should feel the



full punishment of the law. 5. By means of all educational media, radios, televisions, the press, lectures, books, and classrooms, there should be a concentrated effort to inform the public of the dangers attendant on the use of narcotic drugs. 6. Such a program would provide enough data relating to the number of addicts, the origin of individual usage, the number under treatment, the outcome of various forms of treatment, the number known to be unwilling to treatment, and similar information which is not now available. Such information would form a solid basis for better control, better rehabilitation, and better knowledge concerning the effect of narcotic addiction. Questions 1. What is the text about? 2. What are the proposals or suggestions stated in the

text? 3. What is the best title for the text? Task Read the following text; find the meaning of the following words. Then, summarize the text, but be sure to include the suggestion, reason behind the suggestion, and the conclusion. Needle (kb) Encourage (kkt) Elderly (ks) Disabled (kb) Syringes (kb) Prescription (kb) Obtain (kkt) Cut down (kkt)

A needle exchange program would only encourage more people to use drugs, in my opinion, and many would still share needles or reuse needles even if there was a program.

Giving needles out for addicts to prevent the spread of disease, will only encourage them and others to do drugs more often. Furthermore, it may even encourage people who have never tried certain types of drugs, to try them because now they will get their needles for free. Do we really want to encourage this type of behavior?

I wouldn’t think so. Moreover, by giving needles to addicts, we are

also taking away from other programs that are already low on funding. The money for needle exchange would take away from Medicare programs that are there to help the elderly and disabled. There have already been enough Medicare cuts without the extra cuts this would bring about.

Then you also have the problem of some who will not use the needles and will keep reusing the needles they already have.

Most addicts are too far gone to worry about whether they reuse a needle or not, and many do not care about their chances of catching an infectious disease.

In the early 1980’s, insulin and allergy syringes could be bought in any drug store without a prescription, so addicts had no problem obtaining needles if they had the money.

Even though they did not need a prescription, they still continued to reuse needles and share with others. Consequently, it is still helping lead to the AIDS epidemic. In the early 1990’s, states started requiring that syringes be kept behind the counter in drugstores and requiring prescriptions for syringes were needed. This was a way to cut down on illegal drug use and reusing of needles. This was also an effort to stop the further epidemic of aids. It has not worked either, but the answer to the drug problem and the spread of diseases through used needles is not to equip addict’s tools with which to continue their illegal activities. We must spend the money that the needle exchange program would cost in other areas to help stop the use of drugs altogether.



UNIT 6 Read the following and then retell it in your own words.

Ali Baba and the Forty Thieves

Ali Baba was such a poor man that he had only one shoe for his two feet. Even the mice in his house were hungry. One day, his wife said, "We have no food in the house. No rice. No potatoes. Go and collect leaves in the forest so that I can make a soup."

Ali was a lazy man. He looked for leaves for about ten minutes and then he climbed a tree to sleep. He was afraid of wolves. When he woke up, he was surprised to see forty thieves on forty horses. They stopped in front of a big rock.

"Open Sesame!" shouted the leader. A door on the rock opened. The thieves carried

sacks full of gold into the cave. When they had finished, the leader shouted. "Close Sesame!" and the door closed. As soon

as the thieves had disappeared Ali Baba jumped down from the tree, said, "Open Sesame" and went into the cave. There were shelves all around the walls. The shelves were full of sacks.

And the sacks were full of gold. Ali took a sack home with him. Unfortunately, one of the thieves saw Ali's footprints on the sand. He followed them to Ali's home. He took out his knife and made a cross on the door.

"Now I shall know which house it is," he said. He rode off to get the other thieves. But Ali had

seen the thief. He and his wife took brooms and swept away

the footprints. Then he made crosses on every door at the street. When the forty thieves arrived they had their knives between their teeth. But they couldn't find either Ali – or the gold. And Ali and his wife lived happily ever after. Task Find the synonyms and antonyms of the words by choosing the words provided in the box. Copy the table in your workbook. a. day reek g. trickery b. reluctance h. descend c. honesty i. certainty d. paradise j. keep silent e. climb k. hell f. shout l. sunset

Word Synonym Antonym 1. Ascend ………….. …………. 2. Dawn ………….. …………. 3. Heaven ………….. …………. 4. Hesitation ………….. …………. 5. Call out ………….. …………. 6. Deception ………….. …………. Task Read and understand the following text.

Why Does the Cock Eat the Millipede?

Long ago the cock had a pair of beautiful horns on his head. But at that time there was a dragon who was prevented from ascending into heaven because he lacked a pair of horns. And so he offered the millipede as a guarantor, and borrowed the horns from the cock! When the millipede came for the horns, he said to the cock: "When you want your horns back, you must call out at dawn: 'Give me back my horns!' and they will be returned to you at once. You need have no occasion to be concerned in the least." The kind cock knew how difficult it was to ascend to heaven, so, reassured by the good security the millipede offered, he loaned his horns without hesitation, just twisting them right off his head. He also thought to himself that when the dragon returned form his visit to heaven, they could sit down and have a good conversation; he would ask the dragon to tell him how things were in heaven, and if it really was beautiful there, as he had always heard. If it was true, he might consider going there himself someday, he thought. So, next morning at daybreak (for the dragon's visit was scheduled to be brief), the cock called out loudly: "Give me back my horns!" But, even though he repeated this demand ten times over, there was no sign at all of either the dragon or the horns. Worried, the cock promptly went off to complain to the millipede, who soothed him, saying: "If the dragon has not returned the horns this morning, then he will certainly do so tomorrow. At the very latest, the day after that. Just learn to be a little patient and your horns will soon be back on your head, just as before." The cock did wait several days, but although he called out every morning at sunrise: "Give me back my horns!" They never did reappear. The cock was extremely annoyed at this deception and loss, as you can well imagine, therefore he ordered all the members of his family to eat millipedes on sight. Even so, the cock has not yet given up hope of getting his horns returned. He ordered his descendants always to call out at the break of day: "Give me back my horns!" He still hopes that the dragon may hear him!



Answer the questions 1. Why didn't the cock have horns on his head? 2. Why did the cock loan his horns without hesitation? 3. What was a pair of cock's beautiful horns asked for? 4. Why did the cock give his horns to the millipede? 5. What should the cock call out if he wanted the horns

back? 6. Did the cock stop hoping to get his horns back? 7. Were the horns returned to the cock? Task Analyze the following narrative text carefully. Determine the orientation, complication and resolution. Do it individually.

Miss Mole Catches a Ghost

Quite often Miss Mole would look after the young ones who lived in the woodland, when their parents went out in the evening. "I just love baby-sitting," sighed Miss Mole, as she gazed at the little animals, "you're all such darlings!" "But we're not babies," grumbled the field mice twins, "we're almost grown up!" "Well you'll always be babies to me," giggled Miss Mole, as she gave them all a great big hug. But one evening when Miss Mole was baby-sitting, something very strange happened ... All the little animals had walked over to Miss Mole's house just before dark.

They were laughing and joking and making lots of noise as they went along. All of a sudden one of the rabbits heard a strange sound. Then one or two of the little animals saw something move near the top of the trees. "What was that?" gasped a baby badger as he grabbed one of the squirrels. Then, as the wind rustled the leaves on the tree ... they all saw it ... as spooky white thing flying through the branches! "It's a ghost!" screamed a small hedgehog. And everyone ran as fast as they could and landed on a heap at Miss Mole's front door.

"Whatever is wrong?" cried Miss Mole as she opened her door, and in fell all the little animals. "We've seen a ghost!" sobbed the rabbit. "It's chased us all the way through the wood, and now it's up in that tree!" Miss Mole put on her extra strong glasses and took a good look. "Goodness me," she gasped, "there it is!" Right then and there, brave Miss Mole reached for her longest broom and pulled something out of the branches above. "Here's your ghost," laughed Miss Mole. "It's a plastic bag. I lost it on my way back from the woodland supermarket!" All the little animals breathed a big sigh of relief as Miss Mole took them inside and closed the door. "Gather round and I'll tell you a story," she said kindly. "As long as it's not a ghost story," whispered the baby badger.

Task Find the verbs in the form of the past tense in the following story.

Teddy Bear Time

When a visitor to Bear borough last year forgot

to put on her watch, she asked some local bears the time and she got some strange answers. "Half past three," the bear, who sells fruit and vegetables said, glancing up at the Town Hall clock.

"A quarter to nine," the bear in the bakery replied, looking at the clock high on the church. "Nine minutes after five," the bear who sells ice cream on the corner of the main street said, peering at the clock in front of the train station.

You have probably guessed that all the clocks in Bear borough were wrong. That was because old Mr. Minim, the only clock mender in town, had become a little shaky on his legs. Although fit "Excuse me, Jumble," said Mr. Minim, tapping him lightly on the toe with his walking stick. "Could you lift a grown-up bear, like me, for example?" In seconds, Mr. Minim found himself dangling above the crowd, yet he felt as safe as if he was standing on firm ground and well in every other way, he simply could not face climbing up a ladder to mend clocks high up.

As you can imagine, the clocks really were a problem. The trains were never on time, and the shopkeepers didn't know when to open their shops.

Then, one day, Bear borough had two very special visitors. They were bears called Alfred and his friend Jumble-who was an elephant! Now most bears in Bear borough had never seen an elephant before, so they all gathered round. And the elephant, pleased to show off his size and strength, wrapped his trunk around each of the little bears in turn and lifted them up high, squealing with excitement. And that is why, if you visit

Bear borough these days, all the clocks are exactly right, for Jumble visits every twelve months, and Mr Minim always says that's the highlight of his year! Task Read the following text.

The Jealous Crow

Far, far away there was a grove of shady mango

trees. On one of the green trees there lived a cuckoo and a crow. They were quite alike in appearance. Both the birds were black. Only the crow was a little bigger. The cuckoo would lay all her eggs in the crow's nest. For quite sometime they lived as good friends. The cuckoo had a sweet voice and often she would fill the grove with her sweet melody.

One day, a traveler passed by. Night fell and there was darkness all around. The traveler was tired. So he decided to spend the night under the huge mango tree on which the crow and the cuckoo lived.



The night was exceedingly pleasant. Full moon was shedding her lone luster in the sky. The eerie surrounding made the cuckoo feel supremely happy.

She kept singing the whole night long and the passerby was simply captivated by cuckoo's sweet song. Night passed. The day dawned. It was now the crow's turn to caw. His voice was so harsh to the ears that the traveler soon left the place. When the crow saw the traveler leave the place, in disgust he felt jealous of the sweet-voiced bird. When the cuckoo had gone away in search of food the crow went to the nest in desperation and breaking all the eggs, he threw them down.

The cuckoo, finding all her eggs smashed, was mad with grief. She went to the crow and said, "Oh brother, we had always lived like friends. What made you break all my eggs?"

"Well sister, as you sang, the unknown traveler stayed the whole night. When I started cawing he left the place. I felt insulted and broke all your eggs. Now let us both go to the traveler and ask him why he did so." So, both the birds flew and flew till they spotted the traveler. When the crow asked him, he replied, "I was carried away by the cuckoo's enchanting voice but your voice was intolerably harsh. So, I left the place. But both of you have been old friends, so you should always live in harmony. You should not feel jealous of your friend." These words of the passerby pacified both cuckoo and the crow. After that day they lived peacefully. The just and kind words of a traveler destroyed the ill feeling of jealousy in the crow just as a sprinkling of a little cold water settles the boiling milk. Find the synonyms or meanings of these words in dictionary. 1. Grove 2. Huge 3. Exceedingly 4. Shedding 5. Supremely 6. Captivated 7. Harsh 8. Grief 9. Enchanting 10. Pacified Task Find some moral values you get from the story above Task Write the main ideas of the following text.

The Magic Moneybag

Long ago there was a young couple who lived in a small thatched hut in a gully. They were so poor that every day they had to cut two bundles of firewood and carry them to market on their backs. One day, the young couple came back from the mountain carrying the firewood. They put one bundle in the courtyard and

planned to sell it at the market the next day to buy rice. The other bundle they kept in the kitchen for their own use. When they woke up the following morning, the bundle in the courtyard had mysteriously disappeared. There was nothing to do but to sell the bundle which they had kept for themselves.

That same day, they cut another two bundles of firewood as usual. They put one bundle in the courtyard for market and kept the other bundle for their own use. But the following morning, the bundle in the courtyard had vanished again. The same thing happened on the third and fourth day as well, and the husband began to think there was something strange going on. On the fifth day, he made a hollow in the bundle of firewood in the courtyard and hid himself inside it. From the outside it looked just the same as before. At midnight an enormous rope descended from the sky, attached

It self to the bundle and lifted it up the woodcutter was beside himself with joy, "I'd like that moneybag, the one full of precious things. Give me that round, bulging one." He chose the biggest one and took it down. Just at this moment, the white haired old man came in and, with a stern expression on his face, said to the young man, "You cannot take that one. I'll give you an empty one. Every day you can take one tail of silver out of it, and no more."

The woodcutter reluctantly agreed. He took the empty moneybag and, clinging onto the enormous rope, he was lowered to the ground. Once home, he gave the moneybag to his wife and told her the whole story. She was most excited. In the daytime they went as usual to cut firewood. But from then on, whenever they returned home after dark, they would close the door and open the moneybag. Instantly, a lump of silver would roll jingling out.

When they weighed it on the palm of their hand, they found it to be exactly one tail. Every day one tail of silver and no more came rolling out of the bag. The wife saved them up one by one. Time went slowly by. One day the husband suggested, "Let's buy an ox. "The wife didn't agree. A few days later, the husband suggested again, "How about buying a few acres of land?" His wife didn't agree with that either. A few more days elapsed, and the wife herself proposed, "Let's build a little thatched cottage."

The husband was itching to spend all the money they had saved and said, "Since we have so much money in hand, why don't we build a big brick house?" into the sky, with the woodcutter still inside it.

On his arrival in heaven, he saw a kindly looking, white-haired old man coming in his direction. The old man untied the bundle and when he found the man inside it, he asked, "Other people only cut one bundle of firewood a day. Why do you cut two?"

The woodcutter made a bow and replied, "We are penniless. That's why my wife and I cut two bundles of firewood a day. One bundle is for our own use and the other we carry to the market. With it we can buy rice to make porridge."



The old man chuckled and said to the woodcutter in a warm-hearted tone of voice, "I've known for a long time that you are a decent couple and lead a hardworking life. I shall give you a piece of treasure. Take it back with you and it will provide you with your livelihood."

As soon as he had finished speaking, there came seven fairies who led the young man into a magnificent palace. Its golden eaves and gleaming roof tiles shone so brightly that the moment he entered, he could no longer open his eyes. Inside the palace there were many kinds of rare objects on display that he had never seen before. Moneybags of all shapes and sizes hung in one room.

The fairies asked him, "Which one do you like best? Choose whichever you please, and take it home."

The wife could not dissuade her husband and reluctantly went along with his idea. The husband spent the money on bricks, tiles and timber and on hiring carpenters and masons. From that time on, neither of them went into the mountain to cut firewood any more. The day came when their pile of silver was almost exhausted, but the new house was still unfinished. It had long been in the back of the husband's mind to ask the moneybag to produce more silver. So without his wife's knowledge, he opened the bag for a second time that day. Instantly, another lump of snow white silver rolled jingling out of the bag onto the ground. He opened it a third time and received a third lump.

He thought to himself, "If I go on like this, I can get the house finished in no time!" He quite forgot the old man's warning. But when he opened the bag for the fourth time, it was absolutely empty.

This time not a scrap of silver came out of it. It was just an old cloth bag. When he turned to look at his unfinished brick house, that was gone as well. There before him was his old thatched hut. The woodcutter felt very sad. His wife came over and consoled him, "We can't depend on the magic moneybag from heaven. Let's go back to the mountain to cut firewood as we did before. That's a more dependable way of earning a living."

From that day on, the young couple once again went up to the mountain to cut firewood and led their old, hardworking life.

Answer the following questions. 1. How did the couple earn money? 2. Where did the bundle of firewood apparently

disappear? 3. Whom did the husband meet in heaven? 4. Which bag did the husband choose? 5. Why did the husband disagree to build a little

thatched cottage? 6. Why was the moneybag empty when the husband

opened the bag for the fourth time? 7. Can you describe the characteristics of the wife

and the husband? State the textual evidence to support your answer.

8. What are the moral values you get from the story?



UNIT 7 Reading

Spoof Social function : to share with others a real story of which the ending is funny to amuse the audience or readers. Generic structure: Orientation : the opening of the story which sets the

scene. Events : the details of the events in the story. Twist : the funny or unpredictable ending of

the story. Text

Horseman In The Sky

Carter Druse was born in Virginia. He was a southerner. When the United States was divided by a terrible civil war, Carter decided to join the Union Army of the north.

He told his father about his decision to join the north army. His father looked deep into his son's eyes. "Carter, No matter what happens, be sure you always do what you think is your duty."

One sunny afternoon, Carter was sent to guard. It was his duty to be sure that no enemy soldier spied on. Suddenly, he saw a man on horseback standing on the huge rocky cliff. He held a gun in his right hand, and the horse's reins in the other. Unavoidably, Carter pointed his gun. Carter was calm as he pulled the trigger. Questions 1. What is the text above? 2. Where did he was born? 3. What did the carter say to his father? 4. What did the carter see in one sunny morning? 5. What we learn from the story above? Read the following texts. Then answer the questions.

An 80-year-old man goes to a doctor for a checkup. The doctor is amazed at his shape. "To what do you attribute your remarkably good health?" "I am a turkey hunter and that's why I'm in good shape. Get up before daylight, chase turkeys up and down the mountains." The doctor says, "Well, I'm sure it helps, but there have to be genetic factors. How old was your dad when he died?" "Who says my dad's dead?" "You're 80 years old and your dad's alive? How old is he?" "Dad's 100. In fact, he turkey hunted with me this morning." "What about your dad's dad – how old was he when he died?" "Who says my granddad's dead?" "You're 80 years old and your grandfather's still living? How old is he?" "118." "I suppose you're going to tell me he went turkey hunting this morning?" "No. He got married." The doctor looks at the man in amazement. "Got married?

Why would a 118-year-old guy want to get married?" The old-timer answers, "Who says he wanted to?" Questions 1. What does the old man go to the doctor for? 2. Why is the old man in good shape? 3. Is the health of the old man's dad still in good

condition? How do you know? 4. What does the word it in the clause "I am sure it

helps" refer to? 5. What is the meaning of the sentence "Who says he

wanted to?"? 6. Do you think that the old man is telling a lie? Task We brought our newborn son, Adam, to the pediatrician for his first check up. As he finished, the doctor told us, "You have a cute baby." Smiling, I said, "I bet you say that to all new parents." "No," he replied, "Just to those whose babies really are good-looking." "So what do you say to the others?" I asked. "He looks just like you." Questions 1. What was the baby taken to the pediatrician for? 2. Was the baby the first child of the family? 3. Was the baby really cute? 4. Did the pediatrician tell the truth about the baby? 5. What did the pediatrician mean by saying "He looks

just like you." to the new parents? Task Read the following text carefully.

Because my husband, John, tends to snore, I rarely get more than a couple of hours sleep each night. When he awakens refreshed in the morning, he's always astonished to find that he has been the cause of another sleepless night for me. One night John had severe allergy symptoms, so he took some medication before he went to bed. To my surprise, he fell into a deep sleep, allowing me to nod off comfortably too. I awoke to find him shaking me. "What's the matter?" I asked, trying not to sound irritable. "Are you in pain?" "No," he said, "but the drugs have worn off, and I can't sleep." I stared at him in exhausted disbelief. "What do you want me to do about it?" I said through clenched teeth. "Oh, nothing," he replied. "I just wanted you to know." Answer the following questions. 1. Why is the wife not able to sleep more than two

hours every day? 2. What is the meaning of sleepless? 3. Who is I in the text? 4. What does he in line 3 refer to?



5. Is John really sick? 6. What did John take before he slept? 7. What happened after he took medicine? 8. Why did John wake up his wife? 9. Was his wife annoyed by him? 10. How did John answer his wife's question? Task Read the following spoof text and then determine the orientation, events and twist.

On a recent vacation at a resort with my in-laws, we planned to spend an afternoon at the pool with our kids. We wanted to bring our own drinks, but were unsure of the hotel's policy. My brother-in-law called the front desk, and assuming everyone was familiar with the brand of ice chest he had, asked if it was all right if he brought a Playmate to the pool. After a pause the clerk asked, "Does she have her own towel?". Task Answer the following questions based on the text 1. Who writes the text? 2. Where did the story take place? 3. When did the writer spend their holiday? 4. Where did the writer and their children spend their

afternoon? 5. What was "Playmate" meant by the brother-in-law? 6. Why did the clerk ask the writer's brother "Does she

have her own towel"? 7. What is the funny thing of the story? Task Here are four kinds of text and their names. Match the words provided in the box to the following texts. a. news item b. report c. descriptive d. spoof Text 1 The police are looking for a woman who stole a diamond necklace from Dayton's jewellery store. According to the store manager, the woman is approximately five feet tall, very thin, light-skinned, and about 60 years old. She has short, straight grey hair and, wears glasses. Her most distinguishing mark is the dimple in her chin. When she was last seen, she was wearing heavy blue eye make-up and large, silver hoop earrings. She had on a short black coat and black pants. Text 2 Our English professor handed out the mid-term quiz. The task was to identify several passages extracted from material we had studied and name the respective authors. However, it is unclear where the answers were to be written. One student raised his hand and asked for clarification on this point. So the professor asked the entire class, "Where would you like the answers to be

written?" The reply from one student was immediate: "How about on the board?" Text 3 The blue whale may be the largest animal that ever lived. But it is no match for humans. Tens of thousands of blue whales were killed in the early 1900's. They are now protected, and there are about 5,000 of them in the world. These fussy eaters feed mainly on tiny shrimp-like creatures called krill, which they find in their summer homes near the North and South Poles. They eat about four tons of food a day. When winter sets in, the whales head for warmer water, and go on a diet. That is also the time when they mate. Text 4

Pssst! Want to Buy a Fake Ferrari? ROME: Italians are used to buying bogus Gucci bags or Rolex watches to look stylish but police found a new height of craftsmanship and cunning when they broke up a ring selling fake Ferrari cars for a fraction of the real price. Police accused 15 people of building the blood red sports cars and selling them to car fanatics on a budget, most of whom knew they were buying a counterfeit classic. Car body workers who police called "very able" cobbled together mostly fakes parts and a few original components. They used body parts from other makes of automobiles, such as chassis, roofs, hoods, trunks and doors. The body parts were modified to look like Ferrari classics such as the 328 Gtb, which went out of production in the late 1980s. Some of the cars sold for about 20,000 euros, about a tenth of the going price for some versions. Task Work in pairs; try to analysis the structure of this spoof text. We were listening to a lecture on psychic phenomena in our Comparative Religions course. Our instructor told us about a woman who contacted police working on a missing person’s case. "She gave them eerily detailed instructions on where to find the body," the instructor said. "In fact, the detectives did find the body just as she pondered the question; a sheriff's officer taking the class raised his hand and replied, "A suspect." had described. Now, what would you call this type of person?" While the rest of us.



UNIT 9 Expressing of fulfilling request • Yes, of course. • By all means. • Yes, why not.... • Sure, you can.... Expression of relive • It’s a relief to know that.... • Thank God for.... • I’m glad it was done. • Thank goodness! Expression of pain • I am suffering from a relapse. • I have toothache. • I feel sick / I feel ill. • I’m sick. • Ouch! Expression of pleasure • It is really delightful./I am delighted. • It’s really a great pleasure. • I am pleased. • That’s great. • That’s wonderful. Task 1 Complete the following dialogue using expressions provided in the box and act it out. a. By all means b. I am glad it was done c. Don't mention it d. We are excited e. I had a gastric problem f. I am happy you made a quick recovery g. It's a relief to hear that h. That's wonderful i. I am suffering from a relapse j. That's great Mrs. Dewi and Mr. Adi are visiting Mrs. Rosma at the hospital. Here is the conversation. Mrs. Dewi : Hi, how are you today? Mrs. Rosma : I am better now. Mrs. Dewi : 1 ……………….. Mrs. Rosma : Thank you for coming. Who did you

come here with? Mrs. Dewi : Mr. Adi. There he is. Mrs. Rosma : Hi, Mr. Adi. Mr. Adi : Hi, 2 …………………… Mrs. Rosma : Thanks a lot for coming. But could

you give my regards to your friends. Tell them that I'll get better soon.

Mr. Adi : 3 ………………… I'll do it. Mrs. Rosma, our friends actually want to see you but they are very busy.

Mrs. Rosma : Oh, I see. Never mind. By the way, is Mrs. Neni already got better?

Mrs. Dewi : Yes, she has joined with us. Mrs. Rosma : Err. 4 ……………… She is fine. Mrs. Dewi : Mrs. Rosma, I actually want to know

what you suffer from? Mrs. Rosma : 5 ……………. Because I ate hot

food. Mrs. Dewi : So, 6 …………………….. Mrs. Rosma : That's right. How about you, Mr.

Adi? Mr. Adi : I didn't get sick anymore after

stopping drinking ice and eating hot food.

Mrs. Rosma : 7 ……………….. Okay. I'll do what you have done.

Mrs. Dewi : Err ... excuse me. Here is something from our friends.

Mrs. Rosma : Thank you so much. Mrs. Dewi : 8 ……………………….. Mr. Adi : Mrs. Rosma, let me tell you that our

school is the best in our region. Mrs. Rosma : 9 …………………………. So, what we have done is not

useless, is it? Mr. Adi : Sure. Now,

10…………………………….. because we can see you are well.

Mrs. Dewi : Hmm..., I think you need more rest, so let me return home. What about you Mr. Adi?

Mr. Adi : I do too. See you again, Mrs. Rosma. Mrs. Rosma : Thank you. See you again. Task Read the following dialogues and then answer the questions. Dialogue 1 Krisna : Mom, may I ask you something? Mother : Yes, of course. What's wrong with you? Krisna : I need a lot of money to buy a text book. Mother : Okay. I'll give it to you if it is important

for you. Krisna : Thank you, Mom. 1. Does Krishna’s mother fulfill Krishna’s request?

How do you know? 2. Why does mother not refuse Krishna’s request? Dialogue 2 Yenny : Den, you look pale today. What's wrong

with you? Denni : I am suffering from a relapse. Yenny : What do you suffer from? Denni : I've had diarrhea since last night. I

couldn't sleep well. Yenny : I'm sorry to hear that. 1. Why did Denni look pale? 2. What did Yenny say when she heard that Denni had

diarrhea?



UNIT 10 Hortatory Exposition

Hortatory Exposition Social function: to persuade the reader or listener that Something should or should not be the case. Generic structure: Thesis : announcement of issue concern Argument: reasons for concern, leading to recommendation Recommendation: statement of what ought to or ought not to happen Task Read the following text.

Helping Children Discover Their Own Identity

Children of today's advanced world are different from those in the past. With easy access to modern technology, children of today are able to learn everything they encounter in their life, including world-class information. In terms of knowledge of the world, one must admit, they seem to surpass children brought up in the era when techno logical equipment was still traditional. The rapid growth of children's cognitive, physical and social adaptations is an indication of how they can be easily shaped by the modern vicinity.

This is a critical period when children are beginning to try to discover their own true identity. Parental guidance is necessary to assist them in leading to the correct path. To do this, intervention, however, is not always mandatory if parents are upbeat that their offspring can handle the conundrum they are facing on their own. Self-reliance, in any occasion, needs to be stressed. What parents need to do is to respect the changes going on within their child's world, and respond appropriately to their changing needs. Here a close monitoring rather than control taking is essential.

This may sound like ideal advice; yet not all parents may agree with this. A parent who was raised in a democratic family atmosphere will certainly pass down the freedom he/she had enjoyed during childhood to his / her offspring. On the other hand, those who were brought up in a conservative and authoritative family will inculcate traditional values to their children, restricting them by tightly abiding to what the parents believe to be the correct norms. Clearly, a parent's family back-ground will, exert a considerable influence in helping his/her children to learn both formally and informally. It is more likely that parents will consistently follow the mind-set they adopted from their father or mother if they think that it is beneficial. Today's parents, how ever, need to be aware that not all values and norms that their parents implanted in them during their childhood are compatible with modern reality.

Things have changed consider ably, and parents should take this into account. It might, for example, be

felt less relevant to impose traditional control over their children's conduct about what they need to do to attain academic achievement. However, most parents still cling to this, acting as if they are omni science and know perfectly what is best for their children. In guiding children in search of true identity, it is important for today's parents to listen and accommodate all feedback from their children.

Though it seems too difficult for some conservative parents to implement this, it is essential to a child's development into an emotionally mature adult. Parents also should not exercise too much authority so as to overprotect their children to develop their potential to the fullest. Parental intervention, if it is done in an improper manner, can do more harm than good. If not in accord with children's interests, parents' excessive intervention is seen by children as something that inhibits rather than facilitates their academic excursions. Parents may probably not realize that their children simply want them to stay in the background and to provide whatever support and resources they need to venture out into the world.

This does not imply that intervention is not necessary. At the very young age when the influence of a peer group is extremely powerful, parents need to intervene by setting a strong measure to help their children resist the pressure to behave in ways that do not meet family standards. The best way parents can aid their children is by successfully discovering their true identity and growing up to be an emotionally mature adult is to take a flexible approach. Parents need not always rigidly follow and impose certain norms and values, which are imbued with their family tradition during their childhood, on their children. Understanding children from the way they see the reality is surely a far more rewarding experience.

Answer these questions based on the text. 1. What is the issue of the text? 2. What is the writer's recommendation for the parents? 3. What are the writer's views on parental guidance for

children? 4. What tenses mostly use in the text above? 5. What does the word they in las paragraph and the

last sentence? Task

Parents Need to Analyze International Schools

What impressed me about my friends was their determination for their children to have, what they described as, "the best possible education that will give them good prospects for their future careers". What seemed sad and disappointing was that they had concluded that this "best possible education" could not be accommodated and provided by the Indonesian



schooling system. It is quite amazing how many international schools are available in Jakarta now. With recent terrorist attacks and threats on Jakarta, many in the expatriate community have in fact been leaving Indonesia and yet there are still many inter national schools that, one would have assumed, are designated and targeted more exclusively to serve the expatriate community. But times have changed and international schools are no longer there to exclusively serve the international community. More and more Indonesians are choosing international schools for their children's education. But, of course, these are the relative few in Indonesia today because after all international schools do not come cheap. My friend ultimately settled on an international school with a more fully developed campus site and a depth of curriculum and teaching staff that impressed them. Of course, this was an even more expensive proposition for them but they are fortunate to be able to afford the extra expense and of course look to it as a way of setting their minds at ease that they have made the right choice.

This, though, is the key conundrum for any and all parents. What is really the right choice of school for our children? In some quarters, mainly in the worlds of sales and commerce, the phrase "reassuringly expensive" is used to express the idea that the more you pay, the more likely you are to get something good. Sometimes parents have the attitude that the school knows best and so they practically handover their child and the child's education to the school and the school system.

This is not right though because so much of a child's education is naturally, or really should However, no matter what school a parent chooses to send his or her children to, care needs to be taken to assess the type and quality of education that is being offered.

When it comes to international schools this is probably doubly important because there is a great expense that can be incurred to parents who are choosing an "international" education for their child. But we should take care when we think or hear of that "international" label. Many parents quickly and easily enter into the belief that the label "international" is an instant ticket to quality education and better and international education in the future at the ages of college life. But this is not always the case.

There are many "international" institutes and educators highly capable as providers of what might be considered a superior education. But at the same time there are those institutes that do not necessarily live up to such standards and they offer an educational "service" that is neither worthy of the nametag "international" or the accompanying higher, if not extortionate, school fees. Be, evolving from the home.

Parents that just handover the educational responsibility to the school are really failing. But also they may be failing and blinding themselves to the reality of what is really happening in school. International schools offer an option for education for the

more financially secure of Jakarta. But the "international" labeling of a school should not blind the parents and reduce their analysis of what they are paying for. For the greater part better quality education should be at hand but only scrutiny and continuous checking will guarantee this.

People have obviously been very frustrated with the state of education in Jakarta and beyond and so this has led to a greater consideration of an international setting for children's education. But that setting should not be accepted on face value alone; the customer must check and the buyer must beware.

Read the text again. Then answer these questions. 1. Does the writer's friend think much about her

children's education? 2. What made the writer impressed with his/her friend? 3. And what makes the writer sad and disappointed? 4. Are there many international schools in Jakarta? 5. Who is the target of international school firstly? 6. Do international schools charge high fees? 7. Is it easy to find a quality international school

according to the text? 8. What is the meaning of the phrase "reassuringly

expensive"? 9. What should parents consider when choosing an

international school for their children? 10. Where should education naturally evolve? In pairs, find what the following words refer to. 1. they (paragraph 1, line 3) 2. it (paragraph 4) 3. we (paragraph 5) 4. this (paragraph 5) 5. them (paragraph 6) Task Answer the questions by choosing the best answer. Students' First Days in

School Need to Be Made Constructive

In the past days and weeks schools across Indonesia have been opening up their doors again to receive students entering the new school year. Naturally enough, this has been a time of many trials and tribulations as existing students join new classrooms and new students try to find their way around a new school.

Such times would be difficult enough for even adults. In adult life we need time to adapt to new settings and find our footing and direction to settle in and come to terms with what lies ahead. This kind of experience, difficult enough in adulthood, can prove extremely challenging for the, as yet, still young and forming hearts and minds of school-age children.

During the first days back at school great opportunities exist to try to develop a sense of community that will help students settle in and have a firm foundation on which to build their studies during



the coming year. There are almost constant complaints that there is too much to study for school students and yet time is, every year, wasted on negative and useless orientation day pranks and fooling around. Surely, when time pressures are of such a concern and teachers complain that they have too much to teach from the curriculum, the first days of school would be a great time to help students prepare for the challenges ahead. Constructive teambuilding and guidance towards much needed study skills would serve these students far better than nonsense tasks and ridicule.

Schools should design these days carefully and not let them be so negligently and dangerously wasted. The benefits of good early learning experiences can be considerable and the duty that schools should exercise to consider a child's psychological welfare really have to leave little room in the first days of school for such waste and ridiculousness. 1. The main idea of paragraph 3 is……………. a. The needs of constructive teambuilding and

guidance. b. Complaint of the use of time officer days. c. Teachers' complaint. d. Pressure of time. 2. The word in paragraph 3 which has the meaning

mischievous trick is . a. complaint b. orientation c. pressure d. prang 3. The synonyms of the word settle (paragraph 3) are

as follows, except a. inhabit b. steady c. reside d. set. 4. Which of these statements is not true according to

the text? a. First day is the time for trials and tribulation. b. Schools all over Indonesia had opened

registration many days before the first day. c. A sense of community can be developed during

the first days back to school. d. Constructive team-building and guidance for

students are better than meaningless tasks and ridicule.

Online job

Online jobs are selected in part-time employment for many, and some have taken more seriously. A growing number of people are willing to take a job online. Working online has its advantages if we manage effectively. Why not?

It offers flexibility and convenience that no other job can give. We can work from home with minimal investment and get a good income. The idea of adding weight to our pocket and makes life easier and comfortable is the most reassuring.

The reason behind this great opportunity is that every day there are new companies to join. Every day and every minute men are seeking information about everything under the sky of the Internet.

As we know, the Internet is the answer to every question, web sites need to update each section and also add reports on developments that have recently joined. Therefore, it is an expansive space for articles.

There are a number of jobs we can work online. Some of them which strongly recommended are writing, marketing, stock trading, and online education. However we should be very careful because scamming opportunities are always there. Questions 1. What is the text above? 2. What is the purpose of the text above? 3. What is the schematic structure of the text above? 4. What tenses mostly use in the text above! 5. What is the main idea of paragraph 1! 6. According to the text what is Internet! 7. What is the advantage of online job! Task

Let's Make Campaign Of Reading

Reading habit is poor among Indonesians because most people haven’t realized the importance of reading. Reading is important to transform knowledge and technology. By reading, one knows the world. He or she will understand what he doesn’t see by himself or herself. The lines of the paragraphs in an article contain pieces of knowledge. The knowledge is needed to improve the quality of human’s life. Technology transformation from other country can only be done by reading a lot various sources of literature.

Valuable books in libraries and bookstores mean nothing if they are not read. Realizing the importance of reading will make someone motivated to read. When we know that something is very important because it can give us valuable information, we will try to get or do the thing. For example, a businessman who always follows latest information or news, will know what to do in his/ her business. He will make a good decision to make a transaction. Most people in all developed countries have realized the importance or reading and they have good reading habits. In bus and



train stations, vehicles, waiting rooms, parks, people like reading.

They enjoy reading which gives them valuable knowledge and inspiration. A good understanding toward the importance of reading can be achieved by well organized and effective campaign. To plant an understanding in a generation’s minds is not an easy job. It needs a hard work from all components of the nation, especially the government. A serious campaign which is organized by the central and local government can help common people wake up and stand to face the real competition.

The campaign can be done through various kinds of mass media such as TV, radio, booklets, bulletins, newspapers, magazines. It can also be conducted by teachers, parents and all people who care. Therefore, a nation-wide effective campaign of the importance of reading by all components of the nation should be done, facilitated by the government, to face the tighter competition. The world has forced globalization. Those people with little knowledge will be left behind. To speed up the better change in this country, a good reading habit is really important. 1. What is the text above! 2. Why reading habit is poor among Indonesian? 3. What is the advantage for reading habit? 4. What is the knowledge? 5. What is the conclusion of the text above! Task

Watch your Kids While Watching TV

Television becomes one of the most important devices which takes place in almost houses. It can unite all members of the family as well as separate them. However, is it important to know what your kids are watching? The answer is, of course, absolutely "Yes" and that should be done by all parents. Television can expose things you have tried to protect the children from, especially violence, pornography, consumerism and so on.

Recently, a study demonstrated that spending too much time on watching TV during the day or at bedtime often cause bed-time disruption, stress, and short sleep duration.

Another research found that there is a significant relationship between the amount of time spent for watching television during adolescence and early adulthood, and the possibility of being aggressive.

Meanwhile, many studies have identified a relationship between kids who watch TV a lot and being inactive and overweight.

Considering some facts mentioning above, protect your children with the following tips: • Limit television viewing to one-two hours each day • Do not allow your children to have a TV set in their

own bedrooms

• Review the rating of TV shows which your children watch

• Watch television with your children and discuss what is happening in the show

Questions 1. What is the text above! 2. What is the main idea of 1paragraph? 3. How is the advantages watching television for kids? 4. Mention some kinds of tip, how to protect our

childrenwith the following tips! 5. What is the word it the 1 paragraph refer to……….

More dust bins is cleaner

To improve comfort and cleanliness at the

school, there should be an increasing number of dust bins.

When we look at classroom, school corridors and schoolyard, there papers, mineral water cops, straws, and napkin everywhere. The condition of unseemliness really hinders learning and teaching environment. They can be filled out with water coming from the rain. This can be placed for mosquito to spread out.

Anyway I notice that most of the students have responsibilities for their school environment. They put their litter on the proper place but some of them are not diligent enough to find the dust bins. The numbers of the dust bins in the school are not enough. More dust bins should be put beside each step, outside of the classrooms and some along of the corridors. Probably one dust bin should be in every ten meters. So when students want to throw away their litters, they can find the dust bins easily.

When school is equipped with sufficient dust bins, students do not have problem of discomfort any more. So provide more dust bins and school will be very clean and become a very nice place to study. Questions 1. What is the text about? 2. Does one dustbin enough for big school? 3. How was that one dustbin not enough for big

school? 4. What is the conclusion of the text above? 5. Write Indonesia meaning and memorizing: a. comfort b .napkin c .environment d. sufficient



Gesang should hold a national hero status

"Those who don't learn from history are condemed to repeat it" and "A great nation is one which fully appreciates its heroes." say popular English aphorism and national adage. Then, proposing an important person who has taken a role in our nation history is important. I think Gesang should be a national hero. Who have never heard Bengawan Solo song? I doubt it if there is. This keroncong song has been a part of national voices. Gesang is a senior composer whose songs gained fame all the way to Japan. He has received a number of awards in art and everyone will admit that his art talent was dedicated to this nation.

Government has declared the other great composer; WR. Suratman and Ismail Marzuki as national Heroes. Gesang might not be compared to others, but in my opinion, Gesang is as great as them. All of them are maestros. Due to his keroncong music maestro, Gesang has taken a role in building our national identity.

It is obvious that government should name Gesang National Hero. We should not delay and wait for, in case, our neighbor countries or other international communities go a head to recognize him and grant an award for what he deserves. Questions 1. What is the text above? 2. What is the main idea of the text above? 3. Who is Gesang? 4. Who is the other great composer beside Gesang? 5. What is the word him refer to( last paragraph)



Soal Latihan 1 Text 1 Read this text, then answer questions 1 to 5. Yesterday Irfan went to Lampung. He wanted to visit his sister. On the ferry he met Mr. Lukman who used to be a captain of the ship. He used the chance to know more about a ship and its captain, here is their conversation. Irfan : Could you tell me a bit about the

captain’s job ? Mr. Lukman : The captain is in command of the ship,

and he is responsible for every one on board. On the ship’s bridge he talks in to a speaking tuber or a microphone to give orders to his men, such as deck officers and the chief engineer. Deck officers take turns standing on the ship’s bridge. From the bridge they steer the ship, watch the sea. They also check instruments and chart.

Irfan : And how docs a ship leave the harbour ?

Mr. Lukman : A boat called tug boat pulls the ship from the shore to the open sea. After that the captain orders : full speed a head. In the engine room the chief engineer and his men speed up the engines. They make sure that the engine work right.

Irfan : And how to know information ? Mr. Lukman : There are radio men in the ship. They

keep in touch with people on land by sending and receiving messages. There are also telephone operators. They take care of telephone calls from cabin to cabin on the ship. The operators can connect calls from the ship to for away parts of the world.

1. Who did Irfan talk with on the ferry ? a. an ex-captain of the ship b. the captain of the ship c. the captain of the ferry d. the deck officers e. the radio men 2. The deck officers do the following things, except

….. a. watching the sea and the sky b. checking the instrument c. checking the chart d. pulling the ship away e. steering the ship

3. “Full speed ahead”, is the captain’s order directed to …..

a. his chief engineers b. his deck officers c. his operators d. his tug boats 4. Which is not true according to the text ? a. certain passangers may steer the ship b. deck officers take turn watching the ship c. the chief engineer speed up the engines d. telephone operators can connect calls from parts

of the world e. people on the ship can municate with people on

land 5. The text shows us that Irfan ….. a. is interested in ship b. wants to be a captain c. knows Mr. Lukman before d. has known very much about ship e. fell boring during his traveling Text 2 This text is for questions 6 to 12. Once up on a time, the is reclites were at war with the philistines. The leader of the philistines was a giant named goliath, who was three metres tall. A spear was slong across his shoulders and a heavy sword hung from a belt around his waist. Goliath challenged the israclites to send a leader to fight with him. “if he can kill me, we shall be your slaves,” he boasted. “But if I kill him, then you shald be our slaves.” No one except a young shepherd boy dared volunteer to fight goliath. The shepherd boy’s name was David. He was armed with only a shing. When goliath saw David, he laughed, “what?”are you the only one they can send to fight with me ? why, I will tear you apart and feed you the birds ! “Then he charged at David with his sword. Calmly, David took a stone, put it on his hing and took careful ain at the giant’s eyes. The stone struck goliath and he fell to the ground. David freed his people from the terror of goliath. 7. What is the writer’s purpose of writing this kind

of text ? To ….. a. entertain the readers b. tell a story of giant c. inform an event in the past d. tell the terror of the leader of the philistines e. report the war between the is raclites and

philistine



8. What is the type of the text ? a. report b. narrative c. description d. procedure e. recount 9. Who dared to fight the leader of the philistines ? a. a giant b. goliath c. David d. a have e. people 10. What did David use to defeat the leader of the

philistines ? a. a spear b. a sward c. a shing d. a stone e. a belt 11. “But if I kill him, then you shall be our slaves.”

The word “you” refers to ….. a. David b. the volunteers c. the philistines d. the Israelites e. a shepperd boy 12. “David took goliath’s sword and slew him with

it.” Slew means ….. a. cut b. tore c. struct d. fought e. killed Text 3 This text is for questions 13 to 17. Flowers are the parts of a seed plant that contain the organs concerned with sexual reproduction, including ovary and stamens. These reproduction structures are usually associated with sterile outher structures that protect them and attact insects or birds who help the process of fertilization. Some flowers have special scents which can attract insects to come. Flowers basically have four parts : petals, sepals, stamens and pistils. Most petals are in bright colour, or sometimes green, as green as sepals. Stamens are the male reproductive organs, which arise within the petals. They vary in number, from one to hundreds per flower. Pistils are the female organs of reproduction, they vary in structures.

13. What is the function of sterile outher structures ? a. they have special scents b. they attract insencts or birds c. they protect ovary and staments d. they contain sexual-reproduction e. they help the process of fertilization 14. What are the male organs of refroduction ….. a. petals b. sepals c. pistils d. staments e. ovary 15. Why do sterile outer structures attract insect or

bird ? To ….. a. protect them b. vary in structures c. give their scent d. help the process of fertilization e. provide some plowers with special 16. What is the aim of the text a bove ? To ….. a. give information about plowers b. explain the pracess of pertilization c. describe the parts of a seed plant d. expose the reproduction structures of plowers e. report how plowers attract insects or birds 17. What is meant by the female reproductive organs

? a. petals b. sepals c. staments d. seeds e. pistils Text 4 Read this text carefully. This text is for questions 18 to 24. Blaksands is a large seaside town. Half of the town lies to the morth of the river black and the other half lies to the south. It is only a few kilometres to the nearest highway and just ten minutes drive from the city of harstone. Situated near the beach are lots of brightly painted hotels, some of them are very old. Many big name department stores, as well smaller shops that sell souvenirs and gifts, are found on the main street just out side the town ceilre. The heart of town is accupied by older houses and many histoucal buildings. In recent years, some new housing estates have been develoved to the south of the town. These are lats of things to do at black sould. There is a harbour with boats for fishing and cruises. There are two beaches which are popular for various wiler events and whole year round swimming. A cinema, a swimming pool, a bowling alley as well as a fairground are located



withim the cown. Two parks and several playgrounds are also easily accessible from the cown centre and outlying housing estates. 18. What is the type of the text ? a. recount b. narrative c. descriptive d. news item e. analytical exposition 19. What is the text about ? a. department stores b. river black c. the city of harstone d. blacksands e. harbours 20. What does paragraph 3 mainly describe ? a. fishing b. cruises c. activities d. bowling e. swimming 21. What can be found on the main street just outside

the town centre ? a. smaller shops that sell souvenirs and gifts b. many big name department stores c. rots of brightly painted hotels d. many historical buildings e. some new housing estates 22. What are close to the beach ? a. bright hotels b. bowling alleys c. swimming pools d. department stores e. historical buildings 23. Which of the following is TRUE according to the

text ? a. blacksands is a big town b. souvenirs can be bought in suburbs c. hotel near the beach are painted black d. tourists can only swim in the beach during

summer e. it takes more than ten minutes to drive from

harstone to blacksands 24. “Two parks and several playgrounds are also

easily accessible from the town centre and ….. ( P3 ). “accessible” can be replaced by …..

a. seen b. shown c. identipied d. entered e. presented

Text 5 Read this taxt carefully and complete it using the sintable words Irrigation is any activity which (25) ….. to the efforts to obtain water for the farm land. For this purpose people may (26) ….. reservoir or a man made lake, use water pump and build dams and ditches. The ditches (27) ….. to lead water from the resources to the farm land and drain off the excess water which is not (28) ….. by the crop. 25. a. relate b. relates c. related d. relating e. is related 26. a. make b. makes c. made d. making e. be made 27. a. use b. uses c. using d. is used e. are used 28. a. use b. used c. uses d. using e. to use Text 6 This text is for question 29 to complete the letter with suitable words ! Tuesday evening March 8, 2008 Dear Olga, It is a (29) ….. to read your letter and to know about the music program at your university. I’ll be (30) ….. to go with you. My bus (31) ….. be at your school at 4 o’clock on Saturday. If you don’t mind, I’d like you ….. me at the bus station. See you on Saturday. Maritha 29. a. happy b. regret c. nice d. pleasure e. pleased



30. a. sad b. sorry c. happy d. happily e. worred 31. a. can b. will c. should d. must 32. a. met b. meet c. meets d. meeting e. to meet 33. Dicky : may I can to your house at 7 tonight ? Anne : ….. I will be going somewhere with my

friend at that time. a. yes, that’s all right b. yes, indeed c. l’m afraid not d. not at all e. why not

34. Lisa : Do you mind turning on the fan for

me ? Mita : ………………….. a. no, thank you b. yes, I do c. l’d love to d. not at all e. yes, please 35. Rudi : Do you think it is wrong to hunt

animals for sport, Ben ? Beni : I ….. strongly. Besides it’s cruel, it

will make them vanished. Rudi : I think you are right, Beni. a. agree b. disagree c. don’t agree d. don’t think so

e. am afraid it’s wrong 36. If you want to see me tomorrow, don’t come at 10

o’clock. I ….. at that time. a. teach b. tought c. will teach d. would teach e. will be teaching

37. Yoyo : What would you do if you got Rp. 1000.000 ? Diky : I ….. a bicycle. a. bought b. will buy c. had bought d. would buy e. would have bought 38. Lina : which one is your mother ? Tata : the woman ….. the red hot over there is my

mother. a. in b. with c. use d. wear e. by 39. “where are you going ?” He asked me where ….. a. I am going b. I was going c. Am I going d. was I going e. you are going 40. The parents ask their doughter ….. her marriage. a. delay b. delays c. delayed d. to delay e. will delay 41. The furnisure ….. when we arrived. a. sold b. is sold c. is being sold d. had been sold e. has been sold 42. Mr. Billy was ….. that he forgot his lunch. a. busy b. so busy c. too busy d. such busy e. enough busy 43. Mr. Maman said, “my aunt was seriously ill.” Mr. Maman said that his aunt ….. a. was seriously ill b. is seriously ill c. would be seriously ill d. to be seriously ill e. had been seriously ill



44. The Indonesian independence ….. by president Soekarno on August 17, 1945.

a. proclains b. proclained c. is praclained d. is praclaining e. was praclained 45. Intan : SMA 77 obliges its students to wear

Moslem dress every Friday. Joko : I’ll go along with that The underlined sentence expresses ….. a. denial b. warning

c. pleasure d. certainly e. agreement 46. Adi : Sony, let’s go to Lina’s party. Sony : if I had time, I would go there. From the dialogue we know that ….. a. Sony goes to Lina’s party b. Adi goes to Lona’s party c. Sony doesn’t go to Lina’s party d. Sony came to Lina’s party e. Sony will come to Lina’s party 47. Nadia : when did you get this cassette ? Lia : yesterday. When I ….. home, a boy

asked me to give it to you. a. walk b. walked c. walking d. was walking e. has been walking 48. Choose the most normal position order of the

adjectives to complete the sentence below. “mather bought a set of ………furnisure. a. wooden – Jepara – beautiful – carving b. beautiful – carving – wooden – Jepara c. carving – beautiful – Jepara – wooden d. beautiful – wooden – carving – Jepara e. beautiful – Jepara – carving – wooden 49. If a person want to ….. in running a business, he

must have the full support of his employees. a. success b. succedd c. successful d. succeeded e. successfully

50. Rani : ma’am, excuseme …… you. Mrs. Nadia : it’s ok. What is it ? a. for interrupting b. to interrupt c. interrupting d. interrupted e. interrupt



Latihan Soal 2 Read the following information carefully!

Every year thousands of people die, due to

wheather related problems. This has been a particular problem in Europe over the last few years. It can happen in both winter and in summer. Let’s examine the causes for a moment.

The year 2003 was a time of extreme cold in the winter. Extreme, that is by European standards. In Britain alone, the number of people who died from cold-related illnesses was described as ‘shameful’. Nearly twenty-five thousand people died from illnesses such as strokes, heart attacks, bronchitis, flu and pneumonia. Each of these deaths were though to have been caused by the cold weather. A campaign called ‘The cold can kill’ was launched to give people advice on how to survive the effects of t he cold wheather and freezing temperatures.

In the summer of t he same year, around twenty-three thousand people died in Europe due to the sizzling temperatures. France was particulary badly hit, with nearly fifteen thousand death which were related to the sweltering heat. In Britain, the number of heat-related death was much lower than the number of winter deaths. Even so, with temperatures reaching 38oC, the government issued advice to people on how to protect their health. This advice warned that it only took two consecituve days of high temperatures to have significant effects on people’s health. It said that people who became overheated and dehydrated ran the risk of irreversible damage to the body or even death.

(Adapted from [email protected]) 1. What is the type of the text?

a. Report b. Narration c. Exposition d. Description e. News item

2. What is the organization of the text? a. Orientation-events-evaluation b. Orientation-complication-resolution c. Thesis-arguments-reiteration d. Thesis-events-complication- resolution e. Abstract- orientation-events- resolution

3. What is the communicative purpose of the text? a. To persuade the readers to do something b. To tell the readers about certain events c. To inform the readers about the danger of cold d. To share an amusing incident with the readers e. To state a point of view or arguments about the

problems caused by the weather

4. The text mainly discussed about___ . a. the effects of cold weather b. cold weather causes many illnesses c. people died due to the cold weather d. the problems arouse during cold weather time e. the Europeans against the cold weather

5. From the text above we can infer that the number of people died due to the weather in Europe is___ than that of in the France. a. lower b. higher c. the same d. fewer e. less

6. “Every year thousands of people die, due to wheather related problems” From the sentence above we can conclude that___ a. weather can spread illnesses b. it’s better to avoid the weather c. many people died because of the weather d. we have to be careful with the weather e. winter and summer are dangerous weather

Number 7 – 8

“If you’re finding it too hot , take my advice and have lots of cold showers. And remember, only mad dogs and Englishmen go out in the midday sun!” said the British people. 7. The statement above give us a/an ___ .

a. greeting b. sympathy c. prohibition d. suggestion e. expectation

8. From the statement above, we may conclude that to against the hot weather ___ . a. we may go out in the midday sun b. we should have lots of cold showers c. we shouldn’t go out with a crazy dog d. we should keep some advices e. we had better not take the shower

9. Lita : What’s Hana’s husband like? Dewi : Well, he’s tall and still very young. He

has a white skin. Lita : Is he handsome? Dewi : Yes, he is not only handsome but also a

very good Balinese dancer. From the dialogue above we may conclude that Hana’s husband is ___ . a. a tall young handsome man b. a handsome white tall dancer c. tall young handsome Balinese dancer



d. a handsome young tall white man e. a handsome tall young Balinese dancer

10. To face the rainy season, most of the victims of the earthquake in Jogjakarta and Central Java has built__ . a. a small simple Javanese bamboo house b. a simple Javanese bamboo house small c. a Javanese small simple bamboo house d. a small simple bamboo Javanese house e. a house of simple small Javanese bamboo

11. X : Excuse me, sir! ___, the parking lot is over there.

Y : Oh, I am sorry. I don’t know about it. a. you may park b. you ought to park c. you don’t have to park d. you are supposed to park e. you are not allowed to park

12. Asih : I’d like to go on a sight seing this afternoon. What about you, Fina? Will you accompany me?

Fina : ___, what time shall we start? a. Yes, sure b. Sorry I can’t c. See you later d. It doesn’t matter e. I’m sorry to hear that

13. Sunu : Desi is let again. Subur : He is never on time.

___ she ought to wake earlier

a. I hope b. I think c. I don’t care d. I dislike e. I disagree that

14. Dewi : Do you know the man talking to Mr Dars? Supri : Yes, he is my employer ___ promote me

to be a new branch manager. a. who b. whom c. whose d. which e. from which

15. Sina : You look delighted with your new profession.

Dars : You’re right. My family and I are more contented with this job as an academic coordinator, ___ I earn less than my previous occupation.

a. when b. since

c. because d. in spite of e. although

16. Their houses were ruined by earthquake and so were all their possessions. They ___ in poverly ever since. a. are living b. were living c. lives d. have lived e. had been living

17. Desi : Excuse me. Do you think the bus will leave on time?

Lisa : Yes, I am sure it will. The underlined utterance expresses ___ . a. plan b. pleasure c. certainty d. disappointed e. possibility

18. Yoga : Hi, Ryan. I haven’t seen you a long time where have you been?

Ryan : I’ve been to Jakarta. I’ve got a job. I’ve been working for a logging company.

Yoga : Really? ___ . a. You are very good b. that’s all right c. I’m sorry to hear that d. I’m glad to hear that e. Oh my God

19. John : Why do you look so sad? Nina : Didn’t you hear the news ___ that the

volcanic eruption had killed more than 2 hundreds people in my village?

John : Oh, I am sorry to hear that. a. to be informed b. informs c. informed d. informing e. to inform

20. “She felt very exhausted and almost giving up.” The underlined words have similar meaning to___ . a. difficult b. hungry c. thirsty d. tired e. wild



Latihan Soal 3

Once upon a time, a rabbit wanted to cross a river but e could not swim. He had an idea. He saw a boss of crocodile swimming in the river. The rabbit asked the boss of crocodile, “How many crocodiles are there in the river?” The boss of crocodile answered, “We are twenty here.” “Where are they?” the rabbit asked for the second time. “What is it for?” the boss of crocodile asked.

“All of you are good, nice, gentle and kind, so I want to make a line in order. Later I will know how kind you are,” said the rabbit. Then, the boss of the crocodile called all his friends and asked them to make a line in order from one side to the other side of the river. Just then, the rabbit started to count while jumping from one crocodile to another; one…two…three….four….until twenty, and finally, he thanked all crocodiles because he had crossed the river.

1. The story mainly tells us about ….

a. twenty crocodiles b. the boss of the crocodile c. a rabbit and twenty crocodiles d. a rabbit and the boss of crocodile e. the boss of the crocodile and all his friends

2. We know from the first paragraph that the rabbit

actually wanted …. a. to cross the river b. to swim across the river c. to meet the boss of crocodile d. to know where the crocodiles are e. to know the number of crocodiles there

3. “All of you are good, nice, gentle, and kind

…”(Paragraph 2) The underlined word is synonymous with …. a. wild b. diligent c. cheerful d. easygoing e. honorable

A fox fell into a well and couldn’t get out. By and

by a thirsty goat came along. Seeing the fox in the well it asked if the water was good. “Good”, said the fox “It’s the best water I’ve tasted in all my life. Come down and try it yourself.”

The goat was thirsty so he got into the well. When he had drunk enough, he looked around but there was no way to get out. Then the fox said, “I have a good idea. You stand on your hind legs and put your forelegs against the side of the well. Then I’ll climb on your back, from there. I’ll step on your horns, and I can get out. And when I’m out, I’ll help you out of the well.”

The goat did as he was asked and the fox got on his back and climbed out of the well. Then he coolly walked away. The goat called out loudly after him and reminded him of his promise to help him out. The fox

merely turned to him and said; “If you only had thought carefully about getting out, you wouldn’t have jumped into the well.”

The goat felt very sad. He called out loudly. An old man walking nearby heard him and put a plank into the well. The goat got out and thanked the old man.

4. The text tells the story of ….

a. a fox b. a goat c. a fox and a goat d. an old man and the fox e. the goat and an old man

5. Paragraph 2 mainly tells ….

a. how the fox helped the goat b. why the fox got into the well c. how the fox got out of the well d. the fox’s idea how to get out of the well e. how both the goat and the fox got out of the

well

6. “The goat did as he was asked….” (Paragraph 3) What does the above sentence mean? a. The goat drank enough and locked around. b. The goat came down to the well and drank. c. The goat called out loudly after the fox got out. d. The goat waited someone who might help him. e. The goat stood on his hind legs and put his

forelegs against the side of the well.

The Police thought that two burglars started the robbery at 151 Pattimura street on Sunday afternoon. The burglars broke into the students’ room while they were going to a football game. They never thought that while they were away, burglars would break into their boarding house. 7. What happened to the students’ room on Sunday

afternoon? a. The police broke it. b. The police ruined it. c. Burglars broke into it. d. Two burglars broke it. e. The students started to ruin it.

8. The burglars broke into the room when the students

…. a. were at a party b. were talking a rest c. were playing football d. were at a football game e. were watching football on TV



9. ‘The burglars broke into the student’s room ….” The underlined phrase means ….

a. broke forcefully b. entered by force c. put into pieces d. easily entered e. came into

10. The students seem to think that ….

a. they had locked their room b. their boarding house was not safe c. their boarding house was in a safe area d. thieves would easily break into their room e. there would be a robbery in their boarding

house

The elephant is the largest and strongest of all animals. It is a strange looking animal with its thick legs, huge sides and backs, large hanging ears, a small tail, little eyes, long white tusks and above all it has a long nose, the trunk.

The trunk is the elephant’s peculiar feature, and it has various uses. The elephant draws up water by its trunk and can squirt it all over its body like a shower bath. It can also lift leaves and puts them into its mouth. In fact the trunk serves the elephant as a long arm and hand. An elephant looks very clumsy and heavy and yet it can move very quickly.

The elephant is a very intelligent animal. Its intelligent combined with its great strength makes it a very useful servant to man and it can be trained to serve in various ways such as carry heavy loads, hunt for tigers and even fight. 11. The third paragraph is mainly about the fact that ….

a. elephants are strong b. elephants can lift logs c. elephants are servants d. elephants are very useful e. elephants must be trained

12. Which of the following is NOT part of the elephant

described in the first paragraph? a. It looks strange. b. It is heavy. c. It is wild. d. It has a trunk. e. It has a small tail.

13. It is stated in the text that the elephant uses the trunk

to do the following, EXCEPT…. a. to eat b. to push c. to drink d. to carry things e. to squirt water over the body

14. “The trunk is the elephant’ a peculiar feature ….” (Paragraph 2) The underlined word is close in meaning to ….

a. large b. strange c. tough d. smooth e. long

15. Nola : Do you know the boy sitting next to the

man with the red polka dot shirt? Neli : He is Denis ….father is a tycoon. Nola : Oh, I see.

a. who b. whom c. whose d. which e. where

16. Ferdi : Do you see the large field over there?

Hasan : Yes, what is it for? Ferdi : That’s the land ….is provided for the elephants to live.

a. who b. whom c. where d. which e. whose

17. Bobby : I finally could buy the Chevrolet that I

had dreamed of for years. Withney : Oh, congratulations. Is it the one ….you showed me yesterday?

a. whom b. where c. who d. which e. whose

18. Read the following sentences. They are not in a

good order. 1. Enter the 14 digits. 2. How to charge your cell phone card. 3. Dial “222” C or “OK”. 4. Press “1” to get the charge option. 5. The amount of the voucher will be

automatically added onto your card. 6. First scratch the black area. 7. To check the remaining pulse credit dial *222#. The right arrangement of the sentences above is ….

a. 1 – 7 – 3 – 4 – 6 – 2 – 5 b. 2 – 6 – 3 – 4 – 1 – 5 – 7 c. 3 – 4 – 5 – 7 – 6 – 1 – 2 d. 5 – 3 – 7 – 6 – 4 – 2 – 1 e. 6 – 4 – 1 – 7 – 5 – 2 – 3



19. X : Hi… I am Agung. Nice to meet you. Y : My name is Juli. Nice to meet you, too.

a. This is my friend, Agung. b. Allow me to introduce myself c. Let me introduce you to my friend d. What do you do? e. How are you doing?

20. Retno : I called Joko last night.

Andri : What? Retno : I said I ….Joko last night.

a. have called b. had called c. would call d. had to call e. called

21. Iwan has gotten three promotions … at this

company a year ago. a. since he started working b. when he has started working c. before he had started working d. until he is starting working e. after he was starting working

22. Oy : I forgot to bring my dictionary….?

Ani : Sure, here it is. a. Could you lend me yours, please b. This dictionary is yours, isn’t it c. Is your dictionary new d. Could I lend you e. How about you

23. Lusi : Have you heard that Mr. Yayan passed

away last night? Ranto : Really? I don’t believe it. Yesterday I

met him at the wedding party of my neighbor.

Lusi : Yeah, he had a heart attack last night. Ranto : Oh, I’m really sorry to hear that.

The underlined expression expresses …. a. ability b. surprise c. certainty d. possibility e. sympathy

24. Rangga : My friend will hold a mask party next

week. Will you join us? Dion : Sounds interesting! But I have an

appointment with my boss. From the dialogue we know that Dion ….

a. will join Rangga b. won’t join Rangga c. likes to go to the party d. promises to go to the party e. is not interested in going to the party

25. Totty : Dad, can I use your car? I want to borrow Ari’s camera.

Daddy : …? I need the car to go to the barber. a. Why don’t you use your motor cycle b. Why don’t you lend Fuad’s c. Is Ari’s camera a good one d. Does Ari have a camera e. Does Ari want the car

26. Jack : Did Jane call you?

Bob : What? Jack : I wanted to know if ….

a. you had called Jane. b. Jane called you. c. you called Jane. d. you have called Jane. e. Jane had called you.

27. Anto : You look very busy with your work…?

Ani : Sure. If you don’t mind. How kind you are. a. Can you do me a favour b. Can I help you c. Would you like to help me d. Do you like to help me e. Are you tired

28. Andri : May I use your car to Rina’s house, Dad?

Father : Of course. Be careful. From the underlined words we may conclude that Andri asks for …. to his father to use his car.

a. permission b. agreement c. possibility d. suggestion e. advice

29. Father : When will you harvest your crops?

Adi : Next week. Father : I hope you will have a bumper crop. The underlined sentence expresses….

a. desire b. permission c. certainly d. expectation e. sympathy

30. Ridwan : I’m afraid my parents’ rice fields

were damaged by the flood. Pak Yusuf : Oh, I’m sorry to hear that. The underlined words express….

a. sorry b. apology c. sympathy d. intolerance e. complaint



31. X : Good morning, Madam. Anything I can do for you?

Y : Yes, please. I need a T-shirt size 15. The dialogue likely occurs….

a. at home b. at a store c. at a tailor d. at a school e. at the office

32. Lisa : What is your plan for the holiday? Wita : I have no idea. Lisa : What about having a picnic to Lake

Toba, Wita? Wita : I’d love to, but I have to attend a

seminar. What are the speakers talking about?

a. Going to Wita’s house. b. Attending a seminar. c. Going to Lake Toba. d. Spending their time. e. Planning to spend a holiday.

33. Galih : Dody, may I borrow your mobile

phone? I want to call my girlfriend. Dody : I am afraid not. I am charging the

battery. The underlined utterance expresses ….

a. giving information b. asking for explanation c. giving a permission d. refusing a permission e. asking for information

34. Mom : Girls, make up your beds! Nindy : What did mom say to you just now? Ninin : She asked us…our beds.

a. make up b. made up c. to make up d. making up e. should make up

35. Budi : Good morning, Rina. Did you see Susi?

Rina : Yes, I did. She … to Mr. Yusuf when I entered the office just now.

a. talks b. talked c. has talked d. would talk e. was talking

36. Tony : The Indonesian Olympics contingent had just arrived from Athens. They brought one gold medal, one silver and two bronze medals.

Daddy : Yeah, we have to be proud of them. The underlined sentence is used to express ….

a. apology b. pleasure c. pride d. certainty e. satisfaction

37. Dinda : Tina, ….take this document to the

Accounting. Department? Tina : Yes, certainly. I’m free now.

a. can’t you please b. is it possible for you to c. may I tell you to d. can I tell you to e. should I ask you to

38. A : How was the result of your test?

B : I am really….I got a good score. a. disappointed b. appreciated c. excited d. satisfied e. dedicated

39. Agus : Send me a postcard of Borobudur, Budi. Rini : What did Agus say to you, Budi? Budi : ….

a. She told me to send him postcard of Borobudur.

b. I told her to send him postcard of Borobudur.

c. He told me to send him postcard of Borobudur.

d. He told you to send him postcard of Borobudur.

e. I told him to send him postcard of Borobudur.

40. Andi : Which book do you look for?

Sari : I look for ….. a. Which book I buy? b. A book which I brought yesterday c. Which book did you buy yesterday? d. A book which it is about dream e. Which book do you ask me, Andi?



Latihan Soal Read the text carefully This text is for questions number 1-5!

The Smartest Parrot

Once upon time, a man had a wonderful parrot. There was no other parrot like it. The parrot could say every word, except one word. The parrot would not say the name of the place where it was born. The name of the place was Catano.

The man felt excited having the smartest parrot but he could not understand why the parrot would not say Catano. The man tried to teach the bird to say Catano however the bird kept not saying the word.

At the first, the man was very nice to the bird but then he got very angry. “You stupid bird!” pointed the man to the parrot. “Why can’t you say the word? Say Catano! Or I will kill you” the man said angrily. Although he tried hard to teach, the parrot would not say it. Then the man got so angry and shouted to the bird over and over; “Say Catano or I’ll kill you”. The bird kept not to say the word of Catano.

One day, after he had been trying so many times to make the bird say Catano, the man really got very angry. He could not bear it. He picked the parrot and threw it into the chicken house. There were four old chickens for next dinner “You are as stupid as the chickens. Just stay with them” Said the man angrily. Then he continued to humble; “You know, I will cut the chicken for my meal. Next it will be your turn, I will eat you too, stupid parrot”. After that he left the chicken house.

The next day, the man came back to the chicken house. He opened the door and was very surprised. He could not believe what he saw at the chicken house. There were three death chickens on the floor. At the moment, the parrot was standing proudly and screaming at the last old chicken; “Say Catano or I’ll kill you”.

1. From the text above, we know that the social function of the text is … a. to persuade b. to describe c. to explain d. to entertain e. to advertise

2. Why the man got so angry and tried to kill the Parrot? a. because the parrot could not say even one

word b. because the parrot could say Catano c. because the parrot hate the man d. because the parrot could say every word

except Catano e. because the parrot is stupid

3. What is Catano?

a. the name of the Parrot b. the name of the man c. the name of the place where the parrot was

born d. the name of the place where the man was

born e. the name of the chicken house

4. The first paragraph of the text above is called

…….. part a. resolution b. orientation c. reorientation d. complication e. reiteration

5. “Although he tried hard to teach,….” (Paragraph

3). The word he refers to…. a. the man b. the parrot c. Catano d. the Chicken e. the Chicken house

Text 2 This text is for questions number 6-10!

Conventionally, students need book, pen, eraser, drawing book, ruler and such other stuff. Additionally, in this multimedia era, students need more to reach their progressive development. Students need mobile keyboards to record every presented subject easily. Of course it will need more cost but it will deserve for its function.

First, modern schools tend to apply fast transferring knowledge because the school needs to catch the target of curriculum. Every subject will tend to be given in demonstrative method. Consequently students need extra media cover the subject. Since there is a laptop on every student’s desk, this method will help student to get better understanding.

Secondly, finding an appropriate laptop is not difficult as it was. Recently there is an online shop which


http://www.shopwiki.com/wiki/Laptop+Computers



provides comprehensive information. The best is that the shop has service of online shopping. The students just need to brows that online shop, decide which computer or laptop they need, and then complete the transaction. After that the laptop will be delivered to the students' houses. That is really easy and save time and money.

From all of that, having mobile computer is absolutely useful for students who want to catch the best result for their study. Buying laptop online is advisable because it will cut the price. This online way is recommended since online shop also provides several laptop types. Students just need to decide which type they really need.

6. What is the main idea of the third paragraph? a. the laptop will be delivered to the students'

houses b. finding an appropriate laptop is easy c. there is an online shop which provides

comprehensive information d. the students just need to brows online shop e. buying laptop in online shop is difficult

7. Which of the following is NOT TRUE based on

the text above? a. students need laptop to reach their

progressive development b. there is an online shop which provides

comprehensive information c. finding an appropriate laptop is difficult d. buying mobile computer online is

recommended e. students can buy laptop at online shop

8. The word advisable in the last paragraph has the

same meaning with ….. a. recommended b. important c. cheap d. difficult e. easy

9. What is the appropriate title for the text above?

a. students have been in multimedia era b. students need to have laptop c. online shop is the best way to buy laptop d. buying laptop in online shop is not difficult e. the importance of having laptop

10. What is the genre of the text above?

a. narrative b. report c. hortatory exposition d. analytical exposition e. descriptive

Text 3 This text is for questions number 11-15! An elephant is the largest and strongest of all animals. It is a strange looking animal with its thick legs, huge sides and backs, large hanging ears, a small tail, little eyes, long white tusks and above all it has a long nose, the trunk. The trunk is the elephant's peculiar feature, and it has various uses. The elephant draws up water by its trunk and can squirt it all over its body like a shower bath. It can also lift leaves and puts them into its mouth. In fact, the trunk serves the elephant as a long arm and hand. An elephant looks very clumsy and heavy and yet it can move very quickly. The elephant is a very intelligent animal. Its intelligence combined with its great strength makes it a very useful servant to men and it can be trained to serve in various ways such as carrying heavy loads, hunting for tigers and even fighting. 11. The third paragraph is mainly about the fact that

…… a. elephants are strong b. elephants can lift logs c. elephants are servants d. elephants are very useful e. elephants must be trained

12. Which of the following is NOT part of the

elephant described in the first paragraph? a. It looks strange b. It is heavy c. It is wild d. It has a trunk e. It has a small tail

13. It is stated in the text that the elephant uses the

trunk to do the following, EXCEPT ….. a. to eat b. to push c. to drink d. to carry things e. to squirt water over the body

14. What is the communicative purpose of the text

above? a. To inform the readers about the

characteristics of an elephant b. To persuade the readers to protect elephants c. To make the readers realize the existence of

elephants d. To tell the readers about the advantages of an

elephant e. To give arguments about the benefits of an

elephant






15. The trunk is the elephant's peculiar feature ... (Paragraph 2) The underlined word is close in meaning to …… a. large b. strange c. tough d. smooth e. long

Text 4 This text is for questions number 16-20!

Germinating Petunia Seeds Follow these instructions to germinate petunia seeds. You will need: • a packet of petunia seeds • a seed tray or small pots • loamy friable soil or potting mix • water • fertilizer. Steps: 1. Fill seed tray with soil. 2. Incorporate fertilizer into soil. 3. Scatter seeds on the surface of the soil. 4. Cover seeds with a 3 mm layer of soil. Press firmly. 5. Spray water to moisten the seed bed. 6. Place seed tray in warm, sunny position (at least 25

deg. C). Keep soil moist by watering gently while seeds are germinating. Seeds will germinate in approximately 10 - 14 days. 16. What is the purpose of this text?

a. To inform the readers about the materials needed to germinate petunia seeds

b. To describe the characteristics of petunia seeds

c. To tell the readers the function of petunia seeds

d. To tell the readers why we should germinate petunia seeds

e. To tell the readers how to germinate petunia seeds

17. How many materials do you need to germinate

petunia seeds? a. 4 b. 5 c. 6 d. 7 e. 8

18. What should you do after putting the soil on the pot? a. Mix the soil with the fertilizer b. Scatter the seeds on the surface of the soil c. Press the soil firmly d. Put the pot in sunny position e. Incorporate the soil, seeds, and fertilizer together 19. Follow these instructions to germinate petunia seeds. The underlined word means …….

a. make b. grow c. fertilize d. increase e. add

20. Cover seeds with a 3 mm layer of soil. Press firmly. The underlined word has similar meaning with to …… a. fairly hard b. quite gently c. rather quickly d. softly e. slowly Text 5 This text is for questions number 21-22!

NOW OPEN

On 20th May 2009

Fashion Outlet

Neptune Jl. Kiara Asri Raya No. 36 Bandung

21. What is the function of the text ? a. To inform readers that there was a new outlet

opened. b. To persuade readers that the outlet should be

opened. c. To retell the events of the outlet opening

ceremony. d. To present two points of view about a new outlet. e. To explain the processes of the outlet opening. 22. How long has the outlet been opening? a. 2 months b. 3 months c. 4 months d. 5

months e. 6 months

Text 6 This text is for questions number 23-25! Metro’s 10th Anniversary Sale is now on!! Up to 70% discount Free gift for the first 100 shoppers

TODAY ONLY

Lucky Draw for every purchase

above Rp 600.000 in a single receipt

· Gold Royal Silverware 70% off · Sowaridi Chrystal Earrings 70% off · Designer Label purse 55% off · Charles and Keith Shoes



Usual price Rp 400.000 Now Rp 200.000 · Many more…………. 23. Based on the text above, why Metro is giving

discounts? a. to invite more buyers b. to celebrate Metro’s 10th Anniversary c. to celebrate the first opening day d. to cheat the people e. to increase the selling rate

24. How much is Charles and Keith shoes in sale day?

a. Rp. 120.000 b. Rp. 180.000 c. Rp. 200.000 d. Rp. 400.000 e. Rp. 600.000

25. How can you get lucky draw?

a. You go to Metro b. You are the first 100 shoppers c. You buy things above Rp. 600.000 in a single

receipt d. You buy Charles and Keith shoes e. You buy Charles and Keith shoes for over

Rp. 400.000 26. Peter : Paul didn’t pass his English course

test. Dicky : ……………… He must be

disappointed. a. It is not my business b. Don’t care c. Really? d. I’m definitely sure about it e. I’m sorry to hear that

27. My friend says he plans ...next year

a. studied b. studying c. study d. to study e. studies

28. Fira : Where were you yesterday? Dino : Oh, I’m very sorry. We……my

grandma when you phoned me. a. visited b. had visited c. were visiting d. visit e. visiting

29. Rio : ….……… to go camping with us tomorrow?

Tom : Oh dear! I’m sorry I can’t I have to finish my homework.

a. Do you like b. Have you tried c. Can you follow me? d. Would you like e. Will you come

30. Bella : I’m Bella. Lindy : Pleased to meet you Bella. I’m Lindy. Bella : Pleased to meet you too. Lindy : Would you like to join us to celebrate

our success? The underlined sentence means……

a. for meeting b. asking for something c. invitation d. greeting e. asking refuse the invitation

31. Rian : Jhon, do you know the man…..is

parking the car over there? I watched him on TV last night. Jhon : No, I don’t know him

a. whom b. when c. where d. whose e. who

32. Tidi : Well, Ferdi, do you think you have

passed? Ferdi : No, definitely not. I thought the

paper was terrible. I haven’t got a hope of getting through.

The underlined part of the dialogue express……. a. displeasure b. incapability c. uncertainty d. dissatisfaction e. disappointment

33. She is a professional ………….

a. beautiful b. beauty c. beautifully d. beautician e. beautify

34. His directions how to get the station were

quite…………. a. clearly b. clear c. clearing d. clearness e. clearity



35. Meta : Hello. Ben : Hello, Meta. Do you feel like going

to a movie this evening? Meta : That’s sounds great, Ben. I haven’t

been to a movie for a long time. The underlined utterance expresses………….

a. persuasion b. permission c. suggestion d. intention e. invitation

Text 7 This text is for questions number 36-40 Television has a great influence on our ideas about that is right and wrong, about the way we should behave, and about life in general. Sometimes the value and life …….(36) that we get from television are in ……..(37) with those that are taught at home and school. Critics of TV ………(38) that crime and western programs often ……(39) to a taste of violence while many game shows appeal to greed. Many critics also believe that television should be used for …….(40) constructive purpose as well as for entertainment. 36. a. challenge b. objectives c. styles d. skills e. competitions 37. a. line b. conflict c. accordance d. favor e. dealing 38. a. find out b. carry out c. take out d. look out e. point out 39. a. prevent b. minimize c. appeal d. remove e. wipe 40. a. social b. socialize c. socially d. socialized e. socializing

41. My uncle ……….. advised me to take English lesson. a. strength b. strong c. strengthening d. strongly e. strengthen

42. Annisa : Good morning, Mom. Mother : Good morning, Annisa. Annisa : Mom, may I invite some of my

classmate to our party? Mother : Yes, certainly. The underlined utterance above expresses…….

a. Preference b. Permission c. Invitation d. Prohibition e. Obligation

43. Change the sentence into passive

Active sentence : They are building a new train station.

Passive sentence : A new station …………………….

a. was being built b. was built c. would be built d. is being built e. is built

44. Susi : My father died because of tsunami in

Aceh. Rina : I am sorry to hear that. The underlined utterance is an expression of

……….. a. expressing regret b. expressing disbelief c. attracting attention d. showing sympathy e. expressing disappointment

45. The author ……. novels for years, before he wrote

a book of property. a. had written b. wrote c. has written d. writes e. is writing

46. Adi and Roy are brothers, but they look very

………….. a. differs b. differential c. difference d. differently e. different



47. “Are you invited to the party?” “Yes, here is the ……… card.”

a. invited b. invitation c. inviting d. invite e. invitational

48. “I can’t find my cellphone.” “Well, you …….. in the car. Let’s take a look.”

a. may have to leave it b. may have left it c. should have left it d. have to leave it e. must leave it

49. Student : Excuse me, Sir. May I go to the

restroom? Teacher : Yes, but don’t forget to return

immediately. From the dialogue we know that the teacher

……… a. gives advice to the student b. asks for permission to the student c. allows the student to go to the restroom d. doesn’t agree with the student e. doesn’t allow the student to go to the

restroom 50. I ………. All over the place for my dictionary

when I suddenly remembered that my sister had borrowed it. a. looked b. am looking c. was looking d. have looked e. have been looking



Latihan Soal Read the text carefully and answer the questions! Text 1 Many years ago, there lived a hermit in a forest in Sumatera. He did not grow foods but depended on the jungle to survive. Soon, there was a drought, all the plants and fruit trees in the jungle died The old man had nothing to eat now, so he turned to begging. He went to nearby village trying to get some food. At first, the villagers were very happy to help him. However, when he came continually, they refused to give him any more food. They told him to grow his own food. One day, while the hermit was sitting in his hut, sad and hungry, he began to think about growing his own food. Just then a boatman stopped by and taking on the hermit, gave him some rice seeds. Before the boatman went away, he said, “These seeds will grow and give you everlasting harvest if you work very hard. If you are tired of the work, the rice plants will turn into weeds”. The old hermit worked hard to clear the land and sowed the seeds before the rains came. Strangely, after a short period of time, the rice was ready for harvesting. The old man got a lot of rice from the harvest. After each harvest, the plants grew back again right away. When the villagers heard about the hermit and his wonderful rice, they flocked to his rice-field and took home as much rice as they could. One day, the hermit became so tired of harvesting the rice that she shouted. “Oh, stop growing, you wretched thing!” As soon as he had said this, the rice plants turned into weeds. 1. What is the type of the text?

a. Narrative b. descriptive c. Argument d. Persuasive e. Exposition

2. What did the boatman give to the hermit?

a. Fruit tree b. Some food c. Rice plants d. Some weeds e. Some rice seeds

3. Which statement is true about the hermit?

a. He lived a small town b. He went to the village to ask for some food c. He liked to give the villagers fruit and rice d. He died in the jungle when there was a

drought e. He hated begging through there was nothing

to eat

4. What is the main idea of paragraph 5? a. The succession of rice harvest b. The hermit should clear the land c. The hermit was successful as a farmer d. It needed a short of time to harvest the rice e. The seeds should be shown before the rains

came Text 2 In autumn, the color of the leaves changes into beautiful yellow, red, and brown. Do you know how this happens? To answer the questions, first we have to understand about leaves. Leaves are the food factories of plants. Plants take water from the ground through their roots and they take carbon dioxide from the air. Plants need glucose for energy and for their growth. The plants use sunlight to turn water and carbon dioxide into glucose. The process is called photosynthesis and substances process. The trees will rest, and use the food that they have stored during summer. The trees begin to close their food factories. The green chlorophyll substance disappears from the leaves. As the leaves begin to lose their green color, they change into beautiful yellow and orange. In some trees, like maple tree, glucose is trapped in the leaves after the photosynthesis process stops. Sunlight and cool rights turn the green color of the leaves into red. Oak leaves become brown because of wastes that are left in the leaves. This combination of red and brown makes the trees look very beautiful in autumn. 5. What is the best title of the text above? a. The changes of leaves b. The seasons c. Photosynthesis d. The trees e. Beautiful Autumn 6. How many kind of trees are there mentioned in

the text? a.1 b.2 c.3 d.4 e.5 7. A part of trees which is used to take water from

the ground is …. a. leave b. branch c. fruit d. root e. chlorophyll



8. When do trees produce their food? a. in summer b. in autumn c. in winter d. in spring e. in fall

9. What makes the trees look beautiful in autumn?

a. Because their leaves are doing photosynthesis b. Because the trees will rest and use their food c. Because they have stored their food d. Because the sunlight and cool nights turn the

color of leaves in maple tree e. Because the leaves color of trees change into

beautiful combination of colors. Text 3 At the birth of the Indonesian nation 1945, Australia and Indonesia shared a positive and friendly relationship. In 1947 Australia supported Indonesia’s struggle for independence by placing embargos on Dutch supplies, arms and troops. Australian dock workers went on strike and significant numbers of Australians demonstrated in the streets in support of Indonesian independence. The Dutch were unable to ship supplies through Australian ports during this period. Much of the support Australians gave to Indonesians was based on the friendship that developed between Australian soldiers and the Indonesia people at the end of the Second World War. There was also a strong anti-imperialist mood among some sections of the Australian population at that time. It is significant that Australia supported her Asian neighbors against a European colonial. 10. What is the passage about?

a. A strong anti imperialist mood b. The Indonesia’s struggle for the

independence c. The early friendship between Indonesia and

Australia d. The relationship between Australian and

Indonesian people e. The influence of the second World War on

Indonesia and Australia 11. What is the meaning of “embargo”?

a. prohibition b. permission c. alignment d. shipping e. agreement

12. Indonesian and Australian shared positive and ______ relationship at the birth of the Indonesian nation. a. clear b. significant c. friendly d. long lasting e. friendship

13. Which of the following statement is not correct

according to the text above? a. going on strike b. demonstrating in the streets c. placing embargoes on Dutch supplies d. shipping Dutch supplies through Australian

ports 14. Tia : Dad, may I go with Ajie this evening? Dad : Be sure to be home before 9. From the underlined words we know that father

… Tia to go with Ajie to the cinema a. warns b. forbids c. suggests d. allows e. advices

15. X : Excuse me! ….? Y : Oh, Thank you. I think I can handle it myself. a. Can I do something for you? b. Could you help me with this? c. Could you lift this bag for me? d. Will you do me a favour e. Is there something you can do for me 16. Rani : You know the horrible flood has

destroyed many houses in Kendal last night.

Dian : Really? I’m so sorry about it. If I were a millionaire, I would help the victims to build their houses.

From the underlined words we know that … a. Dian is a millionaire so she builds many new

houses b. Dian has no money to build new houses c. Dian plans to build new houses for the

victims d. Dian and Rani have no money to build new

houses e. Rani asks Dian to build new houses for the

victims 17. This is a very popular TV program. Every week it

…. by many people. a. watches b. being watch c is watched d. has been watching e. to be watched



18. Our school …. here next year a. is going to rebuild b. is building rebuild c. will be rebuilt d. is to be rebuilt e. is rebuilt

Text 4 INTEROFFICE MEMO Meeting in the boardroom on Friday, July 10 at 10 am has been changed to Monday, July 13. Same time, same place. Please bring the notes of the previous meeting.

Director

19. The text above is ……. a. An invitation b. An announcement c. An agreement d. An intention e. A news

20. Which of the statement below is not true

according to the text? a. It is second meeting b. They had another meeting before c. The place and the time are charged d. The meeting will be on Monday e. The text is a note

Text 5

December, 2005 Dear Honey, I’m so excited. Finally, I got something. I’ve been dreaming of, but it was not so easy to get it. Let look back to my past. I was born thirty-two years ago. I was born in small village. When I was a child, I was so naughty but so smart according to my mother. I got the second rank when I finished my elementary school, and in high school, I got the first rank, thus I won the scholarship. I was so glad and my parents were very proud of me. Then I went to one of the best State University in Bandung. I took the teacher training and education program. I majored in English. I studied at the university for four years. There, I used to be the best in all the subjects I took. In addition, guess! I got the first rank from the first semester till the last semester!. I won the scholarship for the third time. I was active at the student organizations, and in many activities such as discussions, seminars, trainings, etc. I just began to learn computer programs after I graduated from the university. Did you know that I worked part time at a computer company while I was studying at the university? It was very hard actually. Thank Honey, I have written too much on you!

21. What does Honey refer to ? a. A letter b. A diary c. A note d. A book e. A report

22. The type of the text is …

a. narrative b. procedure c. recount d. descriptive

23. The writer wrote about …

a. Her dream b. Her study c. Her past time d. Her lesson e. Her scholarship

24. The writer was born …

a. in 1932 b. In 1972 c. In 1973 d. in 1974 e. 32 years ago

Text 6 Two friends were traveling on the same road together when they came face with a bear. One, in great fear, and without a thought of his companion, climbed into a tree and hid. The other, seeing that single handed he was no match for the bear, threw himself on the ground and feigned death, for he had heard that a bear will not touch a dead body. The bear approved him, sniffing at his nose and ears, but the man, with great courage, held his breath and kept still, and length the bear, supposing him to be dead, walked slowly ahead. When the bear was well out of sight the first traveler came down from his tree and asked what it was that the bear had said to him. “For,” said he, “I observed that he put his mouth very close to your ear.” Why,” he replied the other, “it was no great secret. He only advised me not to keep company with those who, when they get into difficulty, leave their friends in the lurch. 25. What type of writing does this passage belongs

to? a. Descriptive b. Narrative c. Explanation d. Argumentative e. Discussion



26. What is the orientation of the text above? a. Two friends were traveling on the same road

together when they came face to face with a bear

b. One in great fear, and without a thought of his companion, climbed intro a tree and hid

c. When the bear was well out of sight the first traveler came down from his tree and asked whet is was that the bear had said to him

d. “For,” he said, I observed that he put his mouth very close to you ear

e. “Why,” he replied the other, “it was no great secret.”

27. Which of these phrases has similar meaning with

this phrase; “When the bear was well out of sight …”

a. The bear had lost his eyesight. b. The bear had left the site. c. The bear watched them from a far. d. The traveler got blind. e. The traveler got into difficulty

28. The word him in paragraph 2 line 3 refers to?

a. The bear b. The firs traveler c. The second traveler d. Both traveler e. The man

29. What is the moral for this story?

a. Pretend to be dead when you come face to face with a bear.

b. A real friend will never leave his friends even in difficult times.

c. A real friend will leave his friends in difficult times.

d. Always bring a company when you’re traveling away.

e. Don’t mess up with a bear. 30. John : “Randi, do you know the man … is

parking the car over there? I watched him on TV last night.” Randi : “No, I don’t know him.”

a. whose b. who c. whom d. when e. where

31. “Which paintings will be exhibited tomorrow?”

a. Are still being selected b. Are still selected c. Still be selected d. Still selected e. Still selecting

32. If I were you, I would leave for Jakarta soon. From this sentence we can conclude that …..

a. I am you, so I leave for Jakarta b. I was you, so I left for Jakarta c. I am you, so I don’t leave for Jakarta d. I am not you, so I leave for Jakarta e. I am not you, so I don’t leave for Jakarta

33. The man hit by a car yesterday would have died if

the doctors had not immediately operated on him. a. The man will be immediately operated on b. It’s too late to save the men c. The man died after the operation d. The man still alive e. The doctors didn’t operated him

34. Hary : “I’ve got a terrible headache.” Rossy : ” Why don’t you see the doctor?” From the expression, we know that Rossy …..

a. asks questions b. gives order c. gives advice d. feels sorry e. feels irritated

35. Ridwan : Why don’t you ride your motor

cycle to come here? Raihan : It ….. Last week

a. Has been sold b. Has to sell c. Had to sell d. Wad sold e. sells

36. Randi : Mom, I am nominated in the singing

contest. Mother : Great, I’m really proud of you. The underlined utterance is an expression …

a. will b. hope c. plan d. pride e. sad

37. Fadli : Are you free today? Ari : Yes, what’s up? Fadli : Would you like to come with me to

watch the football match at Senayan? Ari : Thanks, I’d be delighted to. It’s my

favourite sport. What are the speakers going to do?

a. To visit their friend’s house b. To watch the football match c. To enjoy their free time d. To stay at home e. To play football



38. Mary : Why didn’t you answer my call last night?

John : I am sorry … with my cousin a. I was going out b. I have gone out c. I went out d. I had gone out e. I will go out

39. Berry : “Have you known your TOEFL

score?” Teddy : “Not yet. It ….. next week”.

a. Will have being announce b. Will be announced c. Is being announced d. To be announced e. Is announced

40. The antique building ….. in 17th century.

a. build b. builds c. is built d. was built e. being built

41. Indonesian Batik is … recognized.

a. international b. internationalized c. internationalization d. internationality e. internationalizing

42. The doctor gained immediate . . . for his great

discovery. a. recognition b. recognize c. recognizing d. recognizable e. recognized

43. The room has been . . . decorated for the wedding

party. a. Very beautiful b. A beauty c. beautifully d. beautify e. beautified

44. Forests yield many . . . which are very beneficial

for the local people and those who leave in the cities. a. producers b. products c. productively d. productivity e. productive

45. The . . . of the new company is very enormous. Now it has opened some new branches in many different cities in the country. a. develop b. development c. developing d. developer e. developed

46. The new cigarette product is very popular among

the young people. The new product is . . . advertised on TV. a. nation b. nationally c. national d. nationalize e. nationalization

47. The people begin to show their . . . to the new

established government system. a. appreciate b. appreciable c. appreciative d. appreciably e. appreciation

48. His parents are very kind. They let all their

children . . . some courses to sharpen their kills. a. To take b. Taking c. Take d. They take e. Are to take

49. Student : . . . . . . to carry these books to your

room, sir? Teacher : . . . . . . No, thanks, I can do it myself.

a. Do you want b. Shall I do c. Can you help you d. May I help you e. Do you mind



Latihan Soal Text 1

112 Die in France from July Heat Wave

A heat wave that struck Europe last month killed 112 people in France, on Thursday, many of them were elderly. Of the people whose deaths were attributed to the sweltering temperatures in France, 66 of them were age 75 or up. French officials said, “This year people must be more careful to avoid a repeat of the summer of 2003, when 15,000 people, most of them elderly, died of heat related causes. 1. Who suffered a lot from the heat wave?

a. Young people b. Old people c. Children d. Women e. Teenagers

2. Why were the French officials said that people

must be more careful about this year heat wave? a. Because the present condition is better b. Because the present condition is worse that

that in 2003 c. Because in 2003 more people had died d. Because they didn’t want more people die e. Because they were responsible for the

citizen’s safety 3. “Of the people whose deaths were attributed to the

sweltering temperatures . . . “ The underlined word has almost the same

meaning as the word . . . a. Due to b. Comply with c. Associate with d. In response to e. For the sake of

4. What is the newsworthy event of text 7?

a. French officials said “This year, people must be more careful to avoid a repeat of the summer of 2003.”

b. A heat wave that struck Europe last month killed 112 people in France, on Thursday, many of them were elderly.

c. Of the people whose deaths were attributed to the sweltering temperatures in France, 66 of them were age 75 or up.

d. Many of them were elderly. e. When 15,000 people, most of them elderly,

died of heat related causes.

Text 2 United Kingdom

The United Kingdom is a constitutional monarchy comprising of four constituent countries; England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. The first three situated in Great Britain, which is an island that lies off the North West coast of Europe. The island is surrounded by the Atlantic Ocean to the west, and the North Sea to the east. Meanwhile, Northern Ireland is located in Ireland, which is an island that lies off the West Coast of Great Britain. The island consists of Northern Ireland and the Irish Republic. 5. The purpose of the text is . . . .

a. To describe the United Kingdom b. To inform about the United Kingdom c. To retell about the United Kingdom d. To explain about the United Kingdom e. To persuade people about the United

Kingdom 6. Which country is not situated in Great Britain?

a. England b. Wales c. Scotland d. England, Wales and Scotland e. Northern Ireland

7. Where is the island of Ireland situated? It lies off .

. . a. The east coast of Great Britain b. The west coast of Europe c. The west coast of Great Britain d. The west coast of Atlantic Ocean e. The east coast of North Sea

8. What do you call the text 8 above?

a. Report b. Description c. Narrative d. Review e. Exposition

Text 3 I personally believe that libraries are among humanity’s most important institutions for several reasons. Firstly, most of humanity’s collective knowledge is stored in libraries. Secondly, libraries protect and preserve this knowledge. They also classify or group the materials into logical and easily available divisions. Furthermore, libraries make the materials available to everyone and even provide librarians to help us find what we need. Finally, libraries are our link to the past and our gift to the future.



From the facts above, I conclude that libraries are important institutions for humanity. 9. Libraries are among humanity’s most important

institutions for . . . reasons. a. one b. two c. three d. four e. five

10. Libraries also classify or group the materials into

logical and easily available divisions . . . readers can find the materials easily. a. it b. because c. after d. however e. therefore

11. “Libraries are our link to the past and our gift to

the future.” This means that we . . . to the past and the future

by libraries. a. is linked b. was linked c. were linked d. are linked e. am linked

12. What do you call the text above?

a. Analytical exposition b. Hortatory exposition c. Discussion d. Explanation e. Review

13. The organization of the text 5 is . . .

a. thesis - arguments - reiteration b. thesis - arguments - recommendation c. general statement – a sequence of

explanations - closing d. identification - description e. general classification - description

14. “From the facts above, I conclude that libraries are

important institutions for humanity.” The last paragraph of the text is called the . . .

a. orientation b. re-orientation c. thesis d. arguments e. reiteration

Text 4 Mother’s Day

Julia Ward Howe and Anna Jarvis were the best known pioneers who took up the cause of Mother’s Day in the United States. Julia Ward Howe’s “Mother’s Day” in 1872 was a call for disarmament by women. Anna Jarvis, in 1907, organized a day to raise awareness of poor health condition in her community, a cause she believed would be best advocated by mothers. She called it “Mother’s Work Day.” In 1914, US President, Woodrow Wilson signed a Joint Declaration. He declared the second Sunday of May as Mother’s Day, the day to honor motherhood. Today, however, some may think that the commercial community purposely created Mother’s Day to make some extra money. Nowadays, this auspicious day has literally become commercial affair. Many people spend their time buying material gifts for their mothers. In order to sell more products, many restaurants, gift shops, cake shops and florists usually give special offers on Mother’s Day. Consequently, their cash registers keep ringing non stop. Obviously, Mother’s Day has become a major profit makes for businesses. It is important to remember that the reason behind celebrating Mother’s Day is to say thanks to the most important person in our life – our mother. It is the day to tell her how much we love her and how special she is for us. Therefore, instead of merely giving material gifts, giving our mother what she needs and really wants is more precious. Showing off our love by spending more time with her, for example, will certainly give us nothing but heartfelt thanks and real gratitude from our mother. 15. Some people thought Mother’s Day was . . . .

a. purposely created just to make money b. created to honor the mother c. created to make the mother happy d. created to respect the mother e. created to pay tribute to mother

16. Who was the creator of Mother’s Day?

a. Anna Jarvis b. Mary Thompson

c. President Woodrow Wilson d. Joan of Arc e. Julia Ward Howe 17. What did Julia Ward Howe do in the 19th century?

a. She worked for the NGO. b. She worked in a military service. c. She called for disarmament by women. d. She raised awareness of poor health

conditions in her community. e. She became a charity worker.



18. When did the Mother’s Day become officially recognized? a. In 1758 b. In 19th Century

c. In 1924 d. In 1914 e. In 1800 19. According to the text, when the Mother’s Days

celebrated? a. On the 1st week of June b. On the 2nd week of April c. On the 2nd week of May d. On the 1st week of December e. On the 3rd week of May

20. What does Mother’s Day bring to the commercial

community? a. It brings havoc to the commercial community b. It brings problems to the commercial

community c. It brings adversities to the commercial

community d. It brings disasters to the commercial

community e. It brings immense business to the commercial

community 21. Who will get benefits from Mother’s Day?

a. The children b. The hawkers c. The taxi drivers d. Restaurants owners, gift shops owners, cake

shops owners and florists owners e. The beggars

Text 5

Changing the Handphone Covers Before removing the cover, always switch off the power, and disconnect the charger and any other device. Avoid touching electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the device with the cover attached. 1. Press the back cover release button, open the back

cover and remove it. 2. Take off the front cover carefully. 3. Insert the keypad in the new front cover. 4. Align the top of the front cover to the top of the

phone, press the front cover to lock it into places. 22. Insert the keypad in the new front cover. The underlined word has the same meaning with .

. . a. enter b. include c. put into d. join e. set

23. What will be done to the old front cover? a. remove it b. avoid touching it c. store it d. take it off e. press it

24. What is the type of the text?

a. report b. procedure c. narration d. description e. anecdote

25. The communicative purpose of this text is to . . .

a. Guide the readers in changing the handphone covers.

b. Share an amusing incident with others. c. Describe a particular thing. d. Persuade the readers to change the handphone

covers. e. Inform the readers about handphone covers.

Text 6 “Men sana in corpore sano”, a healthy body makes a sound mind. More and more people nowadays are aware of the truth behind the maxim. As a result, they make sports an integral part of their lives. Some people participate in sports to release energy and tension, while others do it to make friends. Sports, such as soccer, basketball or boxing, have become an acceptable way to release energy and aggression. Other sport like golf, mountain climbing, dancing or bowling can be means of starting or consolidating friendships. Most sports offer a constructive escape from the pressures of the everyday life. In fact, you can change your life if you take up and keep up an activity suited to your character, abilities and lifestyle. It is important to realize that no matter what kind of exercise you do, you can be sure that it’s always good for your health and that it’s fun. 26. People do sports . . .

a. to change their lives b. as their hobby c. to lessen the pressure of life d. as part of their lives e. to be healthy

27. “Most sports offer a constructive escape from the

pressures of the everyday life.” (Paragraph 1). The phrase “escape from” can be replaced by . . . . a. hiding from b. avoidance of c. joining to d. changing from e. turning off



28. What is the main idea of the text above? a. Be healthy is important. b. A lifestyle of human being. c. Sport is a good way to keep person’s health. d. The purpose of the healthy life. e. Many kinds of sports.

29. Ely : I . . . English since seven years ago.

Then, I am going study French next month. Dion : Wow, that’s great Ely.

a. have studied b. studied c. am studying d. study e. was studying

30. Dinda : What about my new dress, Mom? Mother : Don’t worry. Your father . . . a lovely

evening dress for you. Dinda : Really? Why didn’t he tell me? Mother : It will be surprise, won’t it?

a. haven’t bought b. was buying c. has bought d. were buying e. isn’t buying

31. “A well-known architect is designing our new

school building. “ The passive voice form of the above sentence is

“our new school building . . . by a well-known architect.”

a. designs b. is designed c. designed d. is being designed e. be designing 32. “The stewardess is now serving coffee to the

passengers.” The passive form of above sentence is . . . . a. The passengers are serving coffee now b. The passengers are now served coffee c. Coffee is now served by the passengers d. Coffee is now being served to the passengers e. Coffee is now served to the passengers 33. I am still waiting . . . for an interview. a. to be called d. to call b. be called e. called c. be calling 34. “How old is this mosque?” “Well, it . . . in 1870.” a. built d. had built b. to be built e. had been building c. was built

35. This is a very popular TV program. Every week it . . . by millions of the people.

a. watches d. has watched b. being watches e. had watched c. is watched 36. Susan : Astrid is a diligent student. I’m sure

she will pass the examination with flying colors.

Agus : I think so. The underlined utterance expresses . . . . a. agreement d. sympathy b. prohibition e. advice c. regret 37. X : Excuse me, sir! . . . here, the parking lot is over there. Y : Oh, I’m sorry. I don’t know about it. a. You may park b. You should park c. You are not allowed to park d. You are supposed to park e. You don’t have to park 38. I will have a test tomorrow, therefore I … study

to night. a. may d. must b. can e. have c. might 39. Johnny : Mom, this is my friend, Freddy. Mother : . . . . Pleased to meet you. a. How are you b. Is it your name? c. Well, great your name. d. I’ve been waiting for you e. How do you do? 40. Tony will go to the cinema. It’s raining hard. Tony : Dad, I will go now. It’s getting late. Father : You’d better stay at home;

otherwise, you will catch cold. From the dialogue above we know that Tony’s

father . . . . a. asks for attention b. shows anger c. feels regret d. asks for information e. give advice 41. Nico : Tom, I am terribly sorry. I forget to

bring your notebook. Tom : . . . . I don’t need it until the day

after tomorrow. a. Oh? Really? d. What a pity b. Never mind e. Not too bad c. How lucky you are



42. Diana’s mother is a . . . She teaches student at the Gajah Mada University.

a. teacher d. receptionist b. director e. headmistress c. lecturer 43. You’d better put on your . . . when you go out. Its

very cold outside. a. vest d. sweater b. scarf e. raincoat c. T-shirt 44. Newspapers have a basic purpose, this is to get . . .

as quickly as possible from reliable sources to readers.

a. news d. advertisement b. report e. announcement c. statement 45. From 1967 onward, cinema begun to lose their . . .

People prefer watching TV programmes at home. a. sponsors d. companies b. producers e. cameramen c. audiences 46. Sony : Have you visited Bob? He got an

accident last week. Dona : Oh, poor Bob. I hope he’ll be better

soon. The Italicized sentence expresses . . . . a. sadness d. expectation b. pleasure e. satisfaction c. sympathy 47. Ari : Although this is the best cinema in

town, there are not many people visiting it.

Tia : . . . nowadays most people prefer spending their time at home watching TV.

a. Oh, no. d. That’s right. b. I don’t think so. e. It’s not true. c. Really? 48. Rieka : What would you give me if you’re

sent abroad? Reza : If I were sent abroad, I . . . a

dictionary for you. a. bought b. will have bought c. will buy d. would have bought e. would buy

49. Rudi : Why are you so late today? Tony : Sorry, Rud. My car . . . . Rudi : So did you come here on foot? Tony : Yes, I did. a. is repairing b. is being repaired c. has just repaired d. will have been repaired e. will be repairing 50. Hady : Donny, let’s go to Linda’s party. Donny : If I had time, I would go there. From the dialogue we know that . . . . a. Donny goes to Linda’s party. b. Hady goes to Linda’s party. c. Donny doesn’t go to Linda’s party. d. Donny came to Linda’s party. e. Donny will come to Linda’s party



Latihan Soal Once upon a time, a rabbit wanted to cross a river but e could not swim. He had an idea. He saw a boss of crocodile swimming in the river. The rabbit asked the boss of crocodile, “How many crocodiles are there in the river?” The boss of crocodile answered, “We are twenty here.” “Where are they?” the rabbit asked for the second time. “What is it for?” the boss of crocodile asked. “All of you are good, nice, gentle and kind, so I want to make a line in order. Later I will know how kind you are,” said the rabbit. Then, the boss of the crocodile called all his friends and asked them to make a line in order from one side to the other side of the river. Just then, the rabbit started to count while jumping from one crocodile to another; one…two…three….four….until twenty, and finally, he thanked all crocodiles because he had crossed the river. 1. The story mainly tells us about ….

a. twenty crocodiles b. the boss of the crocodile c. a rabbit and twenty crocodiles d. a rabbit and the boss of crocodile e. the boss of the crocodile and all his friends 2. We know from the first paragraph that the rabbit

actually wanted …. a. to cross the river

b. to swim across the river c. to meet the boss of crocodile d. to know where the crocodiles are e. to know the number of crocodiles there 3. “All of you are good, nice, gentle, and kind

…”(Paragraph 2) The underlined word is synonymous with …. a. wild b. diligent c. cheerful d. easygoing e. honorable A fox fell into a well and couldn’t get out. By and by a thirsty goat came along. Seeing the fox in the well it asked if the water was good. “Good”, said the fox “It’s the best water I’ve tasted in all my life. Come down and try it yourself.” The goat was thirsty so he got into the well. When he had drunk enough, he looked around but there was no way to get out. Then the fox said, “I have a good idea. You stand on your hind legs and put your forelegs against the side of the well. Then I’ll climb on your back, from there. I’ll step on your horns, and I can get out. And when I’m out, I’ll help you out of the well.” The goat did as he was asked and the fox got on his back and climbed out of the well. Then he coolly walked away. The goat called out loudly after him and reminded him of his promise to help him out. The fox

merely turned to him and said; “If you only had thought carefully about getting out, you wouldn’t have jumped into the well.” The goat felt very sad. He called out loudly. An old man walking nearby heard him and put a plank into the well. The goat got out and thanked the old man. 4. The text tells the story of ….

a. a fox b. a goat c. a fox and a goat d. an old man and the fox e. the goat and an old man

5. Paragraph 2 mainly tells ….

a. how the fox helped the goat b. why the fox got into the well c. how the fox got out of the well d. the fox’s idea how to get out of the well e. how both the goat and the fox got out of the

well 6. “The goat did as he was asked….” (Paragraph 3) What does the above sentence mean?

a. The goat drank enough and locked around. b. The goat came down to the well and drank. c. The goat called out loudly after the fox got

out. d. The goat waited someone who might help

him. e. The goat stood on his hind legs and put his

forelegs against the side of the well. The Police thought that two burglars started the robbery at 151 Pattimura street on Sunday afternoon. The burglars broke into the students’ room while they were going to a football game. They never thought that while they were away, burglars would break into their boarding house. 41. What happened to the students’ room on Sunday

afternoon? a. The police broke it. b. The police ruined it. c. Burglars broke into it. d. Two burglars broke it. e. The students started to ruin it.

42. The burglars broke into the room when the

students …. a. were at a party b. were talking a rest c. were playing football d. were at a football game e. were watching football on TV



43. ‘The burglars broke into the student’s room ….” The underlined phrase means ….

a. broke forcefully b. entered by force c. put into pieces d. easily entered e. came into

44. The students seem to think that ….

a. they had locked their room b. their boarding house was not safe c. their boarding house was in a safe area d. thieves would easily break into their room e. there would be a robbery in their boarding

house The elephant is the largest and strongest of all animals. It is a strange looking animal with its thick legs, huge sides and backs, large hanging ears, a small tail, little eyes, long white tusks and above all it has a long nose, the trunk. The trunk is the elephant’s peculiar feature, and it has various uses. The elephant draws up water by its trunk and can squirt it all over its body like a shower bath. It can also lift leaves and puts them into its mouth. In fact the trunk serves the elephant as a long arm and hand. An elephant looks very clumsy and heavy and yet it can move very quickly. The elephant is a very intelligent animal. Its intelligent combined with its great strength makes it a very useful servant to man and it can be trained to serve in various ways such as carry heavy loads, hunt for tigers and even fight. 45. The third paragraph is mainly about the fact that

…. a. elephants are strong b. elephants can lift logs c. elephants are servants d. elephants are very useful e. elephants must be trained

46. Which of the following is NOT part of the

elephant described in the first paragraph? a. It looks strange. b. It is heavy. c. It is wild. d. It has a trunk. e. It has a small tail.

47. It is stated in the text that the elephant uses the

trunk to do the following, EXCEPT…. a. to eat b. to push c. to drink d. to carry things e. to squirt water over the body

48. “The trunk is the elephant’ a peculiar feature ….” (Paragraph 2)

The underlined word is close in meaning to …. a. large b. strange c. tough d. smooth e. long

49. Nola : Do you know the boy sitting next to the

man with the red polka dot shirt? Neli : He is Denis ….father is a tycoon. Nola : Oh, I see.

a. who b. whom c. whose d. which e. where

50. Ferdi : Do you see the large field over there? Hasan : Yes, what is it for? Ferdi : That’s the land ….is provided for the

elephants to live. a. who b. whom c. where d. which e. whose

51. Bobby : I finally could buy the Chevrolet that

I had dreamed of for years. Withney : Oh, congratulations. Is it the one

….you showed me yesterday? a. whom b. where c. who d. which e. whose

52. Read the following sentences. They are not in a

good order. 1. Enter the 14 digits. 2. How to charge your cell phone card. 3. Dial “222” C or “OK”. 4. Press “1” to get the charge option. 5. The amount of the voucher will be

automatically added onto your card. 6. First scratch the black area. 7. To check the remaining pulse credit dial

*222#. The right arrangement of the sentences above is

…. a. 1 – 7 – 3 – 4 – 6 – 2 – 5 b. 2 – 6 – 3 – 4 – 1 – 5 – 7 c. 3 – 4 – 5 – 7 – 6 – 1 – 2 d. 5 – 3 – 7 – 6 – 4 – 2 – 1 e. 6 – 4 – 1 – 7 – 5 – 2 – 3



53. X : Hi… I am Agung. Nice to meet you. Y : My name is Juli. Nice to meet you, too.

a. This is my friend, Agung. b. Allow me to introduce myself c. Let me introduce you to my friend d. What do you do? e. How are you doing?

54. Retno : I called Joko last night. Andri : What? Retno : I said I ….Joko last night.

a. have called b. had called c. would call d. had to call e. called

55. Iwan has gotten three promotions … at this

company a year ago. a. since he started working b. when he has started working c. before he had started working d. until he is starting working e. after he was starting working

56. Oy : I forgot to bring my dictionary….? Ani : Sure, here it is.

a. Could you lend me yours, please b. This dictionary is yours, isn’t it c. Is your dictionary new d. Could I lend you e. How about you

57. Lusi : Have you heard that Mr. Yayan passed

away last night? Ranto : Really? I don’t believe it. Yesterday I

met him at the wedding party of my neighbor.

Lusi : Yeah, he had a heart attack last night. Ranto : Oh, I’m really sorry to hear that. The underlined expression expresses ….

a. ability b. surprise c. certainty d. possibility e. sympathy

58. Rangga : My friend will hold a mask party next

week. Will you join us? Dion : Sounds interesting! But I have an

appointment with my boss. From the dialogue we know that Dion ….

a. will join Rangga b. won’t join Rangga c. likes to go to the party d. promises to go to the party e. is not interested in going to the party

59. Totty : Dad, can I use your car? I want to borrow Ari’s camera.

Daddy : …? I need the car to go to the barber. a. Why don’t you use your motor cycle b. Why don’t you lend Fuad’s c. Is Ari’s camera a good one d. Does Ari have a camera e. Does Ari want the car

60. Jack : Did Jane call you? Bob : What? Jack : I wanted to know if ….

a. you had called Jane. b. Jane called you. c. you called Jane. d. you have called Jane. e. Jane had called you.

61. Anto : You look very busy with your work…? Ani : Sure. If you don’t mind. How kind you

are. a. Can you do me a favour b. Can I help you c. Would you like to help me d. Do you like to help me e. Are you tired

62. Andri : May I use your car to Rina’s house, Dad?

Father : Of course. Be careful. From the underlined words we may conclude that

Andri asks for …. to his father to use his car. a. permission b. agreement c. possibility d. suggestion e. advice

63. Father : When will you harvest your crops? Adi : Next week. Father : I hope you will have a bumper crop. The underlined sentence expresses….

a. desire b. permission c. certainly d. expectation e. sympathy

64. Ridwan : I’m afraid my parents’ rice fields

were damaged by the flood. Pak Yusuf : Oh, I’m sorry to hear that. The underlined words express….

a. sorry b. apology c. sympathy d. intolerance e. complaint



65. X : Good morning, Madam. Anything I can do for you?

Y : Yes, please. I need a T-shirt size 15. The dialogue likely occurs….

a. at home b. at a store c. at a tailor d. at a school e. at the office

66. Lisa : What is your plan for the holiday? Wita : I have no idea. Lisa : What about having a picnic to Lake

Toba, Wita? Wita : I’d love to, but I have to attend a

seminar. What are the speakers talking about?

a. Going to Wita’s house. b. Attending a seminar. c. Going to Lake Toba. d. Spending their time. e. Planning to spend a holiday.

67. Galih : Dody, may I borrow your mobile

phone? I want to call my girlfriend. Dody : I am afraid not. I am charging the

battery. The underlined utterance expresses ….

a. giving information b. asking for explanation c. giving a permission d. refusing a permission e. asking for information

68. Mom : Girls, make up your beds! Nindy : What did mom say to you just now? Ninin : She asked us…our beds.

a. make up b. made up c. to make up d. making up e. should make up

69. Budi : Good morning, Rina. Did you see Susi? Rina : Yes, I did. She … to Mr. Yusuf when I

entered the office just now. a. talks b. talked c. has talked d. would talk e. was talking

70. Tony : The Indonesian Olympics contingent

had just arrived from Athens. They brought one gold medal, one silver and two bronze medals.

Daddy : Yeah, we have to be proud of them. The underlined sentence is used to express ….

a. apology b. pleasure c. pride d. certainty e. satisfaction

71. Dinda : Tina, ….take this document to the

Accounting. Department? Tina : Yes, certainly. I’m free now.

a. can’t you please b. is it possible for you to c. may I tell you to d. can I tell you to e. should I ask you to

72. A : How was the result of your test? B : I am really….I got a good score.

a. disappointed b. appreciated c. excited d. satisfied e. dedicated

73. Agus : Send me a postcard of Borobudur, Budi. Rini : What did Agus say to you, Budi? Budi : ….

a. She told me to send him postcard of Borobudur.

b. I told her to send him postcard of Borobudur. c. He told me to send him postcard of

Borobudur. d. He told you to send him postcard of

Borobudur. e. I told him to send him postcard of Borobudur.

74. Andi : Which book do you look for? Sari : I look for …..

a. Which book I buy? b. A book which I brought yesterday c. Which book did you buy yesterday? d. A book which it is about dream e. Which book do you ask me, Andi?



Latihan Soal Text 1 Whales are the largest animal on earth. Bigger than elephants, they may grow 95 feet long, and weight 150 tons. A baby blue whale, just born, can be 23 feet long and weight 3 tons. Although whales live in the oceans and can swim like fish, they are not fish. They are mammals, like cows and elephants. Unlike fish, they bear young alive net as eggs. Their babies live on their mother’s milk. They breathe through their lungs and hold their breathe when they go under water. If they cannot come to the surface to breathe fresh air, they will drown. They are warm blooded. Fish, however, lay eggs, breathe oxygen in the water and are cold blooded. Whales live in all the oceans. In the winter some of them go to warm waters to breed and in the summer most of them go to cold waters to feed. There are two kinds of whales, whales with teeth (toothed whales) and whales without teeth (baleen whales). The toothed whales eat fish and squid, which they can catch with their teeth, although they swallow their food without chewing it. The baleen whales eat plankton (small sea animals and plants). When they find plankton, they open their mouths and swim into the plankton. When they close their mouths, they squeeze out the water and swallow the plankton. Whales have few enemies. Only human beings and the killer whales attack whales. And whales do not seem to fight among themselves. They usually live from 20 to 30 years. 1. Which of the following is TRUE about whales?

a. Whales are generally 95 feet long and weigh 150 tons

b. Big animals living in the ocean tend to be their enemies

c. like fish, whales can live in all kinds of waters

d. Their life span is usually longer than human beings

e. A new baby whale may weigh one-fife-teeth o its mother

2. The organization of the text is ….

a. identification – description b. general classification – description c. general classification to position the reader –

explanation d. orientation – event (s) – reorientation e. goal – material – step (s)

3. A suitable title for the text is …. a. Large Animals on Earth b. Differences between Whales and Elephants c. Whales, the Biggest Animal on Earth d. Similarity between Fish and Whales e. The Life of Whales in the Oceans

4. The differences between whales and fish is that

whales …. a. do not have to come to the surface to get fresh

air b. deliver their young like elephants do c. will die if they cannot get any oxygen in the

water d. are mammals that are cold blooded e. can easily breathe when they are under water

5. Whales occasionahy live in warm waters ….to get

more food a. to get more food b. for reproduction c. to avoid winter d. for fresh air e. to feed their babies

6. Which one of the following statements is FALSE

based on the text about? a. Whales are mammals b. Whales give birth to a baby whale c. Whales lay eggs d. Whales breast feed their babies e. Each kind of whale eat different kind of food

7. From the text we may conclude that ….

a. a whale can eat both squid and plankton b. toothed whales chew their food before

swallowing it c. the two types of whale live in different waters d. baleen whales swallow of the water

containing plankton e. each type of whale eats a specific kind of

food Text 2

BINGKUANG Bingkuang, a symbol of Padang, is a kind of tropical fruit in Indonesia. It is not a seasonal fruit. This fruit grows underground. It’s similar to potato but the difference is in growing it. With bingkuang, the pant’s flower seed is planted in the ground. Bingkuang has an off-white skin. It has white fresh. The longer it is kept. The sweeter taste it will have. If the skin is damaged it will not rot easily. This fruit can help prevent stomach and colon disease. It can also help to lower body temperature if someone has fever. It can help make our



skin soft and smooth. It is often used as ingredients of traditional food like rujak and sari buah. 8. Where is the original of Bingkuang?

a. Padang b. Java c. madura d. Jakarta e. Irian Jaya

9. The TRUE statement based on the passage above

is …. a. bingkuang doesn’t have any similarities to

potato b. we can find Bingkuang in London c. bingkuang is easy to decay d. bingkuang doesn’t have any advantages for

human being e. bingkuang only grow in tropical climate place

Text 3

Patty The Milkmaid

Patty the Milkmaid was going to market carrying her milk in a pail on her head. As she went along she began calculating what she would do with the money she would get for the milk. “I’ll buy some fowls from Farmer Brown,” said she, “And they will lay eggs each morning, which I will sell to the parson’s wife. With the money that I get from the sale of these eggs I’ll buy myself a new dimity frock and a chip hat; and when I go to market, won’t all the young men come up and speak to me! Polly Shaw will be that jealous; but I don’t care. I shall just look at her ad toss my head like this.” As she spoke she tossed her head back the Pail fell off it and all the milk was spilt. So she had to go home and tell her mother what had occurred. “Ah, my child,” said the mother, “Do not count your chickens before they are hatched.” 10. Patty’s job is ….

a. milking a cow b. selling milk c. selling chicken d. selling eggs e. selling hat

11. The character of Patty is ….

a. diligent b. lazy c. arrogant d. greedy e. jealous

12. The climax of the text is when …. a. Patty went to the market to sell the milk b. Patty was imagining her future c. Patty fell her pail off d. Patty went home sad e. Patty’s mother advised her

13. The characters in text are ….

a. Patty and the Milkmaid b. Patty and farmer Brown c. Patty and the Parson’s wife d. Patty and Polly Shaw e. Patty and her mother

14. “Patty the Milkmaid was going to market carrying

her milk in a pail on her head.” The other name of pail is ….

a. pale b. bucket c. box d. glass e. pan

Text 4 A Lion and a Mouse A lion was awakened from sleep by a mouse running over his face. Rising up angrily, he caught him and was about to kill him when the mouse piteously entered, saying, “If you would only spare my life, I would be sure to repay your kindness.” The lion laughed and let him go. It happened shortly after this that the lion was caught by hunters, who bound with him with strops to the ground. The mouse, recognizing his roar, came, gnawed the rope with his teeth, and set him free, exclaiming, “You ridiculed the idea of my ever being able to help you, expecting to receive from me any repayment of your favor; now you know that it is possible for even a mouse to confer on a big lion.”

(Source: Encarta) 15. The text above is a ….

a. recount text b. procedure c. narrative d. hortatory exposition e. analytical exposition

16. The characters in the text above are ….

a. the lion and the hunter b. the mouse and the hunter c. the lion and the mouse d. the lion and the farmer e. the mouse and the farmer



17. The orientation of the text above is stated in …. a. 1st paragraph b. 2nd paragraph c. 1st sentence d. 2nd sentence e. last sentence

18. The reorientation of the text is ….

a. the lion ate the mouse b. the mouse helped the lion c. the hunter killed the tiger d. the lion helped the mouse e. the hunter helped the lion

Text 5 There are many different causes of car accidents in the United States. Sometimes accidents are caused by bad weather. Ice or snow can make toads very dangerous. Accidents also can result from problems with the car. Even a small problem like a flat tire can be serious. Bad roads are another cause of accidents. Some accidents are caused by drinking too much alcohol. 19. The social function of the text above is ….

a. to tell the readers about the accident in the US b. to persuade the reader that car accidents are

caused by some causes c. to amuse the reader with car accident stories d. to tell the reader the step to avoid car accident e. to retell past stories of car accidents

20. What is the paragraph about?

a. problems with car engines b. result of car accidents c. the frequency of car accidents d. weather conditions in the US e. car accidents and their causes

21. Car accidents in the US are caused by the

following, except …. a. drunken drivers b. bad roads c. unskilled drivers d. icy roads e. a flat tire

Text 6 Hurricanes generally occur in the North Atlantic from May through November, with the pack of the hurricane season in September, only rarely will they occur from December through April in that part of the ocean. The main reason for the occurrence of hurricane during this period is that the temperature on the water surface is at its warmest and the humidity of the air is at its highest. Of the tropical storms that occur each year in the North Atlantic, only about five, on the average, are

powerful enough to be called hurricanes. To be classified as a hurricane, a tropical storm must have winds reaching speed of at least 117 kilometers per hour, but the winds are often much stronger than that; the winds of intense hurricanes can easily surpass 240 kilometers per hour. 22. The social function of the text above is ….

a. to describe hurricanes b. to tell event before hurricanes come c. to show how to make hurricanes d. to persuade some one to create hurricanes e. to amuse the reader with hurricanes stories

23. The passage mainly discusses ….

a. the number of hurricanes in a year b. the strength of hurricanes c. the weather in the north Atlantic d. hurricanes in a certain part of the world e. hurricanes and disaster of the world

24. Which of the following is TRUE according to the

text? a. Three are always hurricanes in the North

Atlantic All year round. b. Extremely warm weather and high humidity

can cause hurricanes. c. Very strong winds are the result of

hurricanes. d. Hurricanes occur every month from may to

November. e. Tropical countries have a lot of intense

hurricanes. Text 7 Have you ever been humiliated by a little girl? Last week, my four year old daughter, Sally, was invited to a children party. I decided to take her by train. Sally was excited because she has never traveled on in train before. She sat near the window and asked question about any thing she saw. Suddenly, a middle-aged lady came into out compartment and sat opposite to sally. Hallo, little girl,” she said. Sally did lady was dressed, but looked at her curiously. The lady was dressed in a blue coat and a large, funny hat. After the train had left the station, the lady opened her handbag and took out her compact. She then began to make up her face. “Why are you doing that?” Sally asked. “To make my self beautiful,” the lady answered. She put away her compact and smiled kindly. “But you away still ugly,” Sally said. Sally was amused, but I was very embarrassed.



25. Where did the incident happen? a. at home b. in the bus c. in the train d. at the bus station e. at the railway station 26. Where did Sally want to go?

a. She wanted to go her school. b. She was going to go to her friend’s birthday

party c. She would go to a wedding party d. She went to the zoo e. She was going to go to beauty salon

27. “Suddenly, a middle aged lady came into out

compartment and sat opposite to Sally.” The underlined word has the same meaning with …. a. behind b. in front of c. next to d. beside e. far away

28. “Suddenly, a middle-aged lady came into out

compartment and sat opposite Sally.” The underhand phrase means a lady whose age is around …. a. 1 – 5 years old b. 5 – 10 years old c. 11 – 20 years old d. 20 – 30 years old e. 40 – 50 years old

29. The purpose of the text is ….

a. to inform the readers of the incident in the train

b. to entertain the readers with the incident c. to explain the reader about the incident in the

train d. to describe the character of sally e. to persuade the reader to take a train

30. Who writes the text above?

a. Sally’s mother b. Sally c. The middle-aged lady d. The conductor e. Another person in the train

Text 8 He was a young father, wheeling the pram trough the garden while the baby was screaming its head off. “Take it easy, Jason,” he said calmly, “There’s nothing to worry about. A middle-aged woman noticed his soothing manner and marveled at the new breed of young husband.

When the baby screamed even louder she heard him say,” Cool it, Jason, don’t get excited, lad, cool it soon.” Touched by his gentle manner the woman leaned into the pram and cooed, “There, there, Jason. What’s bothering you?” “Excuse me, lady,” said the father, “That’s Jeremy, I’m

Jason.” 31. Jason was the name of ….

a. the baby b. the father c. the woman d. the old woman e. the middles-aged woman

32. The code of the text above is ….

a. when the young father took his baby for a walk

b. when the baby cried loudly c. when the woman looked at him d. when the woman tried to help the man e. when the man explained about their names

33. The text above is told by ….

a. the young father b. the baby c. the woman d. a third person e. the young mother

Teacher : Have you done your assignment? Mimi : Yes, ma’am. Here it is Teacher : Let me see, mm … what do you want to

draw here Mini : It’s village ma’am. These is a rice field, a

river, and a mounth. Teacher : It’s very good. I like it. What is it on the

rice field ? Mimi : It’s a buffalo, ma’am. It is ploughing the

field. Teacher : I see. Keep up your work Mimi : Thanks, ma’am 34. From the dialogue above we know that it was a/an

… class a. English b. Art c. Physics d. Chemistry e. Maths 35. The teacher feels … about Mimi’s work. a. sad b. dissatisfied c. satisfied d. unhappy e. disappointed



36. What will Mimi do next? a. play around b. study chemist c. continue drawing d. count her money e. sing loudly 37. Father : Where have you been? You made us

worried! Lina : I’m sorry, dad From the dialogue above, we know that father

expresses …. a. Sympathy b. Apology c. Pleasure d. Anger e. relief

38. Teacher : Bimo Bimo : Yes, ma’am Teacher : this is your test result Bimo : I got nine! I’m glad about it. My

mother won’t be angry with me Bimo is expressing ….

a. Worry b. Anxiety c. Anger d. Rrelief e. sadness

39. “Ouch” “What happened, son?” “I cut my finger white cutting this carrot.” “You should have been careful. Here, put the

medicine on it.” “Yes, mom” From the sentence above, the son expresses ….

a. Pain b. Happiness c. Sadness d. Relief e. pleasure

40. Mother : What is this? Look at this mess! Why don’t you make your bed? Son : I’ll do it right away, mom. From the dialogue above, the mother expresses

…. a. Happiness b. Love c. Endearment d. Anger e. satisfaction

41. Winna : Tina, look at this queue for the ticket. I have to wait for a long time.

Tina : Come on, don’t be mad. It’s common if we have to queue to get a ticket for a new movie.

From the dialogue above, we know that Tina …. a. is angry b. resolves anger c. is disappointed d. agrees with Winna e. asks for information

42. Nina : Oh, I’m glad we finally catch this

bus. We won’t be late. Nani : Yes, you’re right. From the dialogue above we know that Nina is

expressing …. a. Pain b. agreement c. relief

d. sympathy e. sorrow 43. Nube : Congratulations, Maia. your design won the contest. Maia : Thanks, Nube. I’m very glad about

it. The underlined phrase expresses ….

a. pain b. pleasure c. relief d. sympathy

e. sorrow 44. Yosie : Ouch! Icha : What’s up, Yos? Yosie : I cut my finger Icha : Let me get you some medicine. From the dialogue above, Yosie is expressing ….

a. pain b. pleasure c. relief d. sympathy e. sorrow

ANNOUNCEMENT

OSIS Committee are expected to attend the meeting on: Day/date : Saturday, February 23, 2007 Time : 13.00 Place : OSIS room Theme : Preparation for school anniversary Note: All committee must come Chairman Akbar



45. Who writes the announcement above? a. The headmaster does b. The teacher does c. The OSIS chairman does d. The OSIS Committee does e. The secretary of OSIS does

46. When the teacher came into the classroom, he saw

all the students …. a. did the exam b. doing the exam c. had to the exam d. must do the exam e. have done the exam

47. The workers,...that their wages were not raises,

went on strike. a. they know b. they knew c. were knowing d. realizing e. realized

48. You can trust him, because I have heard him ….

a. telling the truth b. told the truth c. was telling the truth d. to tell the truth e. would tell the truth

49. She bought ... from the exhibition.

a. an old interesting French painting b. a French old interesting painting c. an interesting old French painting d. a French interesting old painting e. an interesting French old painting

50. My grandfather drives ….

a. an old little red car b. an old red little car c. a red little old car d. a red old little car e. a little old red car



Latihan Soal A Number of devices are available to help in the effort to quit smoking. Nicotine patches are small, nicotine-containing adhesive substances that are applied to the skin. The nicotine is slowly absorbed through the skin and enters the blood stream. Over time, the nicotine dose is lessened and eventually the craving for nicotine is alleviated. Nicotine gum works in a similar manner, providing small doses of nicotine when chewed. The benefits of smoking cessation include the immediate reduction of health hazards for the smoker, lower health insurance premiums, and easier admission to social activities and institutions that ban smoking. Nonetheless, to quit smoking is difficult, most likely because smokers crave the effect of the nicotine in the smoke. In a 1988 report, the U.S. surgeon general declared nicotine to be an addictive drug comparable to other addictive substances in its ability to induce dependence. The report also called the monetary and human costs far greater than those attributable to cocaine, alcohol, or heroin. Some recent evidence supports this claim, indicating that the overall mortality attributable to tobacco smoking in the United States is about 20 times that of the mortality due to all other addictive drugs combined. 1. What is the main purpose of the text? a. To persuade people to stop smoking. b. To inform people of ways to stop and shy they

should stop smoking. c. To recent evidence support this claim. d. To show people of the danger of smoking. e. To convince people to use nicotine patches to

stop smoking. 2. Here are some facts about nicotine patches,

except: a. They are used by placing it upon the skin. b. They can be absorbed trough the skin. c. They can help smokers quit smoking. d. They help smokers decrease their dependency

on nicotine. e. The benefits of smoking cessation include the

immediate reduction of health hazards. 3. The text concludes that nicotine.... a. is an additive drug comparable b. is a dangerous as cocaine, alcohol, or heroin c. is lessened when smokers chew gums d. will be absorbed through the skin e. are available to help smokers quit smoking

4. The advantage of stop smoking are the following, except:

a. Ex-smokers can avoid some diseases. b. Smoking in USA is about 20 times. c. Ex-smokers can have better social life. d. Ex-smokers can pay lower health insurance

premium. e. Ex-smokers can be admitted to social

institutions. 5. Which of the following statements is true? a. To quit smoking is not easy, that’s why most

smokers crave the effect of the nicotine in the smoke.

b. The nicotine doesn't lessened and eventually the craving for nicotine isn't alleviated.

c. U.S. declared nicotine to be an addictive drug less addictive that other addictive substance in its ability to induce dependence.

d. In the U.S., the overall mortality because of tobacco smoking greater than that of the mortality because of cocaine, alcohol, or heroin.

e. In the U.S., the monetary and human costs because of cigarettes are equal to those caused by other addictive substances.

TOKYO: A Japanese man who stole valuable king crabs from a fish marker was arrested after accidentally locking himself inside a freezer, a police spokesman said on Tuesday. Unemployed Hirohisa Matsumoto, 32, allegedly broke into a fish marker’s freezes storage in Kagoshima, southern Japan, early on December 23 last year. Police said Matsumoto had netted ¥42,000 (US$400) worth of king crabs, and other seafood. However, it is alleged when back into the freezer to fetch more, the door closed, locking him inside. Police said Matsumoto was trapped in the freezer, where the temperature was minus 16 degrees Celcius (3.2 degrees Fahrenheit), for about 20 minutes. He used his mobile phone to call a friend, who then asked a security guard to open the freezer door, police said. Investigators believed the man could have died had his mobile phone failed to work.. – AFP

6. The following statements are true, except: a. Horohisa Matsumoto stole crab for the first

time. b. Hirohisa Matsumoto was lucky. c. Hirohisa Matsumoto went into the freezer

more than once. d. Hirohisa Matsumoto was alone when he stole

the crabs. e. Hirohisa's old is 32.



7. The topic of the above text is.... a. Matsumoto was trapped in the freezer. b. A criminal who was trapped inside of a fish

market. c. A Japanese man who stole valuable king crabs

from a fish market. d. A. Japanese man who allegedly broke into a

fish market’s freezer storage in Kagoshima. e. A crab thief who was arrested after being

rescued from a freezer. 8. The meaning of the last sentence of the text is

that.... a. The man died in the freezer because he had a

mobile phone. b. The man was lucky that his mobile phone can

be used to call for help. c. The man was arrested because he call a

security guard to rescue him from the freezer. d. The man will die. e. The man was dead when his mobile phone

failed to work. A golf course is divided into 18 sections, called holes. The standard course is about 6500 to 7000 yr (about 5900 to 6400 m). The individual holes may vary in length from 100 to 600 yd (about 90 to 550 m). Each hole has at one end a starting pint known as a tee end, imbedded in the ground at the other end and marked by a flag, a cup or cylindrical container (also called a hole) into which the ball must be propelled in order to complete play at each hole. The cup is usually made of metal or plastic, 4.2 in (10.8 cm) in diameter, and at least 4 in (10 cm) deep. 9. The topic of the above text is.... a. The cup. b. Golf course standards c. World standards’ golf course d. Golf course’s facilities e. Golf course is divided into 18 sector 10. The following sentences abut golf course are true,

except: a. Golf courses have 18 holes. b. Golf courses diver in length and width. c. Golf courses have only one tee. d. Golf courses have tees, which are marked by

flags. e. Golf is an expensive game. A month ago, I had no idea that on Saturday afternoon in November I’d be hanging 30 meters above the ground and enjoying it. Now I looked down at the river far below me, and realized why people love rock-climbing. My friend Matt and I had arrived at the Activity Center on Friday evening. The accommodation wasn’t

wonderful, but we had everything we needed (beds, blankets, food), and we were pleases to be out of the city and in the fresh air. On Saturday morning, we met the other ten members of our group. Cameron had come along with two friends, Kevin and Simon, while Sister Carole and Lynn had come with Amanda. We had come from various places and none of us knew the area. We knew we were going to spend the weekend outdoors, but none of us was sure exactly how. Half of us spend the morning caving while the others went rock-climbing and then we changed at lunchtime. Matt and I went to the caves first. Climbing out was harder than going in, but after a good deal of pushing, we were out at last – covered in mud but pleased and excited by what we’ve done. 11. What is the writer trying to do in the text? a. Going to spend the weekend outdoors. b. Advertise the Activity Center. c. Describe some people she met. d. Say how she spend some free time. e. Explain how to do certain outdoor sports. 12. What can the reader learn from the text? a. How to apply for a place at the Center. b. What sort of activities you can experience at

the Center. c. When to depend on other people at the Center. d. Which time of year is best to attend the Center. e. If we want to go hiking is on Sunday. 13. How do you think the writer might describe her

weekend? a. boring c. relaxing e. unpleasant b. interesting d. frightening 14. What do we learn about the group? a. They had already chosen their preferred

activities. b. They're boring people. c. Some of them had been there before. d. They came from the same city. e. Some of them already knew each other. 15. .... We had everything we needed.... The word

“we” on the second paragraph refers to.... a. Matt and Simon b. Matt and Carole c. Mat and Simon d. Matt and I e. Matt and Amanda



When we buy canned or bottled food products at the grocer’s or the supermarket, we will find out that there are some additives added to the main nutrients. An additive is a nonnutritive substance intentionally added to food, generally in small quantities, to improve appearance, flavour, storage properties, etc. A group of food additives includes vitamins, amino acids, and minerals, which are added to foodstuffs to compensate for losses occurring during processing or to provide additional sources in diets that might otherwise be deficient in such nutrients. Examples of their use include enrichment of margarine with the addition of vitamin A, and niacinamide to flour or bread. Salt often has a small amount of iodine added to it to avoid a diet deficiency that can cause goiter development. Appearance is an important factor in food appeal, and legislation in most countries permits the addition of both natural and synthetic colouring matter based on the colouring standards issued by the Food and Agricultural Organization (FAO) and World Health Organization (WHO). Flavouring materials are added to basic foodstuffs to provide a characteristic product flavour or to supplement or modify the original flavour. Most flavouring materials are still of natural origin, but progress in organic chemistry has made it possible to analyze flavouring materials and to synthesize products similar with those found in nature. Flavour can also be influenced by the addition of flavour enhancer as monosodium glutamate, which intensifies perception of flavouring. 16. Which statement is true according to the text? a. Canned or bottled food is better in quality than

fresh food. b. Synthetic colouring is the same as natural one. c. To improve the appearance, flavouring

materials are added. d. For the shake of storage, antimicrobial

preservatives are not important. e. Canned food can last long because of the

antimicrobial preservatives. 17. Paragraph 4 tells us about.... a. kinds of flavouring materials b. the use of flavouring materials c. what flavouring material is d. the similarity between natural and synthetic

flavouring e. the difference between natural and synthetic

flavouring

18. What is the additive added to the food for? a. to produce better products b. to make the consumers satisfied c. to put the food in the cans or bottles d. to improve the appearance, flavour, and

storage properties e. to prevent the products from physical factors 19. The main information of the text is about.... a. Additives are very important in food products. b. There are no regulations in adding additives to

the food products. c. All canned or bottled food products contain

additives. d. We must buy canned or bottled food products

in the supermarket. e. It is better for us to consume the canned food

products. 20. What does “it” in the second paragraph refer to? a. salt b. goiter c. vitamin A d. niacinamide e. margarine Put the verbs into the correct form, past continuous or past simple! 21. Donny.... to his walkman when I.... a. were listening, arrived b. was listening, arrived c. was listened, arrived d. was listening, arrives e. was listening, arriving 22. What.... this time yesterday? a. were you do c. were you did e. were you doing b. was you doing d. was you done 23. How fast.... when the accident.... a. were you driving, happened b. you was driving, happened c. was you driving, happened d. were you driving, happens e. you were driving, happened 24. I.... along the street when suddenly I.... footsteps

behind me. a. walked, was hearing b. was walking, heard c. was walking, hearded d. walked, were hearing e. were walking, heard



25. When I was young, I.... to be an artist. a. wants b. wanted c. wants to d. wanting e. want to Ultraviolet light means the invisible part of the spectrum beyond violet. This light has always been regarded as very useful because it is uses to cure certain skin diseases, kill bacteria, detect counterfeit money, form vitamins, etc. Along with the increasingly extensive use of computers in financial activities, ultraviolet light has been widely applied by banks to identify the signatures of their customers in passbook. When a customer opens a new account with a bank, the bank teller always asks him to sign on a card placed in the signature column of a passbook. When the card is removed, the trace of his signature will be left. This can be used to compare with the signature on the customer’s withdrawal slip under ultraviolet light. Ultraviolet light certainly has many practical applications, but it may also be harmful to human beings on some occasions. To everyone’s knowledge, the direct impact of the light on the eyes for an excessive length of time may blind a person. Even though it can cure certain skin diseases, it is also very harmful to the skin. A study just completed in the United States says that the light may cause skin cancer. The ultraviolet rays of the sun have been ranked as the third most dangerous cancer-causing agent after alcohol and tobacco. It is high time to warn sun-worshipper in the guest for a bronzed look to be careful of excessive and uncontrolled exposure to hen sun. 26. We may conclude that the main information of the

text about.... a. the advantages and disadvantages of ultraviolet

light b. the use of ultraviolet light in business c. the application of ultraviolet rays on human

being d. the effect of ultraviolet rays on human being e. the danger of ultraviolet light to people’s

health 27. Which of the following statement about ultraviolet

light is TRUE according to the text? a. Ultraviolet is uses by banks for computers b. The position ultraviolet rays is above the

spectrum c. Skin diseases can only be caused by ultraviolet

rays d. Ultraviolet light which is part of the spectrum

cannot be seen e. Ultraviolet light is one of the existing vitamins

28. We may conclude that the writer’s main purpose in writing the text is to....

a. Encourage people to get the best advantage of ultraviolet rays.

b. Explain that sunrays consist of violet and ultraviolet rays.

c. Introduce the effective use of ultraviolet light in banks.

d. Warn people against the alarming dangers caused by sunrays.

e. Ask people to avoid the use of ultraviolet light as mush as possible.

29. We benefit from ultraviolet rays as they can.... a. sign customers’ passbooks b. check customers’ deposits c. detect false signatures d. be a component in medicines e. cure a particular kind of cancer 30. Ultraviolet rays may endanger people who.... a. take vitamins regularly b. consume alcohol and tobacco c. stay indoors d. like sun bathing e. have skin cancer 31. ‘I haven’t heard anything from Leni.’ ‘....’ a. So have I b. Either have I c. Me, neither d. I haven’t also e. Neither have I 32. The chairman of the organization did not attend

the meeting, and.... a. the secretary didn’t either b. nor the secretary did c. the secretary did too d. so did the secretary e. neither didn’t the secretary 33. “I didn’t like the film that we saw.” “....” a. So didn’t I b. I didn’t either c. So can I d. I didn’t so e. Neither I didn’t 34. If you are able to do that job, and.... a. so do I b. so will I c. so can I d. so am I e. so must I



35. Tono : ‘My brother has just bought a new motorcycle.’

Parto : ‘What a coincidence, .... a. my brother has too b. so does my brother c. my brother also did d. also my brother e. my brother does to 36. Jane is interested in literature, and so is Bob. This sentence can be rewritten as: a. Jane is interested in literature, but Bob is not. b. Bob is interested in literature, but Jane is not. c. Both Jane and Bob are interested in literature. d. Jane is interested in literature, and Bob too. e. Neither Jane nor Bob is interested in literature. 37. ‘Yanti didn’t like the movie and Tati didn’t

either.’ It means:.... a. Yanti and Tati didn’t like to movie b. Yanti didn’t like the movie as much as Tati did. c. Only Yanti didn’t like the movie. d. Yanti didn’t like the movie but Tati did. e. One of the two girls didn’t like the movie. 38. She never seems to care,.....? a. is he b. has she c. does she d. doesn’t he e. won’t she 39. There is someone at the door, ....? a. isn’t there b. will you c. can’t you d. isn’t it e. isn’t he 40. Shut the door, ....? a. do you b. will you c. can’t you d. don’t you e. could you 41. Let’s go to the movie, ....? a. do we b. can’t we c. shouldn’t we d. shall we e. wouldn’t we

42. His name is Paul, isn’t ....? a. he b. that c. it d. his e. so 43. She’s been very kind, ....? a. doesn’t she b. hasn’t she c. won’t we d. wasn’t she e. hadn’t she 44. The dishes we had for lunch were all delicious,

....? a. didn’t they b. were they c. weren’t they d. hadn’t they e. had they 45. “You didn’t come to class yesterday, did you?” “....” a. Yes, I didn’t b. But I have c. But I did d. Did I? e. Yes, I have Paris is the capital of a European nation of France. It is also one of the most beautiful and the most famous cities in the world Paris is called the city of light. It is also an international fashion center. What stylish women are wearing in Paris will be worn by women all over the world. Paris is also a famous world center of education. For instance, it is the headquarters of UNESCO, the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization. The Seine River divides the city into two parts. Thirty-two bridges cross this scenic river. The oldest and perhaps most well-known is the Pont Neuf, which was built in the sixteenth century. The Sorbonne, a famous university, is located on the left bank (south side) of the river. The beautiful white church Sacre Coeur lives on the top of the hill called Montmartre on the right bank (north side) of the Seine. There are many other famous places in Paris, such as the famous museum the Louvre as well the cathedral of Notre Dame. However, the most famous landmark in this city must be the Eiffel Tower. Paris is named after a group of people called the Parisii. They built a small village on an island in the middle of the Seine River about two thousands years ago. This island, called the Ile de la Cité, is where Notre Dame is located. Today around eight million people live in the Paris area.



46. The topic of the text is.... a. France, a European nation b. The Seine River c. The city of Paris d. Education in France e. French culture 47. Where is the Sacre Coeur located? a. In the city of light b. Next to the Sorbonne University c. On the southern side of the river d. On the top of the hill mountain e. Outside Paris 48. According to the text which of the following

statements is TRUE about Pont Neuf? a. Pont Neuf is one of the oldest universities. b. Pont Neuf is located near Montmartre. c. Pont Neuf separates the Seina River from the

city. d. Pont Neuf is a bridge crossing the Seine

River. e. Pont Neuf is located on the south side of the

Seine. 49. From the text, we know that Notre Dame is

located .... a. on the left bank b. on the right bank c. on neiter bank d. near the Louvre e. outside the city of Paris 50. Which of the following statements is NOT

TRUE? a. The name Paris originated from the name of

the inhabitants of the Ile de la Cite. b. French people were called Parisii two

thousand years ago. c. Paris was the name of a small village in the

middle of the Seine River. d. In ancient times, Paris was on an island called

Ile de la Cité. e. Ile de la Cité used to be an island located in

the middle of the Seine River



Latihan Soal Text 1 Whales are the largest animal on earth. Bigger than elephants, they may grow 95 feet long, and weight 150 tons. A baby blue whale, just born, can be 23 feet long and weight 3 tons. Although whales live in the oceans and can swim like fish, they are not fish. They are mammals, like cows and elephants. Unlike fish, they bear young alive net as eggs. Their babies live on their mother’s milk. They breathe through their lungs and hold their breathe when they go under water. If they cannot come to the surface to breathe fresh air, they will drown. They are warm blooded. Fish, however, lay eggs, breathe oxygen in the water and are cold blooded. Whales live in all the oceans. In the winter some of them go to warm waters to breed and in the summer most of them go to cold waters to feed. There are two kinds of whales, whales with teeth (toothed whales) and whales without teeth (baleen whales). The toothed whales eat fish and squid, which they can catch with their teeth, although they swallow their food without chewing it. The baleen whales eat plankton (small sea animals and plants). When they find plankton, they open their mouths and swim into the plankton. When they close their mouths, they squeeze out the water and swallow the plankton. Whales have few enemies. Only human beings and the killer whales attack whales. And whales do not seem to fight among themselves. They usually live from 20 to 30 years. 1. Which of the following is TRUE about whales?

a. Whales are generally 95 feet long and weigh 150 tons

b. Big animals living in the ocean tend to be their enemies

c. like fish, whales can live in all kinds of waters d. Their life span is usually longer than human

beings e. A new baby whale may weigh one-fife-teeth o

its mother 2. The organization of the text is ….

a. identification – description b. general classification – description c. general classification to position the reader –

explanation d. orientation – event (s) – reorientation e. goal – material – step (s)

3. A suitable title for the text is ….

a. Large Animals on Earth b. Differences between Whales and Elephants c. Whales, the Biggest Animal on Earth d. Similarity between Fish and Whales e. The Life of Whales in the Oceans

4. The differences between whales and fish is that whales …. a. do not have to come to the surface to get fresh

air b. deliver their young like elephants do c. will die if they cannot get any oxygen in the

water d. are mammals that are cold blooded e. can easily breathe when they are under water

5. Whales occasionahy live in warm waters ….to get

more food a. to get more food b. for reproduction c. to avoid winter d. for fresh air e. to feed their babies

6. Which one of the following statements is FALSE

based on the text about? a. Whales are mammals b. Whales give birth to a baby whale c. Whales lay eggs d. Whales breast feed their babies e. Each kind of whale eat different kind of food

7. From the text we may conclude that ….

a. a whale can eat both squid and plankton b. toothed whales chew their food before

swallowing it c. the two types of whale live in different waters d. baleen whales swallow of the water

containing plankton e. each type of whale eats a specific kind of

food Text 2

BINGKUANG

Bingkuang, a symbol of Padang, is a kind of tropical fruit in Indonesia. It is not a seasonal fruit. This fruit grows underground. It’s similar to potato but the difference is in growing it. With bingkuang, the pant’s flower seed is planted in the ground. Bingkuang has an off-white skin. It has white fresh. The longer it is kept. The sweeter taste it will have. If the skin is damaged it will not rot easily. This fruit can help prevent stomach and colon disease. It can also help to lower body temperature if someone has fever. It can help make our skin soft and smooth. It is often used as ingredients of traditional food like rujak and sari buah.



8. Where is the original of Bingkuang? a. Padang b. Java c. madura d. Jakarta e. Irian Jaya

9. The TRUE statement based on the passage above

is …. a. bingkuang doesn’t have any similarities to

potato b. we can find Bingkuang in London c. bingkuang is easy to decay d. bingkuang doesn’t have any advantages for

human being e. bingkuang only grow in tropical climate place

Text 3

Patty The Milkmaid Patty the Milkmaid was going to market carrying her milk in a pail on her head. As she went along she began calculating what she would do with the money she would get for the milk. “I’ll buy some fowls from Farmer Brown,” said she, “And they will lay eggs each morning, which I will sell to the parson’s wife. With the money that I get from the sale of these eggs I’ll buy myself a new dimity frock and a chip hat; and when I go to market, won’t all the young men come up and speak to me! Polly Shaw will be that jealous; but I don’t care. I shall just look at her ad toss my head like this.” As she spoke she tossed her head back the Pail fell off it and all the milk was spilt. So she had to go home and tell her mother what had occurred. “Ah, my child,” said the mother, “Do not count your chickens before they are hatched.” 10. Patty’s job is ….

a. milking a cow b. selling milk c. selling chicken d. selling eggs e. selling hat

11. The character of Patty is ….

a. diligent b. lazy c. arrogant d. greedy e. jealous

12. The climax of the text is when ….

a. Patty went to the market to sell the milk b. Patty was imagining her future c. Patty fell her pail off d. Patty went home sad e. Patty’s mother advised her

13. The characters in text are …. a. Patty and the Milkmaid b. Patty and farmer Brown c. Patty and the Parson’s wife d. Patty and Polly Shaw e. Patty and her mother

14. “Patty the Milkmaid was going to market carrying

her milk in a pail on her head.” The other name of pail is ….

a. pale b. bucket c. box d. glass e. pan

Text 4

A Lion and a Mouse A lion was awakened from sleep by a mouse running over his face. Rising up angrily, he caught him and was about to kill him when the mouse piteously entered, saying, “If you would only spare my life, I would be sure to repay your kindness.” The lion laughed and let him go. It happened shortly after this that the lion was caught by hunters, who bound with him with strops to the ground. The mouse, recognizing his roar, came, gnawed the rope with his teeth, and set him free, exclaiming, “You ridiculed the idea of my ever being able to help you, expecting to receive from me any repayment of your favor; now you know that it is possible for even a mouse to confer on a big lion.” (Source: Encarta) 15. The text above is a ….

a. recount text b. procedure c. narrative d. hortatory exposition e. analytical exposition

16. The characters in the text above are ….

a. the lion and the hunter b. the mouse and the hunter c. the lion and the mouse d. the lion and the farmer e. the mouse and the farmer

17. The orientation of the text above is stated in ….

a. 1st paragraph b. 2nd paragraph c. 1st sentence d. 2nd sentence e. last sentence


18. The reorientation of the text is …. a. the lion ate the mouse b. the mouse helped the lion c. the hunter killed the tiger d. the lion helped the mouse e. the hunter helped the lion

Text 5 There are many different causes of car accidents in the United States. Sometimes accidents are caused by bad weather. Ice or snow can make toads very dangerous. Accidents also can result from problems with the car. Even a small problem like a flat tire can be serious. Bad roads are another cause of accidents. Some accidents are caused by drinking too much alcohol. 19. The social function of the text above is ….

a. to tell the readers about the accident in the US b. to persuade the reader that car accidents are

caused by some causes c. to amuse the reader with car accident stories d. to tell the reader the step to avoid car accident e. to retell past stories of car accidents

20. What is the paragraph about?

a. problems with car engines b. result of car accidents c. the frequency of car accidents d. weather conditions in the US e. car accidents and their causes

21. Car accidents in the US are caused by the

following, except …. a. drunken drivers b. bad roads c. unskilled drivers d. icy roads e. a flat tire

Text 6 Hurricanes generally occur in the North Atlantic from May through November, with the pack of the hurricane season in September, only rarely will they occur from December through April in that part of the ocean. The main reason for the occurrence of hurricane during this period is that the temperature on the water surface is at its warmest and the humidity of the air is at its highest. Of the tropical storms that occur each year in the North Atlantic, only about five, on the average, are powerful enough to be called hurricanes. To be classified as a hurricane, a tropical storm must have winds reaching speed of at least 117 kilometers per hour, but the winds are often much stronger than that; the winds of intense hurricanes can easily surpass 240 kilometers per hour.

51. The social function of the text above is …. a. to describe hurricanes b. to tell event before hurricanes come c. to show how to make hurricanes d. to persuade some one to create hurricanes e. to amuse the reader with hurricanes stories

52. The passage mainly discusses …. a. the number of hurricanes in a year b. the strength of hurricanes c. the weather in the north Atlantic d. hurricanes in a certain part of the world e. hurricanes and disaster of the world 53. Which of the following is TRUE according to the

text? a. Three are always hurricanes in the North

Atlantic All year round. b. Extremely warm weather and high humidity

can cause hurricanes. c. Very strong winds are the result of

hurricanes. d. Hurricanes occur every month from may to

November. e. Tropical countries have a lot of intense

hurricanes. Text 7

Have you ever been humiliated by a little girl? Last week, my four year old daughter, Sally, was

invited to a children party. I decided to take her by train. Sally was excited because she has never traveled on

in train before. She sat near the window and asked question about any thing she saw.

Suddenly, a middle-aged lady came into out compartment and sat opposite to sally.

Hallo, little girl,” she said. Sally did lady was dressed, but looked at her curiously. The lady was dressed in a blue coat and a large, funny hat.

After the train had left the station, the lady opened her handbag and took out her compact. She then began to make up her face.

“Why are you doing that?” Sally asked. “To make my self beautiful,” the lady answered. She put away her compact and smiled kindly. “But you away still ugly,” Sally said. Sally was amused, but I was very embarrassed.

54. Where did the incident happen? a. at home b. in the bus c. in the train d. at the bus station e. at the railway station



55. Where did Sally want to go? a. She wanted to go her school. b. She was going to go to her friend’s birthday

party c. She would go to a wedding party d. She went to the zoo e. She was going to go to beauty salon

56. “Suddenly, a middle aged lady came into out

compartment and sat opposite to Sally.” The underlined word has the same meaning with …. a. behind b. in front of c. next to d. beside e. far away

57. “Suddenly, a middle-aged lady came into out

compartment and sat opposite Sally.” The underhand phrase means a lady whose age is around …. a. 1 – 5 years old b. 5 – 10 years old c. 11 – 20 years old d. 20 – 30 years old e. 40 – 50 years old

58. The purpose of the text is ….

a. to inform the readers of the incident in the train

b. to entertain the readers with the incident c. to explain the reader about the incident in the

train d. to describe the character of sally e. to persuade the reader to take a train

59. Who writes the text above?

a. Sally’s mother b. Sally c. The middle-aged lady d. The conductor e. Another person in the train

Text 8 He was a young father, wheeling the pram trough the garden while the baby was screaming its head off. “Take it easy, Jason,” he said calmly, “There’s nothing to worry about. A middle-aged woman noticed his soothing manner and marveled at the new breed of young husband. When the baby screamed even louder she heard him say,” Cool it, Jason, don’t get excited, lad, cool it soon.” Touched by his gentle manner the woman leaned into the pram and cooed, “There, there, Jason. What’s bothering you?” “Excuse me, lady,” said the father, “That’s Jeremy, I’m Jason.”

60. Jason was the name of …. a. the baby b. the father c. the woman d. the old woman e. the middles-aged woman

61. The code of the text above is ….

a. when the young father took his baby for a walk

b. when the baby cried loudly c. when the woman looked at him d. when the woman tried to help the man e. when the man explained about their names

62. The text above is told by ….

a. the young father b. the baby c. the woman d. a third person e. the young mother

Teacher : Have you done your assignment? Mimi : Yes, ma’am. Here it is Teacher : Let me see, mm … what do you want to

draw here Mini : It’s village ma’am. These is a rice field, a

river, and a mounth. Teacher : It’s very good. I like it. What is it on the

rice field ? Mimi : It’s a buffalo, ma’am. It is ploughing the

field. Teacher : I see. Keep up your work Mimi : Thanks, ma’am 63. From the dialogue above we know that it was a/an

… class a. English b. Art c. Physics d. Chemistry e. Maths 64. The teacher feels … about Mimi’s work. a. sad b. dissatisfied c. satisfied d. unhappy e. disappointed 65. What will Mimi do next? a. play around b. study chemist c. continue drawing d. count her money e. sing loudly


66. Father : Where have you been? You made us worried!

Lina : I’m sorry, dad From the dialogue above, we know that father expresses …. a. Sympathy b. Apology c. Pleasure d. Anger e. relief

67. Teacher : Bimo Bimo : Yes, ma’am Teacher : this is your test result Bimo : I got nine! I’m glad about it. My

mother won’t be angry with me Bimo is expressing ….

a. Worry b. Anxiety c. Anger d. Rrelief e. sadness

68. “Ouch” “What happened, son?” “I cut my finger white cutting this carrot.” “You should have been careful. Here, put the

medicine on it.” “Yes, mom” From the sentence above, the son expresses ….

a. Pain b. Happiness c. Sadness d. Relief e. pleasure

69. Mother : What is this? Look at this mess! Why don’t you make your bed? Son : I’ll do it right away, mom. From the dialogue above, the mother expresses

…. a. Happiness b. Love c. Endearment d. Anger e. satisfaction

70. Winna : Tina, look at this queue for the ticket. I have to wait for a long time.

Tina : Come on, don’t be mad. It’s common if we have to queue to get a ticket for a new movie.

From the dialogue above, we know that Tina …. a. is angry b. resolves anger c. is disappointed d. agrees with Winna e. asks for information

71. Nina : Oh, I’m glad we finally catch this bus.

We won’t be late. Nani : Yes, you’re right. From the dialogue above we know that Nina is

expressing …. a. Pain b. agreement c. relief d. sympathy e. sorrow 72. Nube : Congratulations, Maia. your design won

the contest. Maia : Thanks, Nube. I’m very glad about it. The underlined phrase expresses …. a. pain b. pleasure c. relief d. sympathy e. sorrow 73. Yosie : Ouch! Icha : What’s up, Yos? Yosie : I cut my finger Icha : Let me get you some medicine. From the dialogue above, Yosie is expressing ….

a. pain b. pleasure c. relief d. sympathy e. sorrow



Latihan Soal The text below is for questions 1 to 3

My Brother's Smart Parrot

My brother has a very smart pet. It is a parrot. Wlien he bought it one year ago from his friend, it was just like other parrot. My brother wants that his parrot can speak like people.

Every day my brother trains it how to speak like people. First, he says some short words or expressions such as hello, good inorning, and good bye. Then, he asks the parrot to follow what he says. He does this again and again until his parrot can follow the expressions well.

Now, my brother's parrot can speak almost like people. There are some words and expressions that this parrot can say such as "hello, good morning, how are you, who are you, and good bye". But, "hello" is one word that the parrot can sav very fluently. Since my brother puts his parrot in front of the house, every time someone passes by, the parrot always greets him saying "hello".

1. How is the parrot ? a. small b. smart c. big d. beautiful e. brown 2. "... the parrot can say very fluently". (Par 3, line

6) What does the word printed in bold meari? a. able to speak a language b. able to speech c. able to speak a language easily and well d. able to talk e. able to sing 3. What is the writer's purpose of writing this kind of

text? a. To entertain the readers. b. To tell unusual things in the past. c. To tell a series of events in the past. d. To tell a series of story about a smart parrot. e. To tell many kinds of parrot. The text below is for questions 4 to 6

Me Versus High Heels (Aku VS Sepatu Hak Tinggi)

Sasha is a tomboy who likes basketball, soccer,

wall climbing, and other boys' activities. She doesn't pay much attention to her looks, fashion trends, and other so - called girly stiff.

Until the day she bumps into Arnold and falls

madly really in love with him. She's willing to do anything to be Arnold's kind of girl; feminine, trendy, nea.t, and girly. With the help of her friend, Lola, Sa sha starts shopping for all the things girly and trendy, goes to beauty parlors and spas, and learns to wear highheels. She leaves all the boys' stuff and activities. Instead, she joins yoga and gymnastics classes, becomes a member of her school cheerleader team, and learns how to cook.

But after everything that she's done, Arnold doesn't really love her. He doesn't even like her. Then she breaks into pieces. But that makes her realize that there's a boy who's in love with her. A boy who loves her just the way she is.

4. Who is the story mostly about? a. A Snow Princes b. Cinderella c. Sasha d. Lola e. Sasha's friend 5. “ ... shopping for all the things girly and trendy ...

(paragraph 2, line 6). The word printed in bold shows that Sasha starts

shopping for all things girly and.... a. traditional fashion b. well-known fashion c. old fashion d. modern and influenced by the most recent

fashions e. good fashion 6. What is the correct structure of the narrative text

above? a. Orientation Þ Record of event Þ

Reorientation b. Orientation Þ Resolution Þ Complication c. Orientation Þ Complication Þ

Resolution d. Aim Þ Materials Þ Steps e. Introduction Þ Orientation Þ Record of

event The text below is for questions 7 to 9

Singapore has a variety of sports facilities which include indoor and outdoor stadiums, tracks, multipurpose playing fields, sports halls and courts, swimming complexes, sailing lagoons, as well as outdoor exercise apparatus in public parks. These facilities cater to a great variety of sports that people enjoy.

One traditional sporting game still played is 'sepak raga'. This refers to a ball made of woven rattan. The ball is tossed to players of the opposing team using any parts of the body, especially the feet and head but never the hands, and it must not be allowed to touch the ground.



Until recently, no proper roles existed for the game. It is now popularly known by its Thai name `Sepak takraw'. It now has its own set of formal rules and a more durable plastic ball is used.

7. What is one traditional sporting game in

Singapore according to the text above? a. basketball b. volleyball c. sepak raga d. football e. swimming 8. Singapore has a variety of sports facilities ...

(Paragraph 1, line 1). The word printed in bold has the same meaning with ....

a. different things b. various c. same things d. similar with e. traditional 9. The second paragraph of the text above describe

about .... a. Singapore city b. Tourism areas in Singapore c. A variety of sports facilities d. Sepak raga e. People in Singapore The text below is for questions 10 to 13

WELCOME TO AMERICA

It's the first time for young Jose to travel to the

United States from Mexico. He made his first trip to Yankee Stadium, but there were no tickets left for sale.

Taking pity on the poor guy, a friendly ticket salesman found him an empty seat near the American flag.

Later, Jose wrote home enthusiastically about his experience.

"The Americans are so friendly!" he concluded . "Before the game started, they all stood up and

looked at me and sang, Jose, can you see?" (The first line of the US' anthem, " Oh, say, can you see?") 10. Who does make a travel from Mexico to United

States? a. Salesman b. Americans c. Jose d. A guy e. A little boy

11. Taking pity on the poor guy, a friendly ticket salesman found him .... (line 5) What does the word printed in bold mean?

a. A feeling of happiness b. A feeling of pride c. A feeling of unhappiness d. A feeling of sympathy and understanding for

someone else's unhappiness or difficult situation.

e. A feeling of dislike 12. How does the writer make the scene 9 funny? a. By providing clue at the beginning. b. By arranging events in the order they

happened. c. By giving a personal comment in the end of

the story. d. By giving a twist at the end of the story. e. By giving a funny thing in the middle of

story. 13. The communicative purpose of this text is.... a. to inform readers about the soldier's problem b. to describe the soldier's experience c. to explain the reader's about the job' of a

surgeon d. to share amusing story with others e. to persuade readers to be concerned with the

soldier's case The text below is for questions 14 to 17

The students in the second level of SMPN 5 YK went to Bali last year for study tour. At 7 o'clock in the morning, the students went to Bali by bus. They were very enjoyable in the travelling. They sang some pop songs and made some games. Also they exchanged their snack to each other. At 12 o'clock, they stayed for an hour to have supper and took a rest in the restaurant. They were served with a lot of foods such as sate, soto, bakso, and soup. Some of them ate Sate and others ate solo and bakso. They were very satist ed with the restaurant service.

One hour later, they came into the bus and continued their travelling. During that time most of them slept. Only some of there read some comics and listened to the music. A 6.00 o'clock p.ni they arrived in Gilhnarrr;ifr, then one hour later' they crossed, the straits by ship. Lastly, they arrived in die.ho,el.

During three days, the weut to Sanur Beach, Bedigul. Pure Bekasih, Kute Beach, Tanah Lot and Sangeh. They were beautiful places that would never. be gotten. In Ilie next morning, they came haci. to jogyakarta.


http://never.be/

http://haci.to/


14. How was the travelling that told in the text above? a. It was boring. b. It was not interesting. c. It was terrible. d. It was enjoyable. e. It was sad event. 15. Which places were not visited by them in Bali? a. Tanah Lot b. Bedigul c. Sanur beach d. Sangeh e. Tulamben 16. Also they exchanged their snack to each other

(paragraph 1, line 6). What does the word printed in bold mean? a. To give a gift for others. b. To buy a thing for others. c. To change for something else of a similar

value or type. d. To make a thing for anybody else. e. To share something with others. 17. Why did not the writer tell some interesting places

in Bali clearly? a. Because the writer focused on them. b. Because the writer mostly tell about the

travelling to Bali. c. Because the writer didn't know about them. d. Because the writer did not go there. e. Because the writer me. tly tell on their

activities. The text below is for questions 18 to 20

Early Shopping

It was holiday season and the judge was in a merry mood as he asked the prisoner, "What are you charged with?"

"Doing my shopping early," relied the defendant. "That's no offense," said the joggle. "How early

were you doing this dropping?'. "Before the store opened," countered the prisoner.

(Taken horn C'NS, English Teen Magazine Vol.4 No. 26) 18. Where does the above take place? a. in a class b. in a court c. in a bank d. in a course e. in a market

19. That's no offense", .... (line 4) The word printed in bold means ... . a. good feelings b. happy c. upset and hurt feelings d. worry e. sad 20. How does the writer make the scene funny? a. by providing clue at the beginning. b. by presenting a personal replied. c. by giving a twist at the beginning. d. by giving a twist in the end. e. by presenting some funny words. The text below is for questions 21 to 23

The Best Remedy

Cheating was one of the bad habits that I couldn't get rid of. One day, during a test, I finished faster than my best friend who sat. next to me. Amazingly, I didn't cheat on that exam because l had realy studied the night before and I could answer all of the questions quite easily. Seeing that I had finished, my friend signaled nre asking me to cheat for her! She indicated she didn't have the nerve to do it herself. I told her to look out of the teacher while I took a, peek at my note book while I was doing drat. Suddenly, out of nowhere someone pinched my ear and I heard the whole class laughed at me. Yep, the teacher was standing behind us and had watched the whole scene. Needless to say, I never cheated again. (CMS English Teen Magazine Vol.4 No. 26) 21. What is the writer's bad habit according to the text

above? a. cheating b. robbing c. killing d. playing e. buying 22. She indicated she didn't have the nerve to do it

herself (line 7-8). What does the word printed in bold mean? a. to notice b. to give attention c. to show a value or change d. to know more detail e. courage 23. How does the writer make the scene funny? a. by arranging events in the order they

happened b. by giving a twist in the end of the story c. by presenting a personal comment in the end

of the story d. by providing clue at the beginning e. by presenting some funny words



24. Lia : Did you make this cake by yourself? Tia : Oh, I had my servant make it. From the dialogue we know that Lia .... a. had made the cake b. made the cake herself c. got the cake made d. was asked to make the cake e. made the cake with her servant 25. Aji : Can you cook "sate" by yourself? Ita :

No, I'll have my sister ... it. a. cook b. cooked c. to cook d. checking e. being checked 26. Reta : May I borrow your book ? Desi : I'm sorry, it ... by my mother now. a. read b. is reading c. is being read d. will read e. is read 27. Ari : Why don't you try to find a job in

factory? With the money you earn, you can buy things you need.

Boy : If I worked in a factory. I wouldn't have much time to study.

What does the italicized sentence mean? a. Boy works hard in a factory. b. Ari allows Boy to work in a factory. c. Boy didn't work in a factory. d. Boy worked in a factory. e. Boy doesn't work in a factory. 28. Hayati : Bonny is very disappointed. Hanafi : It's his own fault. If he had come on

time, he would have got the job. From the dialogue we can conclude that.... a. Bony got the job b. Hanafi came on time c. Bony came late d. Hanafi got the job e. Hanafi missed the opportunity 29. Nindy : When did you get this cassette? Lia : Yesterday. When I ... home, a boy

asked me to give it to you. a. walk b. walked c. walking d. was walking e. has been walking

30. Andi : I didn't see your sister yesterday. Where was she? Roy : She ... with her friend when you came

here. a. is going b. was going c. were going d. is gone e. was gone 31. Elis : I ... English since seven years ago. Then,

I am going study French next month. Dion : Wow, that's great Elis. a. have studied b. am studying c. was studying d. studied e. study 32. Dinda : What about my new dress, Mother?

Mother: Don't worry. Your father ... a lovely evening dress for you.

Dinda : Really? Why didn't he tell me? Mother : It will be surprise, won't it? a. haven't bought b. has bought c. isn't buying d. was buying e. were buying 33. The teacher said., "Is Mary absent?" The teacher asked ... . a. is Mary absent? b. was Mary absent? c. if Mary is absent d. whether Mary is absent e. if Mary was absent 34. I asked Wati, "Where does she come from?" I asked Wati .... a. where she comes from b. from where was coming c. from which she came d. where she came from e. from where she is? 35. Annie asked, "Where do you come from?" Annie asked her .... a. where did she come from b. from where was she coming c. from which she came d. where she came from e. from where she is



37. The student said, "Do we have a test today?" The student asked ... . a. do we have a test today b. were we have a test today c. if we had a test that day d. whether we have a test today e. whether we have a test that day 38. Rieka : What would you give me if you're sent

abroad? Reza : If I were sent abroad, I . . . a dictionary

for you. a. bought b. will buy c. would buy d. will have bought e. would have bought 39. Ady : Sony, let's go to Lina's party. Sony : If I had time, I would go there. From the dialogue we know that .... a. Sony goes to Lina's party. b. Ady goes to Lina's party. c. Sony doesn't go to Lina's party. d. Sony came to Lina's party. e. Sony will come to Lina's party. 40. Ani : .... the bag? Reza : Yes, please. Thank you. a. Should you carry b. Must you carry c. Why do you carry d. Aren't you tired of carrying e. Would you like me to carry 41. Yusuf : ....... Joni : I am sorry to hear that. a. I will go for holiday tomorrow. b. They bought a new car yesterday. c. Let us go to the library. d. Do you need some help. e. My mother is sick Rina 42. Rina : I think the deforestation will cause even

greater disaster. Nina : . . . . Therefore the illegal logging should

be stopped. The government has to be serious to deal with this problem.

a. I'm absolutely agree with you. b. I don't think so. c. Not at all. d. I doubt it. e. I am sorry to hear that.

43. Lili : Will you go to the art museum with your parents?

Dion : Of course not. I ... watch football on TV than go to the art museum.

a. prefer b. choose c. like d. hate e. would rather 44. Andy : Hi, Irma....? Irma : That's very kind of you, but I'm

expecting my father. a. Could you tell me the way b. Can I drive you home c. Shall I bring you a drink d. Shall I help you e. Could. you give me a lift 45. Sri : Have you visited Bob? He got an accident

last week. Dwi : Oh, poor Bob. I hope he'll be better soon. The italicized sentence expresses .... a. sadness b. pleasure c. sympathy d. expectation e. satisfaction 46. Adi : Jane didn't pass her exam. Yudo : Oh. I am sorry to hear that. From the italicized words we know that the se

cond speaker expresses her . . . a. disappointment b. sympathy c. displeasure d. apology e. anger 47. Catherine : Why do you look so sad? Larissa : Didn't you hear the news last

night? The eruption volcano has killed more than two hundred people in my village.

Catherine : I'm sorry to hear that. Catherine expresses her ... . a. fear b. sadness c. apology d. surprise e. sympathy



48. Ani : Do you know that Mrs. Joko is in the hospital?

Ben : No, I don't. What's wrong with her? Ani : She had an accident not far from your

house? Ben : I'm sorry to hear that. Shall we go to visit

her now? Ani : OK. I'll pick me up now. The italicized sentence expresses .... a. invitation b. probability c. ignorance d. advice e. sympathy 49. Ari : Although this is the best cinema in town,

there are not many people visiting it. Tia : . . . nowadays most people prefer

spending their time at home watching TV.

a. Oh, no. b. I don't think so. c. Really? d. That's right. e. It's not true. 50. Audi : I think the government should give more

attention to small scale industries. Bobi : I think so. Because this group offers more

job opportunities. The italicized sentence means Bobi .... a. likes it b. denies it c. objects it d. dislike it e. agrees it



Latihan Soal Read the text carefully and answer the questions! Text 1 A young student was walking in the woods when he heard a small voice calling him. He looked all around, but could not see anyone. The voice called out again, and appear to come from the roots of an enormous oak tree. There, the student found a bottle, in which there was a tiny man who begged, “Let me out”. So the student removed the cork, and a cloud of smoke emerged and grew into a frightening giant. “I am a genie,” said the giant, and I was imprisoned in the bottle by magician. But now that I am freed, prepare to meet your end”. “Wait a minute,” said the young man. I don’t believe one word you have said. A giant of your size could not have really come out of that little bottle. You could never forget into it”. “Of course I can,” said the genie, “I’ll prove it to you”. As soon as the genie returned to the bottle, the young man replaced the cork. The next time, in order to get free, the spirit had to make a bargain with the student: not only would it refrain from killing him, but it had also to give him a dagger which turned into gold everything it touched, and healed all wounds. And afterwards, thanks to that magic dagger, the student brcame a rich and famous doctor . … 1. The type of the text above is …. a. narrative b. description c. anecdote d. report e. procedure 2. The characters in the text above are …. a. The student and the genie b. The giant and the genie c. The magician and the genie d. The magician and the student e. The doctor and the student 3. The story take place in …. a. oak tree b. the woods c. doctor’s room d. imprisoned e. a bottle

4. The word ‘I’ in: “I don’t believe on word …” (paragraph 4) refers to ….

a. genie b. famous doctor c. young man d. magician e. magic dagger Text 2 At the birth of the Indonesian nation in 1945, Australia and Indonesia shared a positive and friendly relationship. In 1947 Australia supported Indonesia’s struggle for independency by placing embargoes on Dutch supplies, arms and troops. Australian dock workers went on strike and significant numbers of Australians demonstrated in the streets in support of Indonesian independence. The Dutch were unable to ship supplies through Australian ports during this period. Much of the support Australians gave to Indonesia was based on friendship that developed between Australian soldiers and the Indonesian people at the end of the Second World War. There was also a strong anti-imperialist mood among some sections of the Australian population at that time. It is a significant that Australia supported her Asian neighbours against a European colonial power. 5. The passage above is about …. a. the early friendship between Indonesia and

Australia b. the influence of the Second World

War on Indonesia and Australia c. A strong anti-imperialist mood d. the relationship between Australian soldiers

and Indonesian people e. the dutch were unable to ship supplies

through Australion ports 6. What is the meaning of “embargo?” a. permission b. demonstration c. prohibition d. shipping e. aligment 7. Indonesia and Australian shared positive and ….

relationship at the birth of the Indonesia nation. a. clear b. friendly c. friendship d. significant e. long lasting



8. Australia did the following to support Indonesia,

except …. a. placing embargoes to Dutch supplies b. demonstrating in the streets c. going in strike and significant d. shipping Dutch supplies through Australian

ports e. support dutch to supplies through Australian

ports Text 3 All plants need water to grow. They get this water from the soil. In some places nature supplies all the water that is needed. But in other places people must find ways to supplement nature’s supply. The system of supplying water to ensure proper growth of plants and to increase the field of crops is called irrigation. The use of irrigation is one of the most important practices ever developed. Only about 15 % of the world’s farmland is irrigated. But the irrigated land supplies a large percentage of the world’s food supply. Irrigation is a practiced on every continent except Antarctica. Irrigation is used to supplement rainfall. Even in humid areas, irrigation is needed to grow certain crops. For example, rice-fields must be flooded until harvest time. 9. Where do the plants get water from? a. the soil b. the rain fall c. humid areas d. the flood e. Antarctica 10. The main purpose of irrigation is …. a. to absorb water b. to grow certain crops c. to obtain water for a reservoir d. to store water e. to make plants grow 11. Which of the following statement is true

according to the text? a. Irrigation is used in addition to rainfall b. Nature supplies all the water everywhere c. In the rainy season we don’t need irrigation d. All the world’s farmland use irrigation e. Irigation is well developed in Antarctica 12. The second paragraph is about …. a. the use of irrigation b. the world’s food supply c. how to irrigate rice-field d. the importance of agriculture practice e. the ways to supplement nature’s supply

13. Even in humid areas, irrigation is needed to grow certain crops.

The underlined word means …. a. damp b. dry c. wet d. hard e. soft 14. “The practice of supplying water to ensure proper

growth ….” (paragraph 2) The synonym of the word proper is ….. a. true b. safe c. effective d. good e. right Text 4 Roses are very popular flowers. The most common roses are red and white roses. In some places, there are purple and black roses. A rose has thorn on its stem. Jasmine is also popular flower. It is much smaller and has only a white color. Jasmine is used for materials and ornaments for various needs and occasion. Dahlia is much bigger than a rose. It has more petals and looks more solid. It usually has a dark red color. Sunflowers are the biggest of all. The petals are longer and more pointed. They also have longer stems and they are mostly yellow in colour. Another popular name for the sunflower is chrysanthemum. 15. The text above is mainly talks about _______ a. roses b. jasmine c. colour d. flowers e. sunflowers 16. The text describe many colours for _______ a. roses b. jasmine c. ornaments d. flowers e. sunflowers 17. What is the smallest size of all flowers according

to the text? a. roses b. jasmine c. dahlias d. flowers e. sunflowers



18. What is the type of the above text ? a. narrative b. descriptive c. report d. recount e. anecdote Text 5 Internet access and e-commerce in Australia remains inequitable, with disabled and older people facing many barriers to participation in the electronic age. The barriers include the physical design of facilities, the cost of internet access and the design of interactive voice-response systems. The Human rights and Equal Opportunity Commission’s report on electronic commerce said that technology’s great potential for increasing access was not being realized. The commission emphasized that electronic facilities needed improvement. The design of ‘advanced’ ATMs had made them harder for blind people to use, compared with earlier models. Machines that once had buttons now relied on screen displays, for instance. The commission also suggested that students with disabilities needed particular attention when educational material was provided in electronic form. 19. What is the main topic of passage above? a. the internet access and e-commerce in

Australia b. the Human Rights and Equal Opportunity

Commission c. the barriers faced by disabled and older

people using electronic facilities d. the cost of internet access and design of

voice-response system e. the improvement of electronic facilities in

Australia 20. Why is it difficult for blind people to use ATMs

now? Because …. a. ATMs use interactive voice-response system b. Technology’s great potential for increasing

access was not being realized c. ATMs that once had buttons now relied on

screen displays d. The earlier designs were more advanced e. Electronic facilities needed improvement 21. Internet access and e-commerce in Australia

remains inequitable,with disabled and older people facing …. (paragraph 1)

The word disabled bold means …. a. skilled b. honored c. handicapped d. injured e. treated

22. What is the synonym of the word equal on the first paragraph?

a. the activities b. the models c. the ability d. the same e. the strength Text 6 A young man and very beautiful princess lost her ball in the water while she was playing by the side of a lake. She began to cry so sadly that the frog who sat beside the lake croacked to her, “What will you give me if I get you your ball back?” “All the gold you could wish for!” said the princess. “No, I ask only I’ll be allowed to stay with you and be your friend,” said the frog. The princess gave her word (what did such a promise cost her if it meant she could have her ball back she ran off so fast that the frog could not keep up with her. Nevertheless, after a while the frog arrived at the place. As soon as she saw the frog, the princess was frightened. She ran to ask for help from her father, but the king, who knew what had happened, ordered his daughter to keep her promise. So the princess picked the frog up gently in her hand, but, with a shiver of disgust, she let it drop to the ground again. But that one brief touch was enough to break the spell that bound the frog, and caused it to turn back into a young and handsome prince he had been before. The story ends with the happiest wedding ceremonies. 23. What is the type of the text? a. narrative b. descriptive c. report d. recount e. anecdote 24. What is the topic the text above? a. The princess ball b. A beautiful princess c. The princess and the frog d. The young prince e. The princess father 25. Paragraph three mainly talks about …… a. the frightened princess b. how the princess broke her promise c. what the princess asked her father d. why the frog turned back into a handsome

prince e. what the King ordered his daughter to do.



26. Which of the following statement is true according to the text? a. The princess hid at the back of the palace b. The princess tried not to keep her promise c. The frog couldn’t help the beautiful princess d. The frog paid no attention to the princess e. The King asked his daughter to marry the

frog 27. “All the gold you could wish for!” replied the

princess. (Paragraph 2) The word replied means …. a. answered b. ordered c. shouted d. told e. said Text 7 I think federal governments are necessary because they help to keep the economic system in order; if any problems occur, the federal government will more or less lighten it out.. I also think that the state governments aren’t necessary because there are local governments, which are known as municipalities. There is hardly any use for the state governments do all the work. 28. The passage above talks about …. a. the lack of federal government b. the benefit of state government c. the similarities of federal government and

state government d. the difference between federal government

and state government e. governmental system of a country 29. The writer seems to have the …. government. a. federal b. republic c. state d. communist e. kingdom 30. The two paragraphs above are part of a hortatory

exposition. They are the … of the text. a. point b. argument c. recommendation d. thesis e. conclusion

31. Rossy : “I did not meet Fikri when I came to his house yesterday”.

Ade : “ Oh, he _____ for Pontianak to see his uncle”.

a. will leave b. would leave c. are leaving d. is leaving e. has left 32. If he studied hard, he _____ his examinations. a. passes b. had passed c. would have passed d. will pass e. would pass 33. If you use a city map, you _____ your way. a. are not losing b. have not lose c. did not lose d. will not lose e. would not lose 34. My neighbour is well _____ and a very succeesful

businessman. a. educate b. educative c. educating d. education e. educated 35. The hall has been _____ decorated for the opening

ceremony. a. beauty b. beautiful c. beautifully d. beautify e. beautified 36. Harry : I am not well today. Rony : What did Harry say to you? Rudi : She said _____________ a. I am not well today b. He was not well today c. He had not been well that day d. He is not well today e. I was not well today 37. The strong earthquake caused a lot of _____ to

several houses and building in Yogyakarta and central Java.

a. disaster b. strikes c. victims d. advantages e. damage



38. Although everything written in newspapers is not always true, newspapers are believed to be an important _____ information.

a. force b. source c. course d. torch e. porch 39. The young beautiful Lady _____ husband is a

journalist is talented teacher. a. that b. who c. whose d. which e. whom 40. Lake Maninjau is one of the famous tourist spots

in west Sumatera. The word famous means _____ a. beautiful b. wonderful c. well-known d. exiting e. interesting 41. X : We hope someday our generation can build

a temple like Prambanan. Y : Yes, I hope so. From the dialogue we know that both of the

speakers express their _____ a. desire b. regret c. sympathy d. request e. axpectation 42. The man _____ was caught breaking into his

neighbour’s house is arrested to the police station. a. which b. whom c. whose d. who e. that 43. The student’s book were left in the classroom. He

came here this morning to take them. Wa can say: The student _____ books were left in the classroom came here this morning to take them.

a. which b. whom c. whose d. who e. that

44. Puji : Where is Rizky? Haris : He _____ the new good book in the library

now. a. is reading b. was reading c. has been reading d. will be reading e. would be reading 45. The hospital _____ his father works has a large

building. a. who b. when c. which d. where e. whom 46. “Don’t make noise, students”, the teacher said. a. She told the students don’t make noise b. She said the students didn’t make noise c. She didn’t say the students should make noise d. She told the students not to make noise e. She tells the dtudents not to make noise 47. “Where are you from, Frans?” I asked Frans _____ a. from where is he b. from which he came c. from which he came d. where he came from e. where did he came from 48. My sister is very busy in the kitchen. She _____ a

cake for my father birthday. a. prepare b. will prepare c. has been preparing d. is preparing e. was preparing 49. If I saw you, I would say hello. It means _____ a. I saw you b. I don’t see you c. I had not seen you d. I didn’t see you e. I wouldn’t see you 50. If you want to make a good dress, why don’t you

ask him? He is a good _____ a. theraphyst b. beautician c. tailor d. manicurist e. barber


Kelas 11 SMA

Documents